Home

Owner`s Manual

1. Connecting a Sound Source or External Device 1 Connect the VC 8 or VM88 to the DATA IN jack of the VF160 2 Connect 8 sound sources into INPUT jacks Ato H 89 Fostex VF OoO eee Setting the VC 8 or VM88 1 Set the VC 8 or VM88 so it outputs adat digital signals For more details refer to the VC 8 or VM88 User s Manual Setting Digital In on the VF 160 1 Set the Digital In menu in the SETUP mode to adat For more details refer to the SETUP mode on page 134 REC Track and Master Fader settings 1 Press the INPUT SEL key Check to see that ch9 ch16 are set to TRK Track If there is any channel that is set to IN Input switch it to TRK Press the DIRECT REC TRK key so all tracks are READY The REC track selected will appear on the display Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch1 ch16 so all tracks are READY Nowthe adat digital signals ch1 ch8 from VC 8 or VM88 are recorded on tracks 1 8 and the input signals from IN PUT A to H are recorded on tracks 9 16 Press the EXIT NO key and return to the Normal Display If normal adat digital signals from VC 8 or VM88 are input into VF1
2. Connecting the sound source 4 Pressthe RECORD key andthensetthe READY tracktoinput monitor RED Flashing 1 Connect the OUT of the drum machine to INPUT H By using the input monitor it is possible to monitor the 2 Connect the sound sources to record to INPUT A to F sound sources of ch1 ch6 and the INPUT H signals at the same time Set the PAN as desired so it is easy to monitor Setting the input signal to INPUT H the sound 1 Press the INPUT SEL key ORANGE Flashing 5 Adjust the TRIM of each channel while outputting the sound 2 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch16 so it flashes see ORANGE ch16 gt INPUT Set the input level of each sound source then proceed to the next REC process 3 Press the EXIT NO key to return to the Normal Display 4 Set the ch16 fader and master fader to 0 Record 5 Start the drum machine and then adjust the TRIM of 8 16 H 1 To start recording press the PLAY key while the RECORD The input signals of INPUT H are output from the L R ste key is depressed reo OUT Use the MON OUT knob or PHONES knob to Sounds are DIRECTLY RECORDED to tracks 1 6 according increase the volume to an appropriate level to the guidance sounds of input H Setting the input signals to INPUT A to F lt Caution gt e Ifthech16 faderis set to INPUT then track 16 cannot 1 Press the
3. Playback sound Note the following precautions for BUSS recording RECORDER 1 16 Track Mix and record to 1 or 2 tracks WARNING Of the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch9 16 a channel with an IN Input which is lit up ORANGE cannot output sound of the tracks corresponding to ch9 to16 soit is not possible to go to the READY state using the BUSS REC TRK key WARNING Precautions for when selecting a source channel with the BUSS SOURCE key when key is flashing in GREEN e A channel in which the CH STATUS CH SEL key light is OFF is selectable e The channel selected will either have a flashing ORANGE or GREEN CH STATUS CH SEL key e The CH STATUS CH SEL key that is flashing RED is a READY channel track and cannot be selected WARNING Precautions when selecting a REC track with the BUSS REC TRK key key is flashing RED e A channel in which the CH STATUS CH SEL key light is OFF is selectable e The channel selected has a flashing RED CH STATUS CH SEL key e The CH STATUS CH SEL key that is flashing ORANGE or GREEN is selected as a source channel therefore it cannot be selected 43 Fostex V 60 BE Recording the H Input Signal to Track 1 Here we will record a sound source connected to input H on track 1 of the recorder Beforehand set the ch1 to 16 channel faders master fader and the TRIM for A to H to
4. TRIM A H 1 9 2 10 3 11 4412 513 6 14 715 8 16 RECORDER 1 16 Track RECORDER REC BUSS 1 16 Track L R Mix and record to 1 or 2 tracks fostex VF GCO Te Regardless of whether executing DIRECT or BUSS re cording you must select recording sources and record ing tracks You can select them using the following keys depend ing on the recording mode DIRECT or BUSS you are using INPUT SEL key DIRECT REC TRK key REC ASSIGN DIRECT BUSS INPUT SEL SOURCE REC TRK REC TRK pi ng MIXDOWN BUSS REC TRK key BUSS SOURCE key For DIRECT recording INPUT SEL and DIRECT REC TRK keys are used e INPUT SEL key The INPUT SEL key is used to select the channel sources be tween the recorder s output signals TRACK and input sig nals INPUT Pressing the INPUT SEL key displays the input select screen Initially after turning on the VF160 power power on default this screen looks as below in which all channel sources are set to recorder s output signals For DIRECT recording without changing the setting of the screen above press the DIRECT REC TRK key and specify the recording tracks This setting is also used for track bouncing via the BUSS recording mode e DIRECT REC TRK key After confirming the input selection by pressing the INPUT SEL key press the DIRECT REC TRK key to bring
5. adat digital equipment Master Recorder etc 28 Es RISO FOSE LCD The follwing describes the contents shown on the LCD and their operations Menu shown when turning power ON When the VF160 is turned ON with a hard disk already formatted the following menu will appear in order Initial Initializing amp Version gt Current Dr gt IDE gt Name of Hard disk Instantly gt Recording mode Standard or Quick The head of the program ABS 0 will then start up at the time base when the power was turned OFF The LCD menu appearing immediately after turning the power ON is called the Normal Display The Normal Display shows the following items for the 3 time bases Current Location Program Number amp Program Title Scene Number amp Scene Name Level Meter of Tracks 1 16 Stereo OUT L R Master Level Meter Initial 12345678 FONII4ISIE 4E LR Normal display zaf HE 12345678 9i0iliZi3 ISIE J OLE 29 Switching the Time Base The user can switch between time bases by pressing the DISP SEL key while the SHIFT key is depressed In this case the time base alternates in the order of 1 ABS gt 2 BAR BEAT CLR gt 3 MTC gt The normal display always appears when the time base is switched Make use of these displays accordingly HES Pai 6661 506 Init Mix 12345698 FOW4ISIG dE LE Time
6. Program 1 P01 Program 2 P02 _ Program 99 P99 Using a SCSI disk you can save load data for each program individually When using a SCSI disk all audio data including both the Real and Additional tracks shown in black in the diagram below is transferred simultaneously No pilot tone or beep sound is recorded when saving data to a SCSI disk Therefore you can save or load a program much faster than using an S PDIF or adat signal If song data to be saved requires more space than the available disk space you can save the data to more than one disk up to 99 disks You can also save load data to or from a DOS formatted SCSI disk MO zip etc except CD RW CD R via the WAV file format In a save load operation using a WAV file you can specify a track or tracks to be saved or loaded as well as all tracks Using the save function to a CD RW CD R disc you can also make an original audio CD Trk1 amp 2 amp 38 amp 4 amp 5 amp 687 lt Note gt amp 8 amp 9I amp 10 amp 11 amp 12 amp 13 You can save load scene memories and scene event amp 14 15 amp 16 17 amp 18 amp memories only to from a FDMS 3 formatted SCSI disk 19 amp 20 amp 21 amp 23 amp 24 Scene memories and scene event memories can be saved or loaded when using a SCSI device except WAV Program 99 P99 es VIO FOSE lt ltems that can be saved or loaded as s
7. SETUP Fed Delete FGM PGM se okk Sure Hit YES or WO Key 3 Press the ENTER YES key The Normal Display of the next program following the program erased appears Editing a Program Title Note that the program title can be assigned when Creating a New Program as described in the previous section However the user must follow the instructions below to edit a title or Tentative Title that has already been assigned lt Precaution gt Note that only the title of the program that is started up can be edited The user cannot choose a program from the SETUP mode Therefore the user must first start the program to edit before going to the SETUP mode 1 Press the SETUP key in the STOP state The system goes to the SETUP mode and proceeds to the display to select a SETUP menu 2 Turn the JOG dial to select the Title Edit menu then press the ENTER YES key The title name of the current program started appears The left end of the title is highlighted and flashes the flashing cursor indicates that it is editable Atte Edit Fon PEM a Flashing F Bae ek se ek ok oe ko UP DOWH JOG FEl FFWD Hit YES or HO Key fostex VV F OO Be 4 Press the ENTER YES key after inputting the title The title input is set and the LCD returns to the Normal Display 3 Press the REWIND key or F FWD key to move the cursor to the point to e
8. Void In Void Out or Void Data 8 Press the ENTER YES key again The highest program number available on the current drive starts flashing and its program title and the recording time are also shown At the top of the program It is possible to select a program that is not mixed table the total time of the program is shown down if it holds the correct IN and OUT points However if you record such a program to a CD RW SETUP Rez CD R disc with the audio CD format only track 1 ques HES HH Aa F and 2 can be recorded ma Mixek B3 0A So make sure that you select programs properly when making an audio CD 121 Fostex V 60 Bee lt Notes for selecting more than one program gt lt Hint gt When recording more than one program to a CD RW When a CD RW disc on which any data is recorded is set CD R disc do not skip any track when assigning pro if you perform step 7 above i e pressing the ENTER grams to tracks YES key when CD DA is flashing Not Empty appears If you skip any track you cannot record data to the on the display followed by the screen for selecting subsequent tracks In the following example track 03 whether erasing recorded data or ejecting the disc is skipped when assigning programs So only tracks 01 and 02 will be recorded Tracks 03 SETUP k22 and subsequent tracks can not be recorded SC WIGRHT HG Jik Emmet TEESE ESE EE EE EE ER EEE ER ad H
9. m D en B 13 14 IS IG T D C d C d ed d Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch1 Key Flashing RED Indicates I Z 3 4 5 amp 1 HE that ch1 is a d d d e d a READY 5 I0 Il 12 13 14 15 IE OOOO G aa G aa G a G Gs Press the EXIT NO key to return to the Normal Display CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch1 gt Alternately Flashes GREEN RED Indicates that trk1 is RDY Ready g Press RECORD key to set trk1 to the Input Monitor mode Key Flashing RED Set the ch1 fader and master fader to 0 EI Output sound from the sound source while adjusting the TRIM 1 9 A gain to an optimal level The guideline for optimal gain is the border of the PEAK LED lighting ON or OFF when the sound source is at the maximum volume Adjustments should also ensure that the signal does not exceed 0 on the LCD level meter To listen to the sound turn up the MON OUT knob or PHONES knob WARNING Be careful not to excessively raise the volume of the MON OUT or PHONES level Prolonged exposure to loud sounds may have an adverse effect on hearing 32 Tips Level meter When carrying out step 8 mentioned above levels for channel 1 and masters Land R are shown in the meters on the Normal display apes TTT RT Pa1 6661 SHH I nit 42 12345678 1101213 I5I5 dE LA The channel 1 fader controls the signal level sent to the stereo busses L and R which you monitor If y
10. DAT or adat In the example shown on the right the Additional tracks have data from 00m OOs to 10m OOs while the Real tracks have data from 00m OOs to 07m OOs i If you are going to save all tracks the Additional REC END 10m 00s of track data from 00m 00s to 07m 00s will be addinonal track saved but the rest will not be saved REC END 07m 00s of real track seven minutes 97 Fostex V 60O Bee Saving data using the S P DIF or adat digital signal You can save data using the S PDIF or adat digital signal via the DIGITAL DATA OUT jack Use an external device that supports 44 1 kHz sampling frequency the same as the VF160 Connecting to an external device Saving data Connect the DIGITAL DATA OUT jack to the digital input You can save data via the Save PGM menu in the jack of the external digital device DAT or adat etc SETUP mode lt Note gt The DIGITAL DATA OUT jack accommodates either the S PDIF optical or adat digital signal selected Though the S PDIF optical and adat digital signal use the same connector shape the signal formats are different D000 popp0o0p00000 o o0000 o om adat or DAT e When using the S PDIF signal if your DAT only provide the coaxial RCA digital input jack and does not provide the opti
11. Fostex F OCO Be Auto Punch IN OUT Before carrying out an auto punch in out operation you must register the PUNCH IN and PUNCH OUT points Punch In point Punch Out point Recording Track Playback Playback e Programming the PUNCH IN OUT points lt Note gt When programming a PUNCH IN OUT point the time of the punch IN point must always be before the time of the PUNCH OUT point If the PUNCH OUT point precedes the PUNCH IN point a Void Out error message appears on the LCD and prevents use of the AUTO PUNCH mode While the system is in the PLAY or STOP mode press the HOLD gt key at the time to program as the PUNCH IN or PUNCH OUT point LOCATE AGH HOLDO Press the STORE key RED Light ON s24F 99 sF Mo Per Kess The PUNCH IN pointis programmed when the AUTO PUNCH IN key is pressed The PUNCH OUT point is programmed when the AUTO PUNCH OUT key is pressed e AUTO PUNCH IN OUT rehearsal 1 Press the RECORD key while the SHIFT key is depressed to go to the AUTO PUNCH Mode RHSL starts Sone ess Brees Pal 1 Hanh i SBG EENEEEEEETH Flashing LOCATE the point immediately before starting the recording Ifonly the PLAY key is pressed the recordings are rehearsed RHSL steadily lights In the rehearsal mode even though recording is not actually executed the monitor signal for a record ar
12. 3 Startrecording with the master recorder and then play the song on the VF160 from the beginning 4 Stop both machines when recording is completed Tips Fade IN OUT The VF160 Master Fader provides a feature to Fade IN gradually increase the volume or Fade OUT gradually decrease the volume the sound Analog master recorder Digital Mix Down e Connect the digital IN input jack of the master recorder with 3 Fine tune the output level of the VF160 master fader the DIGITAL DATA OUT jack of the VF160 e In General the optimal level is when the level e Direct connection is possible ifthe master recorder meter of the master recorder is 0 at the maximum has a S P DIF optical digital input volume of VF160 Note that any level exceeding O may cause sound distortion e Use the Fostex COP 1 96k for connections if the master recorder has a S P DIF coaxial digital input jack 4 Startrecording with the master recorder and then play the song on the VF160 from the beginning 5 Stop both machines when recording is successfully completed Tips Fade IN OUT The VF160 Master Fader provides the feature to Fade G00 OO ay IN gradually increase the volume or Fade OUT gradually decrease the volume the sound Digital master recorder 2 Prepare the master recorder to accept digital input e The sampling frequency of the VF160 is 44 1kHz Digital mix down is not possible unless the mast
13. If a recording is unsatisfactory in either recording or performance and you want to redo it If you want to record a solo part to another track while listening to the backup tracks PUNCH IN refers to the process to switching from PLAY to REC On the other hand PUNCH OUT refers to the reverse process to switch from REC to PLAY The time to punch in is called the PUNCH IN point and the time to punch out is called the PUNCH OUT point The VF160 features the following 3 types of PUNCH IN OUT modes MANUAL PUNCH IN OUT using the key on the main unit This feature is used for rough recordings Manual punch in out is not recommended during a performance since the process requires using your hands PUNCH IN OUT using the foot switch Recording is possible even during a performance since all punch in out processes are controlled from the foot switch AUTO PUNCH IN OUT Detailed recording is possible since recording takes place with the punchin out time preset programmed prior to the recording Use the DIRECT REC TRK key to put the track to record in the READY mode The TRIM must be adjusted to an optimal gain according to the input monitor When this is set do the following Manual Punch IN OUT 2 Press the PLAY key from the pointimmediately before starting the recording then playback 3 Recording starts by stepping on the foot switch punch in Press PLAY key while holding the RECORD key Press the PLAY key only Punch I
14. e Offset mode option Vari Free SPDIF or adat You can set the mode for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the VF160 lt Notes gt e You need to input MTC from an external device to the VF160 with any Slave Type e The VF160 re chase window is fixed to ten frames That is if an offset between the master device and slave device exceeds ten frames the VF160 interprets that as out of sync and tried to chase and lock to MTC sent from the master device This operation is called re chasing During the re chase operation audio output is muted If the slave machine slips with MTC from the master device by less than ten frames the slave machine continues running while recognizing the slippage e When you set the Slave Type the Vari Pitch function is automatically disabled The VARI PITCH indicator turns off 1 Select Slave Type in the menu selection display and press the ENTER YES key The currently set slave type will flash Vari will flash in the initial setting iSelect Menu i MTC Offset Set Offset Mode A Slave Mode Slave Tyre Rec Protect Flashing 2 Select the desired slave type with the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key It will be set to the selected slave type After chase lock is achieved the VF160 ente
15. lt Note gt In the above step if the VF160 does not lock to the digital signal from the external digital device the following warning message appears on the display This indicates that the VF160 does not receive a correct digital signal S PDIF or adat signal So check the cable connection and the digital output settings of the external digital device SETUP R21 Warning You are resronsib Ie for use of this disital device Be sure to abide by the copyright 8 When the VF160 is locking to the digital input signal press the ENTER YES key The display shows Play Start Player ana PGM SPOIF Play Start Player 9 Start playback of the player After reading the pilot signal recorded when saving the data the data starts loading automatically When starts loading the display shows something like the one below in which Wait time starts counting down aan PaM SPDIF Data Loadins Load Track b dok Wait Time RES Using the S PDIF signal data is loaded in 2 track unit While loading the indicators on CH STATUS CH SEL keys for channels 1 and 2 flash while the input levels are displayed by level meters 1 and 2 Using the adat signal data is loaded in 8 track unit While loading the indicators on CH STATUS CH SEL keys for channels 1 through 8 flash while the input levels are displayed by level meters 1 and 8 When the data loading is completed Comp
16. Delete F HK 1 Clicka off Preroll Time Bes MidiSyncOyt Frame Rate 130 es VF ISO FOSTEX Setting an MTC frame rate Frame Rate The Setting an MTC frame rate menu enables you to set the frame rate for MTC output from the MIDI OUT connector of the VF160 to an external MIDI device If you have already set the type of MIDI sync output signal to MTC you need to set the frame rate Use the frame rate of MTC received by the external MIDI device or sequence software e Initial setting 25 25 frames 2 Select the desired frame rate value with the JOG dial and e Setting range of frame rate 24 25 29df press the ENTER YES key 29nd 30df or 30nd It will be set to the selected frame rate You can set the value for each Program individually The po can be saved and loaded as part of the 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power SETUP mode to the VF160 X lt Note gt 1 Select Frame Rate in the menu selection display and press There are no 29 97nd or 29 97df in the MTC standard the ENTER YES key Use either 30nd or 30df unless you definitely need to The currently set frame rate will flashes 25 will flash synchronize the VF160 with NTSC video in the initial setting fia Select Menu gt Clicka off aie Preroll Tim
17. L23 Arena CHO REVERB Short reverb with extended high frequency is added to spacious stadium type early reflections Effective on chorus parts L24 KARAOKE REVERB All purpose reverb karaoke style that makes any vocal sound professional L25 MnDL HALL DLY REVERB Acombined effect of mono delay and hall reverb L26 MnDL PLT DLY REVERB Acombined effect of mono delay and plate reverb L27 PnDL HALL DLY REVERB Acombined effect of panning delay and hall reverb L28 PnDL PLT DLY REVERB Acombined effect of panning delay and plate reverb 57 fostex F GO MT Effect types preset for EFF 2 Name Parameter type Explanation L01 1 28 are the same effect types as the EFF 1 presets listed on the preceding page For details refer to the preceding page L28 L29 MonoDELAY DELAY Mono delay L30 PanDELAY DELAY Panning delay L31 MonoBpmDL BPM DELAY Mono delay Specify BPM and note value to set the delay time L32 PanBpmDL BPM DELAY Panning delay Specify BPM and note value to set the delay time L33 Short DL SHORT DELAY Short delay that allows you to set the delay time precisely L34 DOUBLING DOUBLING Doubling that allows you to set separate delay times for L and R L35 CHORUS CHORUS Produces a chorus effect A doubling effect can also be added L36 FLANGE FLANGE Produces a flanging effect L37 MonoPITCH MONO PITCH Pitch shift adjustable in a 2 octave range L38 DlyPITCH DELAY PITCH
18. Setting BAR BEAT resolution mode menu enables you to turn BAR BEAT resolution mode on and off The initial setting is Off When you turn this mode On the CLK clock digits will be always round off to OO and be stored in the memory key while the VF160 is using the BAR BEAT CLK time base That is beat resolution is used Using this function allows you to automatically store a beat resolution value of the CLIPBOARD IN OUT points and other points in real time Press the STORE key then the corresponding memory key while playing the VF160 Therefore it is very convenient when you perform the Copy amp Paste or Move amp Paste operation in beat resolution 1 Select Resolution in the menu selection display and press For example assume that you have stored the value for the ENTER YES key OOlbar 13 46 clk as the CLIPBOARD IN point and the value for OO2bar 4 451 clk as the CLIPBOARD OUT point These values will be used as they are if BAR BEAT resolution mode is turned off However the mode is turned on the following values will be stored instead The following example has a time signature setting of 4 Select Menu 4 Rec Protect Off 001 bar 14 46 clk gt 001 bar 1 J 00 clk Diaital In Analos Aclk value of 46 will be rounded off Disital Out IF The presently set item will be flash On or Off Off will flash in the initial setup 5 l 1 Flashing 002 bar 4 4 51 clk
19. To select the desired program press the PGM SEL key and select the program using the JOG dial then press the ENTER YES key When the unit is stopped press the DIRECT REC TRK key while holding down the SHIFT key See the illustration below DIRECT REC TRK key SHIFT key The program number name shown on the Normal dis play changes to Int Mixdown in inverse video showing that the internal mixdown mode is now active while the DIRECT REC TRK key flashes In the example shown below P08 Song Data 1 is mixed down Each time you press the DIRECT REC TRK key while hold ing down the SHIFT key the mixdown mode alternates on and off Normal display PHS Sona Oata 1 SEQ Init MixG Internal mixdown mode display Int Mixdown S60 Init Mix 80 lt Hint gt If you press the DIRECT REC TRK key to activate the internal mixdown mode when the recording track s or source track s are set for DIRECT re cording or BUSS recording the following message Rec Mode Change and Sure appears In this case pressing the ENTER YES key activates the internal mixdown mode Pressing the EXIT NO key cancels the operation AES 42 12345678 FOS dE LA lt Note gt After the internal mixdown recording is completed the unit automatically quits the internal mixdown mode The unit also automatically quits the internal mixdown mode w
20. is selected for input of digital the S P DIF signal L R applied to DIGITAL DATA INPUT of VF160 it will be assigned to any two tracks and if adat is selected the adat signals will be assigned to tracks 1 through 8 If it is set to Analog analog signals input to the mixer will be assigned to tracks 1 through 16 Notes AT SELECTION OF adat If set to S P DIF or adat DIGITAL will be lit in the display when the DIGITAL DATA INPUT is locked Diaital In l Anala Should DIGITAL blink check the connecting cables 3 between external equipment and recheck the setups of SPOIF Lai RAZ VF160 and external equipment FIUG e Initial setting Analog Hit YES or HO Key e Options Analog adat or SPDIF L 1 16 R 1 16 You can set the mode for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the At selection of adat adat digital signals 1 8 only will be assigned to tracks 1 8 and analog signals can be input to tracks 9 16 As adat digital signals can be input to k TES ba gs are maintained after you turn off the tracks 1 8 and analog signals into tracks 9 16 by using power to the VF160 this feature simultaneous recording of analog digital 16 tracks can be realized For details refer to Chapter 5 Features Applications 1 Select Digital In in the menu selection display and press the ENTER
21. lights up on the display when proper digital signals S P DIF or adat from an external digital device is input in DATA IN If either or Gili flashes on the display it means that the digital signal inputis incorrect In such case check the connection cable and digital output setting of the ex ternal device lt Caution IMPORTANT gt Donot make connections such as for input of S P DIF digi tal signals into the VF160 DATA INconnector when Digi tal In is set to adat It could result in abnormal symp toms such as reduction in operating speed of VF160 and also create noise es VASA Fostex Selecting a track to record Starting to record Digital recording is only an option of DIRECT RECORD 1 Turn up the channel fader and master fader corresponding to that was described in the section on basic recording the track recorded to 0 choices It is not possible to apply equalization or ef i fect on the signals recorded 2 Press the PLAY key while the RECORD key is depressed to start recording with VF160 as well as start playing the ex 1 Pressthe INPUT SEL key Check to see that ch9 ch16 are all ternal digital device set to TRK The level meter of the digital signal level that is currently If any channel is set to IN modify the setting to TRK input will appear There is no need to adjust the input level on the VF160 for digital recording 2 Press the DIRECT REC TRK key The display to sel
22. ounce WAU Select BaN rete peer skp B UP DOWH JOG Hit YES or HO Key 4 Use the JOG dial to select the desired WAV file to be loaded If more than one WAV file with different file names the first 6 characters is saved you can see each file name by the first 6 characters in order when rotating the JOG dial You can also select Eject to remove the backup disk lt Note gt The VF160 cannot recognize any other file names but tere WAV and cannot load such disks A WAV file with an unique name the first 6 Characters is recognized as an independent backup file and can be selected Fostex VF IO 5 After selecting the desired WAV file press the ENTER YES When the load operation is completed Completed key appears on the screen The display shows the screen for selecting a track to be ee loaded All flashes initially SETUP Rat Besides All you can select any one of tracks 01 through Load WAL SCSI 24 by rotating the JOG dial Poet kkk Load Completed rites WAU SCSI J oad Track Select I WALL eset 7 Track UP UUWH JOG Hit YES or HO Key i EI T Hit YES oe HO Key lt Note gt The title of the program to which the WAV file is loaded is replaced with the WAV file name loaded the first 6 characters 6 After selecting the desired track s press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the load dest
23. 2 Rate Adjust the speed of modulation Range 0 01 2 00 Hz 3 Depth Adjust the depth of modulation Range 0 99 4 Mod Delay Adjust the modulation delay Range 0 200 5 Feedback Adjust the number of modulation repeats Range 0 99 Mono pitch effect parameters parameter type MONO PITCH For effect type 37 of the preceding Effect type table the following three parameters can be adjusted 1 Eff Level Adjust the effect return level 0 99 2 Pitch Adjust the amount of pitch shift Range 24 0 24 12 is one octave 24 is two octaves 3 Adjust Make fine adjustments to the amount of pitch shift Range 50 0 50 50 is a semitone sharp 50 is a semitone flat 4 Mode Select the processing method Range 1 3 Delay pitch effect parameters parameter type DELAY PITCH For effect type 38 of the preceding Effect type table the following four parameters can be adjusted 1 Eff Level Adjust the effect return level 0 99 2 Pitct Adjust the amount of pitch shift Range 24 0 24 4 12 is one octave 24 is two octaves 3 Adjust Make fine adjustments to the amount of pitch shift Range 50 0 50 450 is a semitone sharp 50 is a semitone flat 4 Delay Time Adjust the delay time until the pitch shifted sound is heard Range 0 500 ms 5 Feedback Adjust the number of delay repeats Range 0 99 The VF160 provides 100 scene memories Scene numbers 00 to 99 You can store a set of desired pa
24. 50dBV 2dBV 48VDC Setting of ON OFF with SETUP mode 10k or more 10dBV 6mm TRS Phone jack 10kQ or more 10dBV 10kQ or more 10dBV 6mm Phone jack Unbalanced 10kQ or more 10dBV 6mm TRS Phone jack 1092 500 20mW or more at 169 6mm TRS Phone jack Tip SEND1 Ring SEND2 10kQ or more 149 Fostex VFiCO eee Output Level STEREO OUT L R Connector Load Impedance Output Level DIGITAL IN Connector Format DIGITAL OUT Connector Format MIDI IN OUT Connector PUNCH IN OUT Connector SCSI for use Backup Connector General Dimensions Weight Power Supply Power Consumption Accessories Fostex Disk Management System 3 Fostex Data In Out 1 10dBV RCA pin jack 10kQ or more 10dBV Optical 1 IEC 60958 S P DIF 2 Alesis Proprietary Multi Channel Optical Interface Either 1 or 2 is selected in the SETUP mode Optical 1 IEC 60958 S P DIF 2 Alesis Proprietary Multi Channel Optical Interface Either 1 or 2 is selected in the SETUP mode DIN 5 PIN 6mm Phone jack An optional FOOT SW Model 8051 can be connected D sub half pitch 50 pin 402 W x 110 H x 370 D mm Approx 6 0kg 120VAC 60Hz 230V 50 60Hz AC inlet type 22W Operation Manual Power Cable Specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice for product improvement Adat an the mar symbol are trademarks of Alesis Corporation 150 ees VASL Fost
25. Every time the key is pressed the mode alternates between the EFF1 and EFF2 menu 2 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the channel intended to adjust the effect send level The channel name and current setting of the channel selected appears on the LCD Press the MASTER CH STATUS CH SEL key to adjust the master send level Flashing 3 Turn the JOG dial to set the effect send level 41 4 Toadjustother channels press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of that channel 5 When adjustments are completed press the EXIT NO key The system returns to the Normal Display Modifying Effect Type 1 1 Press the EFF EDIT EFF1 key The effect 1 selection menu appears along with the currently set effect type Flashing Eff Level 80 Feu Time 5 55 Pre Delay pou Hi Ratio E F Level TA Example Display when the EFF EDIT EFF1 key is pressed 1 2 Press the EFF EDIT EFF2 key The effect 2 selection menu appears along with the currently set effect type EFF EDIT MUTE bFf Flashing PH CHORUS Eff Level 88 Derth 0 30 Double Time 4m Double Ly ze Filter Example Display when the EFF EDIT EFF2 key is pressed 2 Turn the JOG dial to select the effect type 3 Press the ENTER YES key The mode switches to the effect selected It is possible to adjust the parameters of the effect in this state Sa MUTE
26. F frequency fixed to 400 Hz effective frequency 100 Hz Q fixed to L S ON OFF ON or OFF default ON LPF low pass filter H S hi shelving L S low shelving 4 To edit the EQ for another channel repeat step 1 through 3 5 After completing EQ editing press the EXIT NO key The VF160 exits the EQ edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display fostex F iGO Mee Controlling Effect send level You can control send levels of channels 1 through 16 pre or post fader to the two internal A S P effect processors The master channel controls the effect send master level 1 Press the EFF1 EFF2 key to bring up the effect send level screen Each time you press the EFF1 EFF2 key the EFF1 send level and EFF2 send level screens alternate The first time you bring up the channel parameter edit screen the message prompting to select a channel Select CHI flashes as well as all the CH STATUS CH SEL indica tors on the panel flash From the second time on the previously selected channel is selected and ready to be edited when bringing up the screen as shown in the drawing of step 2 below Flashing 2 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the desired channel The current settings are shown together with the selected channel name The icon for the selected channel is flash ing indicating that you can edit it Flashing Flashing Iftw
27. If you try to save data to a recorded CD R disc the display shows a warning message saying Not Writable followed by a message saying Insert Disk as below TUAREN TNG kke Weritable kkk Loading backup data from a CD RW drive In the following procedure we assume that a CD RW drive is connected to the VF160 SCSI port and a CD RW CD R disc to which data has been saved is pre pared lt Note gt Do not carry out any VF160 key operation until the ac cess process to the CD RW CD R disc is completed 1 After turning on both the VF160 and the CD RW drive connected insert the disc to the CD RW drive lt Note gt If you load song data which is saved to more than one disc set DISC 1 first If you set the other disc and go on the following proce dure the VF160 automatically recognized that the disc order is not correct and the display shows Wrong Disk followed by Illegal No momentarily and the disc is automatically ejected 2 Press the SETUP key to enter the setup mode The display shows the screen for selecting the setup menu 3 Use the JOG dial to select highlight Load PGM and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting a load device where IDE is T 7a 9 Merna E aye Pol Sira Fader FI SETUP F21 Load PGH Load Device Se OPT SCSI REL FFWD Hit YES or HO Key 4 Press the RE
28. nosound 17 RED The corresponding tracks 1 16 are READY to record The GREEN and RED key will alternately flash The light will remain ON during the recording process 12 Channel Fader channels 1 16 The 1 8 channel faders are used to adjust the audio level TRACK of tracks 1 8 The 9 16 channel faders are used to adjust the sound level of signals input into A to H or audio levels TRACK of 9 16 Use the INPUT SEL key to choose which level to adjust os SCENE RECALL DIRECT RCL Key This is used to recall the scene memory Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed for direct scene memory recall Simultaneously press this key and the SCENE STORE MAP key to erase the scene memory n SCENE STORE MAP Key This is used to store scene memory Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to CHECK CHANGE the scene map Simultaneously press this key and the SCENE RECALL DIRECT RCL key to erase the scene memory fostex F GO Me 15 EFF EDIT EFF1 MUTE Key This is used to CHECK CHANGE the EFFECT type and parameter settings of EFFECT 1 Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to turn ON OFF the mute feature of EFFECT 1 16 EFF EDIT EFF2 MUTE Key This is used to CHECK CHANGE the effect type and parameter settings of EFFECT 2 Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to turn ON OFF the mute feature of EFFECT 2 17 CH PARAM
29. INPUT A to H then the signals input vill be converted into distorted clipped digital signals which will sound like noise Once converted with this noise it is not possible to eliminate this distortion from the sound with the mixer or recorder Therefore it is important to tune the TRIM to a level where the PEAK LED fluctuates between the illuminating or not point at the maximum volume of the signal input oO oo wo wy eo oH EO ee A i A A A MIC LINE MIC LINE MiC LINE MIC LINE MC LINE MIC LINE MIC LINE MIC PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PVA O B 3iC aay IS E A SIG B 1G H LINE Appropriate gain Excessive gain Clip level Clip level FADER The VF160 features 16 channel faders and 1 master fader Among the faders the faders for channels 1 to 8 are always started up with output signals from the recorder of tracks 1 to 8 PLAYBACK or INPUT Monitoring to adjust this level The master fader is always used to adjust the output level of the stereo output Signals input from A to H or signals output from the recorder can be selected as signals to fade and the fade level can be adjusted with faders for channels 9 to 16 This is a way to easily record with the minimum faders along with the earlier mentioned 2 recording modes It is not possible to mix the playback sound of tracks 9 to 16 if inputs A to H are started for all channel faders of 9 to 16 Ho
30. Save PGM menu gt Output signal options OPT adat or S PDIF SCSI or IDE Program options PO1 to P99 an individual Program Track options When using S PDIF or adat Tracks 1 8 Tracks 1 16 Tracks 1 24 Tracks 9 16 Tracks 9 24 or Tracks 17 24 When using a SCSI disk All tracks 1 24 is selected automatically You can select tracks individually when saving by the WAV file format lt Note gt You cannot load data from a CD RW CD R disc by the WAV file format lt Note gt When saving a single program data to more than one removable disk we suggest to put a number on each disk in the saving order so that you will easily know the order when loading the data later 1 Press the SETUP key to enter the Setup mode The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup menu 2 Use the JOG dial to select Save PGM and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the device to which the data is saved IDE flashes Save Device Se OFT SCSI FWD eo 1 REL F Hit YES or HO K 3 Press the REWIND key to select SCSI and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the backup mode FDMS 3 or WAV If a disk formatted by the FDMS 3 is set FDMS 3 flashes Save PON SCSI g Ce ae i ode Selec Flashing WAL i FFWD Hit YES or HO Key 4 While FDMS 3 is flashing press the ENTER YES key
31. The Flanger is one of applications of the Delay This is used to create a sound like a jet airplane as cending or descending es VIGO Fotex About the effect types The VF160 contains two independent DSP multi effect units EFF 1 and EFF 2 A variety of effect types are preset for each effect unit By selecting a suitable effect type you can process the sound as you wish You can also edit the parameters of the selected effect type to create your own effect sounds The following 28 effect types are preset for EFF 1 The 38 effect types shown on the next page are provided for EFF 2 and these include the same 28 effect types as EFF 1 Effect types preset for EFF 1 Name Parameter type Explanation L01 Norm HALL REVERB Standard hall reverb detailed and transparent with a moderate amount of early reflections L02 Pres HALL REVERB Hall reverb with presence and definition LO3 Wet HALL REVERB Hall reverb with restrained high frequency and a refreshing atmosphere L04 NoER HALL REVERB All purpose hall reverb with no early reflections and even decay of all frequencies L05 Lo F HALL REVERB Hall reverb with lingering low frequency reverberation LO6 STADIUM REVERB Stadium reverb characterized by long early reflections LO7 AUDITRIUM REVERB Reverb simulating an auditorium with suppressed reverberation L08 HALL WAY REVERB Reverb with a long pre delay creating the impression
32. essessecssesseneeseeeeeess Changing the Time Saved in the Memory key and Markkey 35 e Locating an Event Memory Creating an CVENtMCMOLY csecsscessessecnecsecncenecsessescnecnecssenecneeeeeeese 36 Viewing the event MEMOFICS ssssesseesecsecsecsscssceseeeeescenecnecseeneeeeees 36 Locateby specifying the event memory us SKIP lOCAC assessed a desea ea E E A dec EE PUNCH In Out ete ea Ain tes 37 e Manual Punch In Out eeessssesessscesesseeesesseecseseeeeeseeees 37 e Punch In Out with Foot SWitch ee eeeeeceseeceeeteeeeeeeeees 37 e Auto PUNCH IN OUL es eeeeessesseecseessessenceneesessesseneenssnesnees 38 Programming the PUNCH IN OUT Dpointts sssscsscescescsscesseeseeseess 38 Auto PunchIn Outrehearsal see 138 Auto PUNCH IN Out take eesessessecsecseesseenscsecsscnssscnecseencescseseeneensenes 38 Track ExchanQe s hentai lt astieseste 39 MOI e Asie te ae Adaedendindi ahaa vel be e Level AGjUStMeNl cssssssccsrssrsscsssscssressssrsessccsessessrseeses e PAN ACJUStMENL 0ccssscssrssssrssrssssssenssesscsessrssrsesenssesecses e Equalizer Adjustment e Effect Send Level Adjustment e Modifying Effect TyPe sssesesesseresssesessereseserecsosesererseseses MIX DOW Ick isco coals Becks A cas oats edb A E 42 e Analog Mix DOWN sesessssesesesesesssesssoesesesesesesesesossesesesesesese 42 e Digital Mix DOWN sessesesessssesesesreresesss
33. etc that was automatically assigned when creating a new program appears on the LCD The left end of the title is highlighted and flashes This means that the tentative working title of the newly created program can be edited Edit the title in the following manner Note that the Title Edit function described later can also edit or reedit the title of a new program already assigned a title or one that was edited lt How to add a title gt e Turn the JOG dial at the cursor flashing point The following alphanumerics can be selected e Shift through the cursor flashing point by pressing the HOLD gt key REWIND key or F FWD key 4 Press the ENTER YES key after assigning a title The program is set with the title assigned 5 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key The user escapes from the SETUP mode and the Normal Display of the newly created program appears on the LCD lt Notes gt e Note that when creating a new program the next sequential number of the program currently set on the disk is set If there is only one program then program number 2 PO2 is created If there are five programs then program number PO6 is assigned The program name started when creating a new program is directly copied for the scene name SO1 0002 etc appearing below the program number Available disk space is slightly reduced by creating a new program The user cannot create a new program when there is
34. gt Diski HE After completing the data load from Disk 1 the display shows Insert Disk 2 while Disk 1 is automatically ejected ee PEM SCSI Insert Disk 5 Insert Disk 2 the second disk to the SCSI device according to the display message In awhile after inserting the disk the VF160 automatically starts loading data from Disk 2 The screen looks similar to the one when loading Disk 1 As the data load goes on the remaining data size shown on the screen counts down A PGM SCSI Data Loadina Bal gt gt PH2 Disk ack PIB When the load operation is completed Completed appears while the VF160 stops pi eae Load FGM SCSI ZCS PRE EATARRA HEHE Load eee Hit YES or HO Ke or H Key lt Note gt You cannot abort the load operation using SCSI before completed unlike the load operation using the S PDIF or adat signal 6 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key repeatedly until exiting the Setup mode 107 fostex VF CO Bee Save Load a WAV file Song data can be saved to or load from a SCSI disk by the FDMS 3 Fostex Disk Management System 3 format as well as by the WAV file format RIFF WAVE file format using a DOS formatted disk As you can handle song data of the VF160 with a WAV file it is possible to directly import export data from to a personal computer to playback edit a data file with various software applications and t
35. gt 003 bar 1 00 clk See A clk value of 51 will be rounded up m e Initial setting Off 2 Select On or Off with the JOG dial and press the ENTER e Options On or Off YES key You can set the mode for each Program individually Ca ee Cm gee ee rn 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the SETUP mode power to the VF160 135 fostex F OO DE ee Setting the MIDI device number Device ID The Setting the MIDI device number menu enables you to set the VF160 device ID number required to control the VF160 from a sequence software using MMC MIDI Machine Control The transmit device ID links to this setting You can set the device ID from 00 to 99 However if the device ID number of the message the VF 16 receives is 7F the VF160 will recognizes it to perform the corresponding operation regardless of its device ID setting e Initial setting QQ 2 Select desired device number with the JOG dial and press e Options 00 99 the ENTER YES key You can set the mode for each Program individually Ee A ESRO E 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the SETUP mode power to the VF160 e Select Device ID in the menu selection display and press the ENTER YES key The presently device numb
36. independent of each other and can be recorded or played separately This section describes the instructions of how to operate the program Creating a New Program One program P01 is automatically created on the VF160 when formatting the hard disk Follow the instructions below to create a New Program Note that the VF160 must be in the STOP mode lt Precaution gt The contents as the program currently started is copied as the default setting of a newly created program To keep the same default settings as previously created programs first start up the previous program and then create a new program 1 Press the PGM SEL key in the STOP state The current program number and Select PGM appears then Sure flashes on the LCD 2 Turn the JOG dial clockwise to find New PGM then press the ENTER YES key Anew program is created then automatically proceeds to the Title Edit menu of the SETUP mode This allows the user toinput edit the title name of the newly created program Press the EXIT NO key twice to create a program with a working title without editing the title When the EXIT NO key is pressed the system returns to the Normal Display To edit the working title proceed as follows Title Edit FGM PM D Boose WP DOWH JOG RE FFWD Hit YES or HO Kew 70 3 Press the ENTER YES key again The Tentative Title 0002
37. or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode fostex VF GOO BT ee Setting a tempo Tempo Set The Tempo Map Set menu enables you to specify a tempo at a given point in a song that already has a time signature setting For example you can specify a tempo of 150 to the third beat of the 12th measure Time signature and tempo settings make a Tempo Map which is used by the VF160 to manage the song using the BAR BEAT CLK time base and enable the metronome function Tempo settings as well as time signature settings are required when you wish to output MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer to an external sequencer lt Note gt The tempo set figure setup here is an approximate figure and thus not accurate Therefore although the tempo map be matched with a personal computer they will gradually drift apart In order to prevent this drift the personal computer side can be set to either MIDI clock sync or the MIDI sync output signal temporarily set to MIDI Clock the figure reset to make it possible for the computer to read the accurate tempo and the return it again to MTC sync Initial Setting OO1BAR 1st beat 120 bpm Bar to register Follows to the time signature setting Beat to register Follows to the time signature setting Available tempo 30 250 DEL delete Maximum setting points 64 The setting is applicable song by song The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data The setting is memorized e
38. the number of sectors and noncontiguous The format type selected is set and Sure flashes sectors are shown after formatted then Completed lights up Formatting is completed instantaneously if either SETUP R29 Erase or Quick is selected and executed Disk Format For this reason the Completed message lights up without eR Format showing the progress status while formatting is taking place see eek i f Gure gt flashing Fe Format i Hit FEC YES a i Come leted seek sE ee a eee 6 Press the ENTER YES key while the RECORD key is poon e E oe Hit VES or NO key If the Standard format is selected and executed the formatting process takes place while showing the progress of the good sectors Good MB on the disk bad sectors on the disk Bad MB and remainder Remain MB 7 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to escape from Nothing can be done during the formatting process the SETUP mode Please wait for a while until the process is completed The Normal Display appears indicating the beginning of the program P01 that is automatically created after formatting the hard disk Disk Format Wait Formattina sebbbi Good kkk Bad ktkt MB Remain Hkk PB Replacing a hard disk lt Operation Confirmed HD amp Backup Media List for the VF 160 gt The updated information on the operation confirmed HD and backu
39. turn on the both machine Insert a backup disk into the SCSI device Press the SETUP key to enter the Setup mode The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup menu Use the JOG dial to select Disk Format and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting a drive IDE E IDE hard disk flashes Disk Format I m j pay Select SCSI CBackur3 FEW FFUD YES or HO key Flashing Hit Use the F FWD key to make SCSI flash and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the name of the SCSI device connected and Sure flashes marui Format i Backur Format 16bit SIGS FERRER EEEE Sure Hit REC VES or HO While holding down the RECORD key press the ENTER YES key The unit starts formatting the backup disk When formatting is completed Completed appears on the screen Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key repeatedly until exiting the Setup mode A backup SCSI disk is formatted and ready to be used for data saving loading by the FDMS 3 If you continue to format another disk remove the current disk and repeat the procedure above To remove a disk press the EJECT key on the SCSI device Saving data to a SCSI disk You can save data via the Save PGM menu in the SETUP mode When saving to a SCSI disk you can save data for each specified program like saving to a DAT adat lt Details about
40. wrong disk is set The display shows Wrong Disk followed by Illegal No and the disk is automatically ejected Then as the display shows Insert Disk insert Disk 1 3 Press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the destination program to whicha data is loaded In the default setting New PGM is selected so that the data is loaded to a newly created program Load PEM SCSI Degtrn PEM Select Flashing tHew FPG a UP OOW JOG Sure Hit YES or HO Kes You can select any existing program available on the current drive by rotating the JOG dial besides New PGM When selecting an existing program the data size of the current program is also shown When you select load data to an existing program the backup data overwrites the existing data If you do not like any track to be overwritten select New PGM lt Note gt If the current drive disk destination disk of loading data does not have enough available space for accepting the loaded data The display shows Disk Full and the returns to the screen shown when carrying out step 3 Rs VY IO FOSE 4 Use the JOG dial to select the load destination programand press the ENTER YES key The data load to the selected program starts The display changes to something like the screen below As the data load goes on the remaining data size shownon the screen counts down Load POM SCSI Dats pata gt Re BH
41. 16 and 24 For example if you select From 1 to 24 data for all tracks 1 to 24 will be saved A VIO FOSE lt Note gt When you save tracks including Additional tracks read lt Notes for saving data using the S PDIF or adat digital signal gt on page 96 before executing the save operation 8 After selecting tracks press the ENTER YES key again The display shows Rec Start Recorder together with the program and tracks to be saved and Sure flashes This means are you sure to start saving data to recorder em Pom SPOIF Fec Start Recorder Pack okt From To Sure eg Hit YES or After checking any preparations on the external digital recorder are made start it recording It may be a good idea to put a START ID for DAT or set a locate memory at the starting position so that you can easily find the position when you load the data later 10 Press the ENTER YES key right after the external machine starts recording The display shows something like the one below After a few seconds the unit starts saving the data and Wait time starts counting down Save PGM SPDIF Data Savins Save Track bat Wait Time thttg For the first several seconds the VF160 transmits the pilot signal that will a reference for locating the tape position during the load operation and the actual data saving starts from the position at which Wait time starts count
42. Base Normal Display in ABS E Tr te FEl 868 SBG Init MixG A E ceesseetdeeceeat tects E T bernie ieee E E ETT TTT ypt 12345618 AFION SI4ISIG dE Lk Time Base Normal Display in BAR BEAT CLK 742 12345678 1101i213IHISI6 4JE LA Time Base Normal Display in MTC Fostex F CO MT Switch ing with D ISP SEL Key 1 The REMAINING time display appears as follows Every tine the PISF SEL key is pressed the LCD according to the time base that has been selected alternately shows the 1 Normal Display of Current Time Base gt 2 REMAIN Display of Current Time Base gt 3 MTC REM 12H 0SH 4 76 2ME Time Display Input The description of each display is Masterib REC Y4 1K CLE defined below FIREBALL 1 630 ee secvecteiotecede vies cudbevectscperswedvenerene D 1 Normal Display iG rent Time Basen reece B anne Current time according to current time base fprrrrrrrrrrrsrsrssnsnenndbunuuuunnunnnnnnnnnnnn TER de F E ete Program number and program title 12345678 FIDNIISIMISIE J LA The first 9 characters of the program title are shown Scene number and scene name Time Base ABS and MTC The first 9 characters of the scene name are shown Level meter of tracks 1 to 16 REM 41 7460Rr 4 EZME I R master level meter Master16 REC HAREL ARIE FIREBALL 1c te 30a ee AE N E E A E Pa 1 648 i S
43. CHANGE the parameters saved in MARK2 This can be used as Locate Memory ie AUTO PUNCH OUT MARK3 Key This key is used to CHECK CHANGE the parameters saved at the recording end point PUNCH OUT POINT when executing auto punch in out or erase Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to CHECK CHANGE the parameters saved in MARK3 This can be used as Locate Memory as AUTO RTN END MARK amp 4 Key This key is used to CHECK CHANGE the parameters saved at the end point AUTO RETURN END POINT when executing auto return or auto repeat Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to CHECK CHANGE the parameters saved in MARK4 This can be used as Locate Memory 36 CLIPBOARD IN MARKS5 Key This key is used to CHECK CHANGE the parameter saved at the start point CLIPBOARD IN POINT when copying from or pasting to the clipboard Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to CHECK CHANGE the parameters saved in MARKS This can be used as Locate Memory ae CLIPBOARD ALIGN SEL MARK6 Key This key is used to CHECK CHANGE the parameter saved at the align point ALIGN POINT when copying pasting or moving pasting Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to CHECK CHANGE the parameters saved in MARK6 This can be used as Locate Memory 38 CLIPBOARD OUT MARK7 Key This key is used to CHECK CHANGE the parameter saved at the end point CLIPBOARD OUT POINT when copying fro
44. DIRECT REC TRK key then choose a track to enter READY status which means recording will not be record with the CH STATUS CH SEL key RED Flashing possible If for example all faders of ch9 ch16 are set Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch1 ch 6 so tracks 1 6 to INPUT then recording is no longer possible on will be READY tracks 9 16 Note that this does not affect any signal f already recorded on tracks 9 16 2 Press the EXIT NO key to return to the Normal Display a The fader of ch16 merely adjusts the level of the H 3 Set ch1 ch6 faders to 0 INPUT signal sent to stereo OUT Therefore it does not adjust the level of the signals recorded 78 Mees VASA Fostex Internal Mixdown Mode Generally mixdown means the process for mixing audio materials instruments vocals etc recorded on a multitrack recorder and recording the stereo mixed signals to a master digital or analog recorder The internal mixdown mode allows you to mix 16 internal tracks recorded on a program down to stereo signals and record them to the current drive of the unit By using the internal mixdown function you can make mixdown without the need for an external master re corder Furthermore you can record an internally mixed material to a CD RW CD R disc to make an audio CD See page 120 for details Recording a a Playback OOC000G90 00 000 MEL Ta Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 QO00000000000 MIX
45. DOWH JOG Hit YES or NO Key In the example above the selected program data will be saved to a CD RW CD R disc with the backup number B01 The program title is copied to the backup title you can not edit it By rotating the JOG dial when the above screen is shown you can also select Eject besides B01 If you select Eject and then press the ENTER YES key the disc will be ejected While B01 is shown press the ENTER YES key The VF160 starts the save operation The recorded space shown on the display is counted down while the save operation progresses It will take some time for saving all data The following display example shows that the data of the selected program number is being saved to the backup number B01 Save Pah SCSI Data Savina Pack gt gt BEL ME When completing the save operation Save Completed appears on the display as shown below and the VF160 stops access to the drive while the disc in the CD RW drive is automatically ejected SETUP FeZ Pook f RoR ER gave Eee a Hit YES or NO Key When saving data to more than one disc the first disc will be ejected when it is full i e there is no more record ing space on the disc while Insert Disk appears on the screen After inserting the second disc the VF160 auto matically resumes the save operation After completing the save operation the final disc is
46. EDIT EFF1 EFF2 PRE POST Key This is used to CHECK CHANGE the send level settings of EFFECT 1 or EFFECT2 The EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 settings alternate every time the key is pressed Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to CHECK CHANGE the PRE POST settings of EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 Use the CH STATUS CH SEL Key to select the channel to change any settings together ba CH PARAM EDIT EQ COMP HI G F Q COMP Key This is used to CHECK CHANGE the high frequency parametric equalizer settings The parameter settings alternate every time the key is pressed Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to CHECK CHANGE the COMPRESSOR settings Use the CH STATUS CH SEL Key to select the channel to CHECK CHANGE any settings together lie CH PARAM EDIT AUX1 AUX2 PRE POST Key This is used to CHECK CHANGE the send level settings of AUX 1 or AUX 2 The AUX 1 and AUX 2 settings alternate every time the key is pressed Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to CHECK CHANGE the PRE POST settings of AUX 1 or AUX 2 Use the CH STATUS CH SEL Key to select the channel to change any settings together 20 CH PARAM EDIT EQ COMP MID G F Q Key This is used to CHECK CHANGE the midrange frequencies of the parametric equalizer settings Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to CHECK CHANGE the settings fa CH PARAM EDIT PAN FADER Key This is used to CHECK CHANGE the PAN settings P
47. ENTER YES key at fis ore The track exchange selection display appears The current display indicates that track 1 8 and track 9 2 track block exchange 16 can be exchanged in 8 track units Bea ee ate athe ye Aare ale ood AOA Be Cae tg To select another combination go to the next step 8 track block exchange respectively 76 E VASO Fostex e Exchange in 8 track units 1 While 01 08 on the left is flashing press the HOLD gt or F FWD key to make 09 16 flashing HE Track E a H1 HS lt 2859 16 ETE E f RETROE A 4 Flashing display Press the ENTER YES key The tracks are instantly exchanged Completed appears on the display when the tracks are successfully exchanged Then the LCD returns to the original time base display e Exchange in mono or 2 track units 1 Turn the JOG dial while 1 8 is flashing You can select among monotracks 1 through 24 and ste reo 2 tracks 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 23 amp 24 as well as 8 tracks The right column shows the same unit according to the selection on the left column as shown in the figure below Therefore you should select track s in the left column first and then select track s in the right column 2 Press the HOLD gt or F FWD key to make the right column flash and select the desired track s using the JOG dial lt Note gt The numbers on the right a
48. Match Digital In in the SETUP mode tothe digital signal S P DIF or adat to be input Read page 134 for details e Cannot record analog signals Could the track about to be recorded still be set for digital inputs Analog signals cannot be recorded in a track set for digital input by Digital In in the SETUP mode Reset the digital input to Analog Atplaybackof digital signals just recorded sound pitch is not normal Record digital signals of sampling frequency identical to that of the VF 160 The VF160 sampling frequency is 44 1kHz 16 bit Ina sampling frequency other than 44 1kHz 16 bit it will be recorded with the wrong pitch Time count will also be incorrect Having trouble Editing Awarning message appears although itwas only execu tion of copy clip or move clip 7 Correctly register the CLIPBOARD IN and OUT points The relation between CLIPBOARD IN point and OUT point is IN point lt OUT point If it is registered in reverse relationship copy clip or move clip cannot be executed e When copy paste or move paste is executed the sound section located before head of the bar is missing Use the ALIGN SEL function If the ALIGN SEL function is used at executing copy paste or move paste the sound section located in front of the bar head can be included at pasting Refer to page 74 for details Fostex F OCO Be Installing
49. Pitch shift with a feedback delay allowing strange effects to be produced lt Note Changing the effect preset may mute the sound momentarily gt Effect presets of the internal effect processor shown above are classified into three types ambience delay type No 1 through 28 modulation pitch type No 29 through 36 and pitch type No 37 and 38 If you switch the effect preset between the three types above the audio is momentarily muted Selecting the effect type Here s how to select the effect type for EFF 1 or EFF 2 When the EFF 2 key is pressed With the initial settings L35 CHORUS will appear MUTE OFF Fa ie L35 CHORUS Eff Level 8b CMTE CME Derth _ 38 Double Time 46me Double Lvl 5G Press this to set the effect type Press this to set the effect type Filter OFF for EFF 1 for EFF 2 ee gt 2 Use the JOG dial to select the effect type As described earlier in Basic Recording and Play back The effect types listed in the foregoing tables will appear T a8 the A fader ee bate in succession When an effect type appears it will be is being input and raise the ader so that the any ete SeN Ys sound is heard at an appropriate level blinking The blinking indicates that the effect type has ae i not yet been selected As described earlier in Setting the effect send level raise the EFF 1 SEND level or the EFF 2 SEND level for the c
50. See page 138 for details about how to pair faders of ad jacent two channels 51 3 Use the HI G F H or MID G F Q or LO G or HOLD gt key to select a parameter Each time you press the key the flashing parameter to be edited changes in the following order G gt F gt Q gt ON gt G When setting the LO equalizer the flashing parameter changes between G and ON Use the JOG dial to select the desired value The following shows an example for editing the HI EQ s gain The curve corresponding to the setting value is graphically shown Setting this directly affects the sound i Trk 1 El Seting in 14 F21 1k G21 8 Curve By rotating the JOG dial you can set each parameter to the desired value within the range shown below Controllable channels Channels 1 through 16 and the master channel You cannot equalize channels 13 14 or 15 16 if they are set as the compressor channels via the Setup mode Available parameters and setting ranges HI G F H G gain 18 dB to FLAT to 18 dB default FLAT F frequency 500 Hz to 20 2 kHz default 4 00 kHz Q LPF H S 0 1 to 20 default H S ON OFF ON or OFF default ON MID G F H G gain 18 dB to FLAT to 18 dB default FLAT F frequency 500 Hz to 20 2 kHz default 1 00 kHz Q LPF H S 0 1 to 20 default 1 0 ON OFF ON or OFF default ON LO G G gain 18 dB to FLAT to 18 dB default FLAT
51. Select He UP DOWH JOG Hit YES or WO Key ase PIB e You can also select Eject as well as programs to be loaded in the condition above To eject the disk press the ENTER YES key after selecting Eject 4 Use the JOG dial to select the program to be loaded and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the destination program to which data is loaded In the default setting New PGM is selected so that the data is loaded to a newly created program 105 Load Pen SCSI Destan PEM Select tHew FGH UP DOWH JOG Sure Hit YES or WO Key You can select any existing program available on the current drive by rotating the JOG dial besides New PGM When selecting an existing program the data size of the program is also shown When you load the data to any existing program the backup data overwrites the existing data If you do not like to overwrite any track select New PGM lt Note gt If the current drive disk destination disk of loading data does not have enough available space for accepting the loaded data The display shows Disk Full and the returns to the screen shown when carrying out step 3 Use the JOG dial to select the load destination program and press the ENTER YES key The data load to the selected program starts The following screen example shows that the B01 data on the backup disk is now being loaded to P02 on the
52. Standard type upon newly lt Precaution gt formatting the hard disk will show Standard and Erase The hard disk formatted in the Quick type upon newly formatting the hard disk will show Standard and Quick The Note that when you reformat your hard disk you will erase all data saved or recorded on the hard disk as well as all the settings made Reformatting your hard disk restore erect ene the VF160 back to the default setting USET CAT Pe an Always make a point to check that there is no data that you need remaining on the hard disk prior to reformatting SETUP F239 Disk Format Format Tare Select Be eh rhe cache ech erica 1 Turn ON the VF 160 flashing 4 2 Press the SETUP key Erang The system will go to the SETUP mode The select display l Hit WES or AO kes of the SETUP menu appears The highlight indicates the menu that is currently selected or SETUF FI aE Disk Format emeo Title Edit PGMal Format Tare Select Delete Fiehad f wkk kkk kE k kE Clicka off flashing Buick Hit UES or Nokes g gt H ni 33 1 3 Turn the JOG dial to highlight the Disk Format menu er 2E title IDE indicates the current drive SCSI indicates the backup SCSI drive The hard disk is formatted with the access time of the unit sectors while judging whether the
53. This key is the opposite of the ENTER YES key Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to remove the removable type SCSI disk used for backup purposes 55 ENTER YES Key This is used to SET EXECUTE the SETUP menu settings copy paste and various other sound editing processes This key is the opposite of the EXIT NO key oe JOG SHUTTLE Dial Turn ON the SCRUB key press CH STATUS CH SEL key of a voluntary channel then turn the jog dial for digital sound scrubbing in the FWD and REV direction without any change in pitch Turn this dial while the SHIFT key is depressed toF FWD REW between a shuttle speed of 1X to 64X depending on the degree the dial is turned The jog dial can be used to increase decrease the parameter settings during the editing process For more details refer to the respective instructions of each item fostex F GO eee Top Panel Display Section 57 ACCESS LED This LED lights ON when the internal hard disk drive or external SCSI device for backup purposes is writing or reading data 58 PHANTOM LED This lights ON when the phantom power is ON The phantom power is turned ON OFF with the setup mode 59 LCD Liquid Crystal Display The recorder and mixer status and parameters are shown on the LCD 60 Contrast Adjusting Knob This is used to adjust the contrast difference in brightness of the LCD Increase or decrease the contrast by turning it clockwise or cou
54. Use the JOG dial to select a program to be saved and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting a track to be saved Initially All Track flashes SETUP R22 UP DOWH J Hit YES or HO Key By rotating the JOG dial you can select From To where the left field flashes initially instead of All Track If you save data for all tracks 1 through 24 select All Track If you save data for any specific track s select From To and specify the desired track numbers SETUP R22 Save WAU SCSI Flashing UPS Duh JOG Hit YES or WO Key eat lt To specify the desired tracks to From To By rotating the JOG dial while the left From field is flashing you can select the track number from 01 through 24 The number in the right To field automatically follows the number in the left field i e numbers in the left and right fields are always the same Therefore if you want to save a single track you just have to set the right From field and do not have to set the right To field For example From 02 To 02 will save only track 2 To specify tracks 5 through 12 e Enter 05 to the left field while the left field is flashing e Press the REWIND or F FWD key to make the right field flashing e Enter 12 Note that the number for the right field must be equal to or larger than the left field Finally the scre
55. While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP key on the operating panel When the SETUP key is pressed the recorder enters the SETUP mode first stage and change to the display for selecting the SETUP menu The white black reversed title indicates the currently selected menu and the W flash indicates that other titles exist below SETUP RAL Select Menu Sisnature Se emro Set Title Edit PGMe1 Delete P i Clicka off lt Note gt At shipping from the plant or when power is switched on again the Signature Set menu will be reversed in white black Otherwise when exiting from the SETUP mode the SETUP menu that was displayed last will be reversed in black and white 2 Ifthe desired menu is selected via the JOG dial and the ENTER YES key pressed you can proceed to the actual setup procedure lt Important gt To exit from the SETUP mode or return to the previous level press the EXIT NO key or STOP key When selecting the desired SETUP menu the HOLD gt REWIND and F FWD keys can be used in addition to the JOG dial Time signature setting Signature Set Using the Setting a time signature menu you can set a time signature of a given measure on the internal programmable Tempo Map Also in this setting the BAR OO2BAR 14 OOCLK displayed at the head of the disk in the time base BAR BEAT CLK can be set within a range of OO9BAR OO2
56. YES key Save Pol C SCSID The display shows the screen for selecting the device to elect which the data is saved IDE flashes Flashing AELOD CO DA Setur 1 RELIJ FFWD Select Menu Hit YES or HO Kes 5 Use the JOG dial to select Setup and press the ENTER We FIX Off Lone The display shows the CD DA Setup screen on which you can select the copy protection setting see the next page efter Fader Fader Fecall C amp M SETUP R22 CO OA setur i Feseryed Reserved Reserved 120 ss VIGO FOSE 9 Use the JOG dial to select a desired program and press the ENTER YES key The selected program is set to the first track Copy protection setting You can restrict the disc copy duplication ca pability of an audio CD you are going to make SETUP Riz ON A disc you made can be copied to other digital device once OFF Adisc you made can be copied to other digital device as many times as required default Be NOH 03 HOH Ad HOH To change the setting press the ENTER YES key when 85S HIH the CD DA Setup screen is shown The current setting starts flashing showing it can be edited While flashing use the JOG dial to select ON or OFF e To record a single song to a CD RW CD R disc select then press the ENTER YES key to confirm a program and press the ENTER YES key and
57. You can select a load destination program from existing programs on the current drive as well as New PGM When selecting New PGM a new program is created If you load data to a program in which data is already recorded the newly loaded data overwrites the current data track by track Consequently on each overwritten track the loaded data becomes valid while the current data is erased Use the JOG dial to select the program to which data is loaded and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting tracks to be loaded ia Load Fa SPDIF Load Track Area To UP DOWA JOG 7 r FEI FFWD Hit ES or HO Key Select tracks to be loaded Press the REWIND or F FWD key to move the flashing field between From and To Use the JOG dial to set the track number for the flashing field For the From field you can select from 1 9 and 17 For the To field you can select from 8 16 and 24 For example if you select From 1 to 24 data for all tracks 1 to 24 will be loaded After selecting tracks press the ENTER YES key again The display shows something like the one below A load destination program existing or new program to which the data is loaded and tracks to be loaded are shown while Sure flashes SETUP kI Load PEM SPDIF Destn PaM Select Pack sek From sk TO 4k Sure Hit YES or HO Key Flashing VFIGO Fostex
58. a E sectors are good or bad The formatting time Select Menu Standard tends to be longer with this type however the FaderFecsall Off reliability is better Therefore itis recommended Feserueg that this default format type is selected under FhamtomPower OFF normal conditions This choice is only available when a hard disk previously formatted in the Standard type is being reformatted With this format the Standard type is maintained while all data on 5 the hard disk are erased p l sk Format The formatting time is shorter than the time We Select required to format a Standard type flashing SCSI REW Backum This is a quick formatting procedure in which all Hit YES or HO kesu hard disk sectors are considered to be good E E sectors The formatting time is fast however the Quick procedure cannot discover bad sectors 4 Press the ENTER YES key while IDE is highlighted Therefore it is recommended that this format type is only used when formatting anew hard disk that Fostex has already confirmed to operate normally The menu to select the format type appears The display will appear as follows according to the previous format type represents the name of the drive 23 fostex VF GCO MT eee 5 Selectthe format type with the F FWD key or REWIND When the hard disk is successfully formatted formatting key Then press the ENTER YES key completed
59. a new signature following the first bar and All Clear to clear all signature tempo settings can be selected SETUP Rel Sisnature Set Flashing New Registering of Time Signature 3 While in the previous step 2 display select Insert New Event 126 and press the ENTER YES key The Insert New Event display section will change to the display for setting up a new bar and the 002 number will flash At this point the bar figure displayed will be the bar figure setup last 1 and the signature figure displayed will be same as the last setting Example In the initial state OO2BAR 4 4 J will be shown Sishature Set HEZBAF Offset 5 AF 4 4 AR 4 42 Clear r Flashing Input the desired bar figure with the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key It will change to flashing of 4 4 Input the desired meter via the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key The input bar and signature figures will be set as shown in the following This display is an example of setting the third bar to 3 4 beat If the JOG dial is rotated the editing point of bar or signature like the figures shown below can be input E FIO FOSE Sisnature Set HEZBAR Offset poen E ATT ee Flashing The following bar numbers and time signatures can be entered via the JOG dial Bar You can enter are
60. and 8 Press the EXIT NO key to return to the Normal Display Set the ch1 4 ch 7 amp 8 and ch9 12 fader and master fader to o Pressthe RECORD key to goto the input monitor RED Flash ing 10 Set the ch7 8 fader and PAN that is used to monitor the REC track 85 maa aoc H Set the ch7 PAN to the LEFT L and ch8 PAN to the RIGHT R The position of the recorded signal can be checked 11 Adjust the faders PAN equalizer and effect of each source channel ch1 4 and ch9 12 The sound is recorded on track 7 by setting the source channel PAN to the LEFT The sound is recorded on track 8 by setting the source channel PAN to the RIGHT The sound is recorded on both tracks by setting the source channel PAN to the CENTER When the preparations to record have been completed start recording according to the basic BUSS RECORD in structions described earlier How to adjust the REC BUSS Master Level To adjust the REC BUSS Master Level press the BUSS REC TRK key then use the JOG dial while the following dis play is shown The default setting of the REC BUSS Mas ter Level is set to 80 However this can be modified to a voluntary REC BUSS Master Level with the JOG dial After adjusting the level press the EXIT NO key The Normal Display appears The master level during re cording appears on the level meter shown on the display below Fostex VF OoO eee Pi
61. and loaded as part of the song data Off Initial setting Phantom power will not be supplied The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the VF160 On Phantom power is supplied to INPUT 7 and 8 The PHANTOM LED will be 1 Select Phantom Power in the menu selection display and press lit the ENTER YES key The currently set will flash Off will flash in the initial 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP setting mode or Select Meru F Fader Fix off Fader Fecall Off Pair Fader Set Phan tomPower Flashing Come Channel OFF 140 ees VASS FOSE Compressor Channel Setting Comp Channel In the Setup of the compressor channel menu the channel in which the VF160 internal compressor function should be activated can be setup The compressor can be made to function in channels 13 14 or 15 16 Regardless to this setting the compressor can be applied at all times to the master channel lt Note gt lt Important gt The VF160 internal compressor can be made to function p EQ cannot be applied to the channel Except the master channel setup for the compressor only in the channel setup here and the master channel However editing of EQ in channels other than the mas ter channel is not permissible With the compressor channel setup if the EQ editing mode is entered this condition will be indicated by the CH STATUS CH SEL key LED e Init
62. assembled hard disk to the Cable Select setting The hard disk will not operate normally if the setting is set to MASTER or SLAVE when the hard disk is assembled Refer to the User s Manual of the hard disk for more details on the DIP switch and Jumper settings Note that the connector of some hard disks may be stiff and thus make it difficult or impossible to insert or connect Never apply excessive force to insert the connector in such case Always make a point to gently insert the connector Failure to do so may result in unexpected injuries or damage the hard disk 24 VF I amp O Fostex 1 Unscrewthe four screws fixing the panel to the bottom of 4 Prepare a new hard disk and connect the two cable the VF160 main unit connectors to it with holding the connector section If the panel is removed the hard disk covered with a cushion can be seen Connector p Hard disk unit Panel Cushion 2 Take out the hard disk to the direction 2 indicated in the drawing below Sree Slightly lifting up the cushion upward helps you take out 5 Put back the new hard disk into the VF160 main unit the hard disk easily Inthe reverse order of taking out the hard disk as performed When taking it out do not apply excessive force earlier carefully house the hard disk at the bottom of the i main unit and cover it with the cushion Cushion Hard disk un
63. controlling the recorder with time base BAR BEAT CLK Confirming MTC sync MMC 1 During recording and at playback after recording time base MTC is displayed according to the setting and MTC is output at the same time Check that the VF160 traveling position MTC and the traveling position of the sequence software in sync are matched 2 Send MMC commands such as PLAY STOP and LOCATE from the sequence software to see that the VF160 will be properly controlled When a correct MIDI command MMC is received MIDI in the display will be lit for about 4Omsec There is no setting in the VF160 to receive MMC but it will operate if a correct MIDI signal is input If syne and control cannot be done correctly re check connections cables and the setting of both equipment Execution of recording Carry out various recordings while synchronizing the VF160 and a MIDI sequencer with the MIDI clock 92 v I Fostex External MIDI Equipment Sync System by the Slave mode Up to this point synchronization with external MIDI equipment has been explained with the VF160 as the master and MIDI equipment as the slave but depending on the slave mode setting the MIDI equipment can be set as the master and the VF160 as the slave MTC Connection to external equipment 1 Connect MIDI OUT of the computer with MIDI interface with MIDI I
64. correctly e When a CD RW drive connected to the VF160 is turned on only the eject switch of the drive can be used Other controls such as the level control and the play button are not effective lt Notes for using the optional CD RW drive Model CD 1A gt After purchasing the CD 1A install it correctly before use For details about how to install the CD 1A see 145 page of this manual or the CD 1A installation manual 115 Fostex V 60 Bee Saving data using a CD RW drive Backup The following procedure is assumed that a CD RW is connected to the SCSI connector of the VF160 or the optional CD RW drive CD 1A is installed to the VF160 lt Note gt Do not carry out any VF160 key operation until the ac cess process to the CD RW CD R disc is completed 1 After turning on both the VF160 and the CD RW drive connected insert a disc to the CD RW drive 2 Press the SETUP key of the VF160 to enter the setup mode The display shows the screen for selecting the setup menu 3 Use the JOG dial to select highlight Save PGM and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting a save device where IDE is flashing Select Henu Be ESEJE Fader FI Ott Fader FecalI CSM Hit YES or WO Key 4 Press the REWIND key F FWD key to select IDE or SCSI and press the ENTER YES key Select SCSI if a SCSI type CD RW drive is used Selec
65. current disk As the data load goes on the remaining data size shown on the screen counts down wk ME eT lt Note gt You cannot abort the load operation before completed using SCSI unlike the load operation using the S PDIF or adat signal When the load operation is completed Completed appears while the VF160 stops a Load Fol SCSI I ETETE Load Completed EXIT Hit YES or HO Key 6 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key repeatedly until exiting the Setup mode 106 Fostex V 60 Bee Loading from more than one disk The following procedure shows how to load song data saved to two SCSI disks 1 Insert the first disk Disk 1 to the SCSI device 2 Carry out the same procedures as steps 1 through 3 described in the previous section Loading from a single disk The display shows the screen for selecting a program loaded If the program is saved over more than one disks backup file number B01 flashes as well as the recorded data size is shown Load POM SCSI Source POM Select Flashing Bods Diski setok B UF OOWH JOG Hit YES or HO Kes e By using the JOG dial in this step you can select Eject as well as destination programs To eject the disk select Eject and press the ENTER YES key lt Note gt If Disk 2 the second disk when saving is inserted in mistake the VF160 automatically recognized that the
66. disk space available when recording only one track It is possible to compute the recordable time by dividing the REMAIN time with the number of tracks to record Therefore if four tracks are simultaneously recorded then the recordable time is 46 minutes 3 hours 7 minutes divided by 4 If eight tracks are simultaneously recorded then the recordable time is 23 minutes divided by 8 and for sixteen tracks the recordable time would be 12 minutes divided by 16 The VF160 manages up to 99 programs on the hard disk Note that the space on the hard disk is slightly reduced as the number of programs increase since each program contains various settings in addition to the REC data Therefore it is important to always check the REMAIN time left prior to starting the recording to ensure that you have enough hard disk space to work with A shortage of hard disk space will stop the recording CHANNEL and TRACK According to this manual channel refers to mixer items and track refers to recorder items For example a sentence may read as follows One track of recorder play music will be started on the channel 1 fader of the mixer Eight channels worth of signals from input A to H will be recorded on tracks 7 and 8 of the recorder ADDITIONAL TRACK One program on the VF160 consists of 24 tracks The user can record play and edit Tracks 1 16 There are also 8 additional tracks 17 24 These 24 tracks can be
67. ejected and the above screen appears See lt Note gt below Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key to exit the Setup mode lt Note for saving data to more than one disc gt If you save data to more than one disc we recom mend to put a number on each disc in the saving or der such as DISC 1 DISC 2 etc so that you will eas ily know the order for inserting discs when loading data lt Note gt You cannot abort the save operation before com pleted Especially during the save operation to more than one disc if you happen to press the EXIT NO key while removing or inserting a disc you have to redo the save operation from the beginning with the first disc lt About save error gt If an error occurs for some reason during the save operation the error message as below appears If it appears press the EXIT NO key The display returns to the previous screen before performing the save operation Note that saved data before the error message ap pears is all invalid Save POM SCSI Pk Pkk kE Save Hot Completed Error occurred Hit YES or HO Key lt Note gt If the message above appears while saving data to a CD R disc you can no longer use the disc 117 VF amp O Fostex lt Hint 1 gt In the description for saving data above we assume to use a non recorded CD RW CD R disc If you use a recorded disc including a disc on which computer data is rec
68. gt ii Keep the screwmentioned above which will be used in step 4 below after installing the CD RW drive Turn the VF160 over and insert the CD 1A into the slot on the front panel Push the CD 1A firmly without forcing so that the connector of the CD 1A fits into its companion in the slot connector 145 Use two screws supplied with the CD 1A to fix the CD 1A to the VF160 from the front panel Tighten the screws with a screwdriver screw position screw position Use the screw you removed in step 1 to fix the blank panel supplied with the CD 1A to the front panel Slant the panel slightly when inserting the panel inside the unit Use the screw you re moved in step 1 to fix the blank panel mC 0 Connect the power cord of the VF160 and turn on the power Make sure that the VF160 starts up and the LED indi cator on the front panel of the CD 1A blinks for a few seconds then turns off Wait until the VF160 display changes to the Normal display from the start up display and then you are ready to operate the CD 1A Fostex F OO Bee Opening closing the tray e To open the tray press the eject switch lightly Pressing the switch will open the tray slightly Then pull out the tray gently by hand to fully open it Eject switch The tr
69. list Select the desired event memory using the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the scene num ber for the selected event memory Whilethe scene numberis flashing rotate the JOG dial coun terclockwise EVT DEL Event Delete flashes in the scene number field showing that the event memory selected above is ready to be deleted Aahedmn1i esha fees UO JOG RWO FFWD Hit ENTER or EsIT While EVT DEL is flashing press the ENTER YES key The confirmation message for deleting the selected event memory in which Sure flashes Press the ENTER YES key To cancel the operation press the EXIT NO key The selected event memory is deleted and the screen shows the event memory list Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key The display returns to the Normal display fostex F GO Me A y Scene sequence mode on off selection lt Screen appearances during playback gt You can turn on or off the scene sequence mode for The following show the screen appearances during play selecting whether or not executing the scene se back with the scene event map in which scene number 02 with title XXX is recalled at 01m 30s and scene uence program using the scene event map q prog 8 p number 05 with title YYY is recalled at 05m OOs 1 While the VF160is stopped press the ARTNAPLAY SCENE SEQ key while holding dow
70. must first set the tempo map to output metro nome sound The tempo map can be set through the Beat Setting menu and Tempo Setting menu of the SETUP mode The default setting of the tempo map is set to 4 4 bar beat with a tempo of 120 The following procedures are unnecessary if the default setting does not have to be modified The tempo map of the default setting means that the metronome sound will always click at a 4 4 beat and 120 tempo 1 Press the SETUP key when the VF160is inthe STOP mode to go to the SETUP mode The display to select a SETUP menu appears Use the JOG dial to select the Signature Set menu then press the ENTER YES key The menu to set the beat appears Refer to Setting the Beat on page 99 for more details on how to customize the beat setting After setting the beat press the EXIT NO key to return to the SETUP menu Use the JOG dial to select the Tempo Set menu then press the ENTER YES key The menu to set the tempo appears Refer to Setting the Tempo on page 101 for more details on how to customize the tempo setting After setting the tempo press the EXIT NO key to return to the SETUP menu Next proceed with the Setting Metronome Output pro cedure Setting metronome output The next step is whether to set the system to output metronome sound or not This is done in the same manner as setting the tempo map and is set from the Metronome Function Setting menu in the S
71. not enough disk space available to save that program E VASO Fostex Selecting a Program If there are several programs seton the disk there may be a need to select a target program The following instructions are based on the VF160 in the STOP status in the Normal Display 1 Press the PGM SEL key in the STOP state The current program number and Select PGM appears then the Sure message starts flashing on the LCD 2 Turnthe JOG dial display to selectthe target program number flashing New PGM appears when turning the JOG dial clockwise Use this to create a new program according to the instructions as described above 3 Select the target program number flashing then press the ENTER YES key The Normal Display of the selected program appears Erasing a Program The user can erase unnecessary programs Note that there must be sufficient storage space disk space available to store new more data on the hard disk to record or edit existing programs By erasing an unnecessary program from the disk the user can make more disk space and thus ensure smooth operations of other functions lt Precaution gt e The program started prior to executing the ERASE function is the program that is going to be erased Therefore the user must start the program to erase according to the Selecting a Program instructions described above Ifa program is erased when there is only one progr
72. number of times to playback of a recorded tune P Please read page 69 Fa want to format the hard disc p Please read page 23 want to locate to the desired point Please read page 34 want to copy one section of the tune to another track Please read page 72 want to exchange tracks Please read pages 39 and 76 XN want to make a multiple number of programs p Please read page 70 I want to mixdown all recordings on the 16 tracks Please read page 42 YY a want to control the VF 160 with MIDI p Please read page 90 want to simultaneously record analog and digital signals Please read page 89 want to make an original CD p Please read page 120 want to know details on the internal effecter Please read page 57 va want to digitally record my own selected tunes from CD and MD Please read page 88 want to store and recall the mixing setting E Please read page 61 want to make a backup of the song data Please read page 98 want to locate to the head of the program while fast winding Please read page 67 cr want to use the condenser type microphone Please read page 140 want to use the internal compressor Please read pages 54 and 141 want to use the equalizer at recording Please read pages
73. of an extended space L09 Norm ROOM REVERB Room reverb simulating a moderate space with some sparkle L10 Dead ROOM REVERB Room reverb simulating a narrow and dead room Adding a slight amount will give warmth to the sound L11 Pres ROOM REVERB All purpose room reverb with good definition and few early reflections L12 DrumBOOTH REVERB Room reverb simulating a drum booth L13 GARAGE REVERB Room reverb simulating a narrow and live space like a garage with crisp presence L14 NormPLATE REVERB Modern sounding plate reverb with wide bandwidth L15 Old PLATE REVERB Standard plate reverb with the character of older plate units L16 PresPLATE REVERB Plate reverb with good definition and extended high frequencies L17 Wet PLATE REVERB Plate reverb with a gentle character L18 DigiPLATE REVERB Plate reverb that emphasizes a digital character with metallic early reflections L19 NormVOCAL REVERB All purpose hall reverb with no early reflections and uniform decay at all frequencies L20 PresVOCAL REVERB Short reverberation with extended high frequency is added to the early reflections of an ideal vocal booth Since this adds sparkle to the sound it is effective when you wish to bring the vocal to the forefront L21 SoloVOCAL REVERB Plate like reverb is added to a spacious short delay This blends well with any genre of music L22 Arena VOC REVERB Gentle reverb is added to spacious stadium type early reflections
74. of the drive uantize bit 11 Remaining capacity of the drive 12 Present software version 2 As the JOG dial is rotated information will be displayed one by one 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode Drive Setting Drive Sel In this Drive Setting a switch is made between the current drive E IDE hard disk and the backup drive Removable SCSI drive The saved song data can be played back by switching to the backup drive SCSI However this will be only to the extent of confirming the saved data and should all 16 channels be played back it may create drop out of sound and in some SCSI equipment the channel possible for playback could be changed lt Note gt The following operations cannot be executed when the drive is switched to backup drive Save load of song data Recording Creating anew program Deleting a program Copy amp paste and Move amp paste Erase Track exchange Setup of tempo ON OFF of metronome function Setup of permission or denial of recording Setup of time signature Editing a title If power to the VF160 is switched again the drive will automatically switch to current drive E IDE In order to take out the removable disk when set to backup drive press the EXIT NO key while holding down the SHIFT key e Initial setting IDE The selected drive will be set e Options
75. offset time difference against ABS time absolute time and output it as MTC in any desired frame rate It can also carry out the proper operation upon receiving an MMC from outside In this case because the VF160 can setup a DEVICE ID number by the SETUP mode MIDI Device IDSetting menu a multiple number of the VF160 s can be separately controlled by changing the DEVICEID numbers in the transmitted message from the computer MMC MIDI Sound Source MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN STOUTL R 60 Master Recorder Computer System with MMC MTC software MIDI OUT 91 Fostex V I60 Eee Connecting to external equipment 1 Connect the VF160 MIDI IN OUT to the computer with MIDI interface MIDI IN OUT MMC MTC complied sequence software is activated in the computer Setup of external equipment 1 Setup the following in the sequence software Set to MTC external sync mode EXTERNAL SYNC Set for output of MMC Set to the desired MTC read out frame rate Set start time of the tune which MTC time is to be the first bar Refer to precaution in regards to MTC offset farther on For details refer to Owners Manual of the external equipment Setup of the VF 160 1 Because MTC will be outp
76. on care of disc gt e If there is a dust dirt or fingerprints on the disc which may cause error in playback or recording wipe the disc with a soft dry cloth or alcohol from the center out Never wipe from the outside to center e Do not use a cleaner for analog discs or antistatic spray as well as volatile solvents such as benzine which may damage the disc surface e Do not expose any disc to direct sunlight or leave it in hot moist or cold places e Read the attached manual packed with the disc before using it es RIGO Fostex How to install the CD 1A lt Notes on installing the CD RW drive gt e The CD RW drive is made of precision parts Do not apply a mechanical shock or use excessive force when installing it e Before installing the drive make sure that the power of the VF160 is off and the power cord is discon nected e Install the drive correctly according to this manual Note that damage to the drive caused by inappropriate installation is not covered by the guarantee 2 Place the VF160 upside down on a material such as a soft cloth and unscrew the screw that fixes the blank panel Be careful not to drop the VF160 or give a strong shock to the VF160 which may damage the hard disk drive built into it Keep the blank panel for future use in case you unmount the CD 1A Unfasten the screw that fixes the blank panel Blank panel Remove the blank panel E
77. or AUTO RTN END key The time is set at the respective points and then the LCD returns to the Normal Display The VF160 stops when a time is stored during playback lt Precaution gt Always set the START point time before the END point time The Auto Return functions will not operate properly unless the start and end times are set correctly 3 Press the ARTN APLAY key in the Normal Display to display the Auto Return icon on the LCD see figure below 69 4 Playthe V160 from the pointimmediately before the END point time Auto Return then takes effect Auto Repeat Auto Repeat is a combination of Auto Play and Auto Return When play reaches the END point the function automatically locates the START point By automatically starting to play after locating the START point it becomes possible to repeatedly playback a certain segment Start Point 4 End Point 4 Playback Playback BEB EBB BEEBE RBBB RBBB RP RBRPRBRPREeRee e Locating 1 Setthe START point time and END pointtime the same as the Auto Return function 2 Press the ARTN APLAY key in the Normal Display to display the Auto Repeat icon on the LCD as shown in figure below 3 Start playing the VF160 from the point immediately before the END point time set Auto Repeat will take effect fostex F OO Meee With the VF160 the music is managed according to programs numbered 01 99 99 programs These programs are
78. other condition in which the paste destination can be changed is when the data from two tracks odd and even next to each other 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 etc are copied or moved on the clipboard The paste destination track can be changed by pressing the CH STATUS CH SEL key in this case fostex VV F OO DT e Note thatitis not possible to paste to the same track that was copied or moved when copying or moving multiple tracks 1 3 5 8 etc although it was possible in the cases described earlier In this case the track will not be changed even if the CH STATUS CH SEL key is pressed 7 Turn the JOG dial to choose the paste repeat frequency The desired number can be input in the 01 area of the Repeat 01 that is currently flashing The maximum repeat frequency that can be input is 99 but this repeat frequency is automatically limited according to how much space is available on the disk Simply put afrequency of 99 repeat times can be input if there is enough disk space If there isn t then only the maximum allowable repeat frequency size for the remaining disk space can be input It is not possible to go above this number even if the JOG dial is turned Press the ENTER YES key Copy Paste or Move Paste flashes on the display UNDO REDO Paste Copy amp Paste or Move amp Paste can be undone and redone with the UNDO REDO feature e The data pasted can be undone unpasted by pressi
79. playing 1 Start playback by pressing the PLAY key 2 Press the F FWD or REWIND key during playback Either FWD gt or lt RWD will appear on the LCD Then 3x speed cuing starts in the direction chosen FWD gt X RUD S Init Mixi 3 Press the PLAY key to return to the original play speed 1x speed Shuttle Cueing Shuttle cueing at a cue speed between 1 64xis possible by turning the JOG dial while the SHIFT key is depressed when the recorder is playing The speed varies according to the degree the dial is turned 1 Press the PLAY key to start playback 2 Turnthe JOG SHUTTLE dial to the left right while the SHIFT key is depressed Turn the JOG dial to the right to shuttle cue in the FORWARD direction Turn the JOG dial to the left to shuttle cue in the REWIND direction The cueing speed varies from 1x 2x 4x 8x 16x 32x and 64x according to the degree angle in which the JOG dial is turned The current cueing speed appears on the LCD Sei Init MixG Shuttle cueing continues as long as the SHIFT key is depressed even when the JOG dial isn t used 3 Lift finger from SHIFT key to return to the original play speed 1x 67 lt Remember gt Once the data is rewound to the beginning of a program ABS 0 playback starts from the beginning of the program regardless of pressing the SHIFT key When reaching the end of a p
80. put track 16 in the READY REC mode Press the CHSTATUS CHSEL key of ch 1 RED Flashing Track 1 will go to the RDY Ready state and allow the input signal of source channel H to be recorded to track 1 EI Press the EXIT NO key to return to the Normal Display Tips Changing the recording mode Tochange the BUSS recording mode to the DIRECT re cording mode press the DIRECT REC TRK key while the tracks to be directly recorded are selected in the step above Rec Mode Change appears and Sure flashes on the screen Rec Mode Chanse Pressing the ENTER YES key cancels the selection of tracks for the BUSS recording and changes the display to the track selection screen for the DIRECT record ing 45 Adjusting the Source Channel 9 Press the RECORD key then settrack 1 to the input moni tor RECORD Key RED Flashing Sound for monitoring purposes can be heard from the headphones or speakers from this point Adjust the volume of the monitor sound with the MON OUT or PHONES knob Set the ch1 fader ch16 fader and master fader to 0 Check the sound source and adjust the TRIM 8 16 H to an appropriate gain The guideline for optimal gain is when the PEAK LED is just about to light up when the sound source is turned up to the maximum volume Accordingly equalize the signals of ch16 being recorded Tips Equalizing the Source Channel Press the HI G F Q ke
81. recalled 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode 138 ees VASS FOSE Pair Fader setting Pair Fader Set The Pair Fader Set menu sets whether or not you simultaneously control the adjacent odd and even chan nels Normally each channel fader on the VF160 acts independently By setting Pair Fader Set to On you can pair faders of two adjacent channels allowing the odd channel fader to control the partner even channel s level This function is useful for stereo source etc You can also control Pair Fader channels simultaneously during channel parameter editing etc See lt Hint gt below e Initial setting e Options Off for all pair channels On Off for each pair channels You can set the value for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of thesong data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the VF160 1 Select Pair Fader Set in the menu selection display and press the ENTER YES key The pair fader set status on or off list is shown where the channel 1 amp 2 line is highlighted In the initial condi tion all paired channels are set to Off 2 Select the desired paired channels via the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key The setting field On or Off is shown for the selected channels flashes 3 Select On or Off via the JOG d
82. sarisin iieii aa as 14 Names and FUNCTIONS 1cccccccesceesecessetssetssesssessseseseseeses 15 e Analog Input Output Section esssesessssessseseseseessrsssseses 16 Mixer SQCHOM ieciasccicccssscsisnssesssccoscenseneassesvuevecvascacsnsedssvassneves 17 e Recorder Section sscscssrssrssrssssccerssrsscscsssesrsstsesseesessrses 19 Display SECUONL neiesten atsean cotvedstvicoessasevacd ee 22 Rear Panel ivesssises cscs dekesssetniavaaraiedaavaagtecveateeneseatiaesanee 22 Front Pan elie nenesinin iir icbaeeectbneteeseatee 22 About the hard disk storage C VICE cceccecceieeeees 23 e Reformatting the Hard Disk ceesseseesseceeetseeeseeeeeeeees e Replacing a Hard Disk e Formatting the New Hard Disk Chapter 2 Basic Recording and Playback About demonstration SONG sccccceccecceseeseeeeeeeseteeeeeees 27 Connections of Peripheral EQuipMeNt ccceccee 28 LOD ITEA AEAEE AAE DEE AEAEE EATE 29 Instructions for DIRECT Record dl Recording to One Track seesesseccseesesessesssessssesseesseseeees 31 RECOrding tO TWO TrackS cesescsssccreesesesecesessssesseeseeeseeee 33 Locate FUNCHON sex oa ase eeel enea Sate ees 34 SABS LOCALCs dessstenssseiussavcesdiseee shunts codssaieacesneecaasieesentetssaacnts 34 e Locating a mark point usinga Memory key ccesseee 34 Saving on the Memory key and Markkey a DirectLocation of Memory key Or Mark Ke Y
83. saved and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the Save Length screen Initially the recorded time length of the selected program ABS O to REC END is shown as the time length of data saving Normally you do not need to edit the length but you may edit it to the desired value if needed Flashing Iri UP DOWM JOG REL FFWD Hit YES or HO Key For example if the actual recorded time is 9 min 00 sec you can make the length of the data to be saved shorter or longer than 9 min 00 sec as long as the length does not exceed 59 min 59 sec The initially displayed value here is the length of the Real track therefore as noted earlier you may edit the value to match the length of the Additional track if it is longer To edit the save length Press the REWIND or F FWD key to move the flashing field between minutes and seconds Use the JOG dial to set the value for the flashing field 6 Press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting tracks to be saved Save PEM SPDIF Save Track Area Flashing To UP OOWH JOG REW FFWD Hit YES or HO Key 7 Select tracks to be saved Press the REWIND or F FWD key to move the flashing field between From and To Use the JOG dial to set the track number for the flashing field For the From field you can select from 1 9 and 17 For the To field you can select from 8
84. select the type of MIDI sync signals output from the MIDI OUT connector on the rear panel of the VF160 to an external MIDI device The options are MIDI clock amp Song Position Pointer or MTC MIDI time code Select an appropriate option depending on the type of signal supported by the connected MIDI device If you select MIDI clock amp Song Position Pointer first you need to set the time signatures and tempo as described previously If you select MTC you first need to set the MTC frame rate the MTC offset time and the MTC offset mode as described later e Initial setting CLK 2 Select the desired MIDI sync signal with the JOG dial and 10 ing e Option CLK clock amp Song Position Pointer press the ENTER YES key MTC MIDI time code or Off no output CLK Initial setting MIDI clock and song position You can set the parameters for each Program pointer will be output individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the MTC MIDI time code will be output song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the Off Any MIDI sync signal will not power to the VF160 be output 1 Select Midi Sync Out in the menu selection display and press the ENTER YES key The currently set item will flash CLK will flash in initial setting SETUF FAT Select Menu 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode
85. source channel s for BUSS recording by pressing the appro priate CH STATUS CH SEL key s ARMAS SELECT SOURCE I i 1 B EFFI OOO ed d d ed ed oy 3 I0 Ii ig 13 14 I5 H HER D Dd C Cd Ca ed ed ed Cy Tips Pressing the CH STATUS CH SEL key of channel 1 8 or channel 9 16 while holding down the SHIFT key sets all channels 1 through 8 or 9 through 16 to recording sources simultaneously E hie O Fostex In the following example channel 16 which accepts input H is selected as a source channel If you select channels 1 through 4 and 16 here tracks 1 through 4 and input H are set as recording sources Therefore you can record mixed signals of track and input signals If you also select EEF1 or EFF2 you can record source signals with internal effect To bounce tracks set all channel sources to TRK using the SELECT INPUT TRACK and set source channel for recording as shown in the following fig ure Then set tracks 15 and 16as the recording tracks see BUSS REC TRK key below ce mo IF Ea ba mv I Lz Os 0z E T a es m e BUSS REC TRK key The BUSS REC TRK key is used to select recording tracks for BUSS recording After setting the recording source s as described above press the BUSS REC TRK key to bring up the screen such as below so that you can select recording tracks for BUSS recording 9 io i iZ 13 14 IS H
86. sure to check that the Scene Sequence Mode explained later is switched Off Should the parameters be edited with this Scene Sequence Mode switched On the parameters will be returned to their original setting when the VF 160 is operated in PLAY or STOP Refer to page 66 for On off of the Scene Sequence Mode Press the PAN key The PAN setup menu appears on the LCD Select CH will be flashes Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the channel intended for PAN adjustment The channel selected flashes then the input signal and the current setting of the channel selected appears on the LCD Turn the JOG dial to set the PAN level Agraphic display of the PAN parameter appears on the LCD in real time Toadjust other channels press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of that channel then go to Step 3 Press the EXIT NO key when adjustments are completed The system returns to the Normal Display Flashing 40 Equalizer Adjustment Tips For fader paired channels set by the Pair fader setting menu in the Setup mode controlling EQ settings for one channel affects both channels simultaneously See page 138 for details about how to pair faders 1 1 Press the HI G F Q key The menu to set the high frequencies of the equalizer appears 1 2 Press the MID G F Q key The menu to set the mid frequencies of the equalizer appears
87. the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for creating a new program on the current drive to which data will be loaded New PGM lights oe FaN SCSI I t Selo A MB UF DOWH JOG Sure Hit YES or HO Key Flashing As described earlier when loading data from a CD RW drive the VF160 creates a new program on the current drive which is the load destination Therefore New PGM is shown on the right of the flash ing program number The program number for the newly created destination program is the next number to the highest existing pro gram number For example if there are 8 existing programs P01 through P08 on the current drive the newly created program is numbered P09 lt Note gt If you rotate the JOG dial while the above screen Destn PGM Select is shown you can select an exist ing program on the current drive as the destination However as mentioned earlier when loading data using CD RW you cannot actually load data to the ex isting program by overwriting the program data If you press the ENTER YES key see the next step while selecting an existing program as the destina tion the display shows Void and the VF160 ignores the operation While New PGM is shown press the ENTER YES key The VF160 starts the load operation The recorded space shown on the display is counted down while the load operation progresses It
88. the ENTER YES key of events on the corresponding track It will change to the Event second level and the event number eure nly jun each track will be displayed The 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP symbol indicates there is data below is the event number mode rac EE Trackis HEE Track t wk Track g KEE 136 ees Ico FOSE The Drive Format Information Drive Information Format information of the current drive currently installed can be checked by using the Drive Format Information menu Should any trouble occur in the VF160 providing the information obtained here to our nearest Fostex Service Station will be of great help in giving quick service The following items will be displayed and can be confirmed a 1 Select Drive Information in the menu selection display and press 1 Manufacture Model of the currently installed hard disk the ENTER YES key 2 Format method It will change to the Drive Information second level and 3 Format type the current drive information currently in use will be 4 Simultaneously recordable number of tracks displayed The W symbol indicates there is data below 5 Number of bits at formatting 6 Sampling frequency at formatting 7 Present number of programs 8 Present number of free blocks 9 Audio file maximum number of events and its program Ture No Track 10 Specific capacity
89. the CD 1A two screws for mounting the drive a blank panel Ck lt Usable discs gt With the CD 1A you can use discs of following types lt CD R discs gt Can be used for saving or loading song COMPACT data as well as making an audio CD HS E Note that you can record data to a CD R dable disc only once You cannot record data ecol to a disc which has been recorded be fore lt CD RW discs gt COMPACT Can be used for saving or loading song IS amp data as well as making an audio CD You can record or erase data to a CD R AEII disc as many times as wish NDAGT lt Audio CD discs gt co CT As these are read only discs you only HS can use them for loading track data to DIGI TACAUDIO the VF160 See the VF160 operation manual for details about how to save load song data or how to make an audio CD a CD RW drive unit lt Notes on handling of discs gt e When handling a disc be careful not to dirty or scratch the surface of the disc We recommend that you hold the disc with your fin ger on the disc edge and center hole e Do not stick any paper etc on the label side Also do not scratch the label side which may cause problems during playback or recording Use only a felt pen or equivalent for writing any memo on the label side Using a ball point pen pencil etc that has a hard tip may damage a disc e Never use a warped or chipped disc which may dam age the CD RW drive lt Notes
90. the display Mowe Paste 7 Press the ENTER YES key again The display for selecting the number of repeat times ap pears in which 01 and Sure flash In this tutorial leave the number as the initial 01 Mowe Paste Peres teny Sure 8 Press the ENTER YES key again while 01 flashes The move amp paste operation is immediately completed and the program data now moved as shown below When the move amp paste operation is completed Com pleted appears on the display CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point ABS 0 00M 00S 00F 00SF REC END 05M 00S 00F 00SF i 1 1 1 a minutes i REC END 00M 03S 00F 00SF 05M 03S 00F 00SF i Al 00M 00S 00F 00SF gt 5 minutes i As we mentioned earlier if you make an audio CD in this condition data after the CLIPBOARD OUT point will not be recorded Therefore you have to set the CLIPBOARD OUT point to the REC END point fostex V I60 ee e Change the CLIPBOARD OUT point 9 When the unit is stopped press the F FWD key while hold ing down the STOP key The unit immediately locates the REC END point 10 Press the STORE key followed by the CLIPBOARD OUT key The REC END point is now registered as the CLIPBOARD OUT point The display returns to the Normal display By changing the CLIPBOARD OUT point you can now create an audio CD without loo
91. the display returns to the Normal display When selecting an event memory you can know the near est event memory point to the current point by the flash ing event number in the example below event number 02 is the nearest TELANE BheSnGeshe ah Tm3ASsAH Bhi 2mshshh Flashing Skip locate With the Skip locate function using the event memo ries the unit automatically recognizes the locate point and locate there When the Skip locate is executed the locate point is shown on the screen and you will know where the current position goes Current position EVT01 EVT02 EVT03 ABSO 02M30S 05M00S 07M30S SHIFT key F FWD key EVT04 EVT05 EVT06 10M00S 42M30S 15M00S 17M30S SHIFT key REWIND key 1 Press the REWIND PREV key while holding down the SHIFT key to skip back to the previous event memory point 2 Press the F FWD NEXT key while holding down the SHIFT key to skip advance to the next event memory point lt Hint gt By sequentially executing the key operation above as many times as required you can locate the desired event memory In the above screen for example to locate event 01 from the current position press the REWIND PREV key three times while holding down the SHIFT key ss RIGO FOSE Punch In Out Punch IN OUT recording enables you to record over previously recorded parts This function comes in handy in the following cases
92. this key during PLAY REC F FWD REW to stop recorder operations Press this key in the SETUP mode to escape one stage each from the SETUP mode Press the PLAY REWIND F FWD key while this key is depressed for the following operations This is used to CANCEL PAUSE the SETUP menu settings copy paste and various other sound editing processes STOP PLAY CLIPBOARD PLAY Play the sound that is copied or moved to the clipboard STOP REWIND LOCATE ABSO Locate the beginning of the ABS ABS 00M OOS OOF of the current program STOP F FWD LOCATE REC END Locate the portion in which sound is recorded REC END on the current program Ric PLAY Key Press this key to start playing the recorder Press the RECORD key while this key is depressed or press this key while the RECORD key is depressed to start recording the READY track PUNCH OUT REC CANCEL takes place when only the PLAY key is pressed during the recording process Press this key while the STOP key is depressed to start CLIPBOARD PLAY 50 REWIND PREV Key Press this key while the machine is stopped for 30X rewind speed 3X cuing rewinding with sound takes place when this key is pressed during the PLAY status Press this key while the SHIFT keyis depressed to locate the PREV previous memory locate the previous event memory Press this key while depressing the STOP key to LOCATE ABS 0 Pres
93. twice to exit Effect Edit mode 1 Ifthe effect parameter that you wish to adjust is not displayed press the EFF 1 key or the EFF 2 key twice One of the parameters of that effect type will appear EFF 1 EDIT Hi E E Level LAL Horm HAL Muting an effect You can mute the effect sound of effect 1 or effect 2 MUTE OFF Flashing To mute the effect sound Hold down the SHIFT key and press the EFF 1 key or EFF 2 key The effect sound of effect 1 or effect 2 will be muted and the dry sound will be heard 2 Press the EFF 1 key or the EFF 2 key several times to When muting is on the EFF 1 key or EFF 2 key LED is off display the desired parameter The parameters that appear will differ depending on the effect type that is selected e To cancel muting EFFI EDIT Eff Lewel Pre Delay 1 atio E E Level LB1 Horm HALL MOTE Orr Once again hold down the SHIFT key and press the EFF 1 key or EFF 2 key The dry sound will change back to the effect sound When mute is turned off the EFF 1 key or EFF 2 key LED m Flashing is off Effect parameter details The parameters that can be adjusted will depend on the parameter type 1 Eff Level 2 Rev Time 3 Pre Delay 4 Hi Ratio 5 E R Level Reverb effect parameters parameter type REVERB For effect types 1 24 of the preced
94. unit may generates a noise which damages an external device o0000 opoppop0p p00000 00000 e When using the S PDIF signal if your DAT only provide the coaxial RCA digital input jack and does not provide the optical jack use the optional COP 1 96kHz optical coaxial converter e Do not connect digital signals for both directions between the VF160 and the external device i e the digital output of the VF160 to the digital input of the external device and the digital output of the external device to the digital input of the VF160 which may form a digital loop and cause feedback Setting the external device 1 Make preparations of the external device for outputting the digital signal 2 Locate the beginning of the pilot signal for the song data See the operation manual of the external device for the detailed information 100 Loading data You can load data via the Load PGM menu in the SETUP mode lt Details about Load PGM menu gt eInput signal options OPT adat or S PDIF SCSI or IDE CD 1A Program options PO1 to P99 an individual Program Track options When using S PDIF or adat Tracks 1 8 Tracks 1 16 Tracks 1 24 Tracks 9 16 Tracks 9 24 or Tracks 17 24 When using a SCSI disk All tracks 1 24 is selected automatically You can sel
95. up the track selection screen The following figure shows that no tracks 1 through 16 are armed To arm selected tracks press the ap propriate CH STATUS CH SEL keys Tips Pressing the CH STATUS CH SEL key of channel 1 8 or channel 9 16 while holding down the SHIFT key switches arms all tracks 1 through 8 or 9 through 16 simultaneously 10 The following figure shows that track 1 is armed READY so that input A signal can be recorded on track 1 For BUSS recording INPUT SEL BUSS SOURCE and BUSS REC TRK keys are used INPUT SEL key To make BUSS recording of input signals press the INPUT SEL key and set source signals to inputs by pressing the CH STA TUS CH SEL keys of channels 9 through 16 In the following figure the source for channel 16is set toinput H H E Oo E IH IH IM iH Tips Pressing the CH STATUS CH SEL key of channel 9 16 while holding down the SHIFT key switches channel sources for all tracks 9 through 16 between IN in put A through H and TRK simultaneously BUSS SOURCE key The BUSS SOURCE key is used to select source channels for BUSS recording If you press the BUSS SOURCE key when the input select screen is set as the figure shown above i e the source for channel 16 is set toinput H the source select screen as below appears While this screen is shown you can select the desired
96. using faders ch9 16 Asa16MTRforsimultaneous recording of all of these roles e To use the VF160 in the Adat Mixer Mode the SETUP mode digital input digital output setting must be first set to adat e Tracks set to IN Input by INPUT SEL cannot be changed to READY e This function is effective only for executing DIRECT record ing and will not function for BUSS recording If you execute the above while in BUSS recording the VF160 will want toselect a different recording mode RecMode Change will be displayed and Sure will flash At this point if the ENTER YES key is pressed simultaneous with change in the recording mode the Adat Mixer Mode will switch on If the EXIT NO key is pressed the BUSS recording mode can be continued fostex F GO Mee Channel Parameter Edit You can edit the various parameter settings such as pan and equalizers for channels 1 through 16 and the master channel We refer this type of editing as Channel parameter edit There are several channel parameter edit keys on the top panel as shown below and pressing the dedicated key for the parameter you want to edit brings up the corresponding edit screen Some keys also handle the second parameter labeled under the key and you can bring up the corresponding edit screen by pressing the key while holding down the SHIFT key You can view and or edit the following parameters EQ COMP lt Caution gt EFFI EFF2 Ifyou must edit channe
97. value thus input will be set Advancing or retarding the input figure is carried out automatically with reference to the currently set MTC 1 Select Mtc Offset Set in the menu selection display and frame rate figure ae ihe ENTER YES key f 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the t will change to the second level display of the Mtc Offset menu and the currently set offset value will be SETUP mode shown 00h 59m OOf OOsf will be displayed in the initial state and s will flash Flashing indicates the editable point 131 fostex F GO Di i Setting MTC Offset mode Offset Mode If you have selected MTC in the Setting Offset mode menu you need to select MTC Offset mode This menu enables you to determine whether the specified MTC is output at ABS 00h 00m OOs OOf or at OO1bar lbeat OOclk bar beat of the Tempo Map lt Notes gt e As an example if you set MTC Offset mode to ABS and you wish to start the song from MTC s 1h 00m 00s OOf you may want to set a preroll of three seconds with MTC offset of 00h 59m 57s OOf If you select BAR as the MTC Offset mode a preroll of two measures is automatically set Use 01h 00m OOs OOf do not set a preroll value If you set Offset mode to BAR and use MTC to synchronize sequence software on the computer the tempo of the sequencer may sometimes slip gradually This is because the tempo of the VF160 and the tempo of the so
98. will take some time for loading all data The following display example shows that the data of the backup number B01 is being loaded to P08 which is newly created on the current drive Load POM SCSI ta Loadina 133P8 k PIB lt Display example for loading gt 119 lt Note gt If there is not enough available space for loading on the current drive the display shows Disk Full and the display returns to the previous screen When completing the load operation Load Completed appears on the display as shown below and the VF160 stops access to the drive while the disc in the CD RW drive is automatically ejected Load FoM SCSI PAS fs Load completed Hit YES or WO Key When loading data from more than one disc the first disc will be ejected immediately after all disc data has been loaded while Insert Disk appears on the screen After inserting the second disc the VF160 automatically resumes the load operation After completing loading all the discs the above screen appears lt Note gt You cannot abort the load operation before completed Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key to exit the Setup mode lt About load error gt Ifan error occur for some reason during the load operation the error message as below appears If it appears press the EXIT NO key The display returns to the previous screen be fore performing the
99. 0 Connect a headphone or speaker to monitor the sound Hint oH B Channel Selection Connect the sound source to record to INPUT jack H Press the BUSS SOURCE key GREEN Flashing The display to select the source channel sent to REC BUSS Press the INPUT SEL key ORANGE Flashing appears Pressthe CH STATUS CH SEL key forch16so the key starts 5 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch16 ORANGE flashing ORANGE INPUT Flashing The following display appears and the signals of input The signals of input H started with the fader of ch16 is H will start for channel 16 sent to REC BUSS 44 Es EIS FOSE Itis possible to apply effect to the input signals by setting EFF1 or EFF2 to the source at the same time Details are described later lt Note gt The channel signal sent to REC BUSS ch16 in this case are not directly output from the stereo OUT L R chan nels It will be output from the stereo OUT L R chan nels with the track recorded set to the input monitor mode with later procedures g Press the BUSS REC TRK key RED Flashing The display to select the REC track appears Chan lt Note gt When the signals of input H are started with the ch16 fader it will not be possible to listen to the play sound of the track Therefore it is prohibited to
100. 1 FAX 31 20 697 4201 lt NORWAY gt NAME Siv Ing Benum A S ADD P O Box 145 Vinderen 0319 Oslo 3 Norway TEL 47 22 139900 FAX 47 22 148259 lt PORTUGAL gt NAME Caius Tecnologias Audio e Musica Lda ADD Rua de Santa Catarina 131 4000 Porto Portugal TEL 351 2 2086009 2001394 FAX 351 2 2054760 2087488 lt SPAIN gt NAME Multitracker S A ADD C Garcilaso No 9 Madrid 28010 Spain TEL 34 91 4470700 91 4470898 FAX 34 91 5930716 lt SWEDEN gt NAME Professional Television AB ADD Kavallerivagen 24 172 48 Sundbyberg Sweden TEL 46 8 59798000 FAX 46 8 59798001 lt SWITZERLAND gt NAME Audio Bauer Pro AG ADD Bernerstrasse Nord 182 CH 8064 Zurich Switzerland TEL 41 1 4323230 FAX 41 1 4326558 lt UK gt NAME SCV London ADD 3A 6 24 Southgate Road London N1 3JJ England UK TEL 44 171 923 1892 FAX 44 171 241 3644 FOSTEX CORPORATION 3 2 35 Musashino Akishima shi Tokyo Japan 196 0021 FOSTEX AMERICA 15431 Blackburn Ave Norwalk CA 90650 U S A PRINTED IN JAPAN SEPT 2001 8588 008 100 FX 356891
101. 1 3 Press the LO G key The menu to set the low frequencies of the equalizer appears Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the channel intended for equalizer adjustments The channel name and current setting of the channel selected appears on the LCD Flashing Every time the HI G F Q key or MID G F Q key is pressed the parameter alternates from G Gain gt F Frequency gt Q Characteristic Curve Select the item to adjust Only the G Gain can be adjusted for the low frequency equalizer LO G key Therefore the item will not change by pressing the key Turnthe JOG dial to modify the parameter of the item to adjust The EQ setting graphically appears on the LCD in real time E VA FOSE EQ curve 5 To adjust other items or another frequency range of the equalizer press again the HI G F Q key MID G F Q key or LO G key Then turn the JOG dial to modify the parameter 6 To adjust other channel press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of that channel 7 Wwhen adjustments are completed pess the EXIT NO key The system returns to the Normal Display Effect Send Level Adjustment Tips For fader paired channels set by the Pair fader setting menuin the Setup mode controlling the level for one chan nel affects both channels simultaneously See page 138 for details about how to pair faders 1 Press the CH PARAM EDIT EFF1 EFF2 key
102. 40 and 51 want to send a signal to an external effector p Please read page 53 want to use the internal effector at recording P Please read pages 41 50 and 56 want to search the point by digital scrubbing 8 Please read page 67 ns N R IOO FOS want to change the speed at playback record D want to operate the faders in pairs Please read page 68 Please read page 139 J Ne I want to manage the programs by naming them want to make a tempo map L Please read page 71 Please read pages 126 and 128 J want to use the SCSI type CD RW drive I want to mixdown without using external equipment L Please read page 114 Please read page 79 J want to use the optional CD RW drive want to format the backup disks Please read pages 114 and 145 Please read page 102 2 want to erase a tune want to setup the MTC offset time L Please read page 75 Please read page 131 A want to record in time with the metronome sound want to sync with external equipment y Please read page 87 Please read page 90 94 J A N want to mix record the track playback sound and a newly want to output a MIDI sync signal to external MIDI performed tune equipment L Please read page 85 Please read page 130 J ip want to make a pi
103. 5 Press the DISP SEL key while holding down the SHIFT key and then change the time base display to BAR BEAT CLK Confirming the MIDI clock sync During recording and at playback following the recording the time base BAR BEAT CLK is displayed in accordance to the setup tempo map and the MIDI clock and song position pointer is also output Confirm that the travel position BAR BEAT CLK of the VF160 and the travel position of the synchronized MIDI sequencer are matched If correct sync cannot be obtained re check the connections cables and setting of both equipment lt Note gt Inthe VF160 the ABS 0 position is set at OO2BAR 1BEAT OOCLK This setting is made in consideration of the time required it will not sync immediately for the MIDI sequencer etc to enter into sync Asa result if the VF160 is played back from ABS O LOCATE ABS 0 sync will be completed by the time it reaches the first bar and will thus synchronize from head of the tune Execution of recording Various ways of recording can be conducted while synchronizing the VF160 and the MIDI sequencer with the MIDI clock MTC Sync MIDI Machine Control System The following will explain synchronization by the MTC MIDI time code output and the computer controlling system using MMC MIDI machine control In this system the VF160 will be the master and the computer with sequence software will be the slave The VF160 will attach any desired
104. 59 fostex F GO Me BPM delay effect parameters parameter type BPM DELAY For effect types 31 and 32 of the preceding Effect type table the following four parameters can be adjusted 1 Eff Level Adjust the effect return level 0 99 2 BPM Adjust the BPM Range 30 250 bpm 3 Note Select the note value for the delay Range 24 16 8T 16 8 4T 8 4 2T 4 2 2 1 24 16th note sextuplets 16 16th notes 8T 8th note triplets 16 dotted sixteenth notes 8 8th notes 4T quarter note triplets 8 dotted eighth notes 4 quarter notes 2T half note triplets 4 dotted quarter notes 2 half notes The shown in the ninth character of the LCD indicates a dotted note The T shown in the ninth character of the LCD indicates a triplet 4 Feedback Adjust the number of delay repeats Range 0 99 100 steps in increments of 1 5 Filter Adjust the tone of the delay sound Range L9 L1 OFF H1 H9 L1 L9 LPF larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency H1 H9 HPF larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency Tips To reflect the tempo map setting to parameters The BPM parameter value set by effect types 31 and 32 can be set in a range between 30 and 250 You can reflect the tempo value set by Setting the tempo map in the SETUP mode to this BPM parameter Therefore you do not have to use the scene memory for changing the BPM value and you can set the BPM value to follow the tempo map duri
105. 5M 00S OOF OOSF respec tively and audio immediately starts from ABS 0 00M OOS OOF OOSF And you are now going to create a 3 second silent space at the beginning of the program e First enter the AUTO PUNCH IN point which is the destination for the paste operation 1 Atthe beginning of the program ABS 0 press the HOLD gt key The current time is held and S on the display flashes showing that you can now edit the second field Flashing 2 While S flashes enter 03 using JOG dial and press the STORE key Hit Any Memory Key appears on the display To edit another field than second use the HOLD gt key or REWIND F FWD keys to flash the ap propriate point 3 Press the AUTO PUNCH IN key Now the AUTO PUNCH IN key holds 00M 03S 00F 00SF as the auto punch in point and the display returns to the Normal display 83 e Then carry out the move amp paste operation 4 After pressing the EDIT key use the JOG dial to display Move Clip Select Track appears together with Move Clip AES 5 Mowe Clir Select Track 5 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL keys of channels 1 and 2 These CH STATUS CH SEL keys that start flashing in red showing that tracks 1 and 2 are selected to be moved 6 Press the ENTER YES key The move operation is immediately completed and Move Paste appears on
106. 60 MTH lights up on the Normal Display Set the master fader to 0 Check adat signal and adjust monitor 1 Press the RECORD key All tracks go to the input monitor status If signals are input from the VC 8 or VM88 in this state the input level appears on the level meters 1 8 To monitor the adat signals turn the ch1 ch8 channel fader upto 0 and then turn up the MON OUT knob or PHONES knob There is no need to adjust the REC level on the VF160 The channel fader procedures only adjust the monitor sound Setting the analog input signal setting 1 Set the channel fader of ch9 ch16 to 0 2 Adjust the input level with the TRIM for which each sound source is input Fine tune the input with the channel fader if necessary The monitor sound can also be heard at this time Starting to record 1 To start recording press the PLAY key while the RECORD key is depressed When recording starts the adat digital signals from VC 8 or VM88 are input along with the signal input of the analog sound source This allows recording of 8 analog signals 8 channels and 8 adat digital signals 8 channels for recording on 16 tracks at the same time MIDI Clock Sync System By setting any desired meter at any desired point of the programmable tempo map contained in the VF160 and by output of a MIDI clock and song position pointer according to the setting a hardware type MIDI sequencer can be synchronized asa MIDI
107. 8588 008 100 356891 Digital Multitracker Operation Manual Fostex VF I amp O RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL WARNING CAUTION TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT FULLY INSERT ATTENTION POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU AU FOND The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of L uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK accompanying the appliance DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE S A F ETY N ST R U CTI O N S 9 Heat The appliance should be situated away from heat sources 1 Read Instructions All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated 2 Retain Instructions The saf
108. AIN MID FREQ MID Q LO GAIN EQ AIBIOFF AUX 1 BUSS COMP PARAMETERS Ratio THRESHOLD j atack GAIN L comp ON OFF ST BAL ps ST MASTER AUX 1 2 MASTER A To METER STOUT tod MON GAIN MON OUT 10d8V PHONES GAIN Lo PHONES AUX 2 BUSS g AUX 1 2 OUT 10dBV DATA OUT S P DIF ADAT 151 T Declaration of EC Directive This equipment is compatible with the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Directive on approximation of member nation s ordinance concerning the electromagnetic compatibility and with the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Directive on approximation of member nation s ordinance concerning electric equipment designed to be used within the specified voltage range The Affect of Immunity on This Equipment The affect of the European Specification EN50082 1 coexistence of electromagnetic waves common immunity specification on this equipment are as shown below In the electrical fast transient ourst requirements surge conducted disturbances by radio frequency fields power frequency magnetic field radiate electromagnetic field requirements and static electricity discharging environment this could be affected by generation of noise in some cases FOSTEX DISTRIBUTORS LIST IN EUROPE Including non EU countries underlined contracted distr
109. AR 1BEAT OOCLK when the setup MTC MTC offset time should be output was setup by the MTC offset time setting and MTC offset mode setting In accordance to start time of the tune set by the sequence software setup as explained below Offset mode For ABS Set the MTC offset time about three seconds prior to the start time of the tune set by the sequence software Because the recorder cannot immediately chase lock after input of MTC in order to sync the unit from head of the tune set the preroll using the sequence software and playback from before the actual head of the tune to allow the recorder to enter into sync by the time it arrives at the head of the tune Offset mode For BAR BEAT The MTC offset time can be set to the same time as the start time of the tune set by the sequence software Because the ABS 0 position is set at the OOO2BAR 1BEAT OOCLK position in the unit as mentioned before the preceding time required for sync is already set The preceding time of two bar lengths could change in length depending on the first bar s signature setting and tempo setting mentioned before For example it will be longer if the tempo is slowed down Fostex F OoO Bee Confirming chase lock Noies 1 When the sequence software is played CHASE and MTC Normally when Setup of slave type is set to Vari the inthe display will be light and the chase lock will be completed
110. ARL Init MixB rntererererrtrtseseseedferteeresteteteteteneens HBE T beeen nE EEA EARE EA OEE AAT Can T COPTeeeeeeeee Terr eeie ee ft 123456178 FDIMIIYISIG JE LE a T oe oP eee Time Base BAR BEAT CLK 12345678 910h213 ISI6 dE LA 2 REMAIN Display of Current Time Base Z2 Icons of the program setup details appear at the REMAINtime and space available in mono track converted right side of the menu Refer to examples below units according to the current time base the following is the case in ABS 1 This indicates recording no Format type recording setup by the Rec Protect Name of hard disk REC menu The icon shown here is Level meter of tracks 1 to 16 indicating that it is presently set L R master level meter Off and thus recording is possible REH 135HO05q 4 762HE This is indicating the VF160 Master ile REC To sampling frequency Fixed to 44 1kHz FIREBALL 1c tASHMARMAEES a en ee E TE Thisindicates the drive setup by the IDE Drive Sel menu The icon here is CEEETEECELEECEELELEELLEE CELCELEELEELELEECELECCT z indicating that it is set to an E IDE POPP PU Oe annann hard disk 125456978 FDNIISIYISIE JE LA This indicates the MIDI sync output B L H signal setup by the Midi Sync Out 3 MTC Time Display Input Li menu The icon here is indicating MTC time input that it is presently set to CLK OOH OOM OOS OOF appears if there is no time input ar Program numb
111. ASE Selected time remaining Shows the time remaining and space available on the disk for recordings in terms of mono track c MTC Time Input Shows the MTC time input in the MIDI IN jack This is a convenience for operations as a slave device The user can switch between time bases as shown below by pressing the DISP SEL TIME BASE key while the SHIFT key is depressed a ABS Absolute Time Indication An absolute time base from 00H 00M OOS ABS 0 to 24H 00M OOS b BAR BEAT CLK Bar The Bar Beat Clock of the beat and tempo set with the internal tempo map c MTC MIDI Time Code Display of the MTC time setting 30 PGM SEL Key This is used to switch between programs 01 to 99 This is also used to create new programs 31 SETUP Key This is used to go into the setup mode to set various parameters of the recorder and mixer fostex F l OO eee AUTO RTN START MARK1 Key This key is used to CHECK CHANGE the parameters saved at the start point AUTO RETURN START POINT when executing auto return or auto repeat Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to CHECK CHANGE the parameters saved in MARK1 This can be used as Locate Memory 33 AUTO PUNCH IN MARK2 Key This key is used to CHECK CHANGE the parameters saved at the recording start point PUNCH IN POINT when executing auto punch in out paste or erase Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to CHECK
112. AV file the VF160 can load must have a file name WAV The first 6 characters are the title that is shown in the Title Edit screen in the SETUP mode These characters can be changed when saving using a WAV file or edited by a computer The following 2 characters indicate the track number 1 to 24 for the save load using a WAV file The last WAV is the file extension indicating that the file format is WAV The VF160 does not recognize other file names than above See the following description for each operation about details By using the specifications above you can load only the desired tracks of a WAV file or load a track swapped WAV file See Loading a WAV file described later for details 108 es VIO FOSE Saving a WAV file You can save a WAV file Make sure that the DOS formatted disk with FAT16 is set The following procedure assumes that the newly formatted clean disk is used for backup 1 Press the SETUP key to enter the Setup mode The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup menu 2 Use the JOG dial to select Save PGM and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the device to which the data is saved IDE flashes Save Device Se SCSI OFT i REM Hit YES or HO Key 3 Press the REWIND key to select SCSI and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the backupmode FDMS 3 or WAV wher
113. B Init Mix 42 12345678 1011213141515 dE LA 4 Check the result by playing back the mixed down program PO9 in the example above The playback levels of mix down tracks can be adjusted using faders for channels 1 and 2 If you make an audio CD of the mixed material read Hint on the next page in advance lt Note You cannot undo internal mixdown recording gt If you are not satisfied with the result try again from the beginning You cannot undo internal mixdown recording If you do not need the previously recorded program delete the program by using Delete menu in the Setup mode Fostex V F OoO Eee lt Hint gt When internal mixdown is completed the starting and editing times of the mixdown are registered as CLIP BOARD IN point and CLIPBOARD OUT point respectively see the illustrations below This is because when making an audio CD from the mixed down material data between CLIPBOARD IN point and CLIPBOARD OUT point is automatically recorded Regardless of the starting point of mixdown only the data between CLIPBOARD IN point and CLIPBOARD OUT point is recorded when making an audio CD In other words you cannot make an audio CD without setting these two points CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point When internal mixdown starts from ABS 0 and ends at 85 ABS 05M 00S 00F si Es ARS OOM 005 09 mixed down song data CLIPBOARD IN p
114. BAR For example you can specify 4 4 for the first and second measures and 2 2 from the third measure Setting a time signature and tempo will create a Tempo Map which allows the VF160 to manage a song using the BAR BEAT CLK Time Base You can also use the Metronome function A time signature and tempo setting are required when MIDI clock amp song position pointer are output to an external sequencer Pa OOlbar 4 4 beat QOL 999 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 1 8 3 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 DEL 64 Initial Setting Available bars Available time signature Maximum setting points The setting is applicable song by song The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data The setting is memorized even when the power is off Make sure you choose the right program before setting this mode A Select a program for which to set a time signature Inthe menu selecting display select Signature Set and press the ENTER YES key The display will change to confirming the currently set signature In the initial setting the display will be as shown below to indicate that the bar offset is OO2BAR signature from the first bar is set to 4 4 and nothing is set after the first bar If the JOG dial is rotated items displayed can be alternately selected 002BAR Offset to setup the bar offset figure Insert New Event to setup
115. EKEIKD A WAV where shows the file name specified in step 8 above and each number 01 24 shows the corresponding track number If a track has no data recorded the corresponding file with no data is created HEHEHE 01 WAV HHHHHE 02 WAV HEHE 24 WAV WAV file structure which is saved over more than one disk A WAV file is saved in order of track number from track 1 to 24 During the save operation over more than one backup disk the VF160 always calculates the available space of the disk automatically If the VF160 knows that the available space gets smaller than the data size of the next track it will change the disk when the data save of the current track is completed WAV file size When saving data by the WAV file format to a backup disk the file size may sometimes increase compared with the data size in the current drive depending on the recorded data condition such as the start time end time the data amount etc on each track For example if a track is recorded from ABS 0 min to ABS 1 min and ABS 10 min to ABS 11 min the file on the current drive has a length of 2 minutes while the WAV file has a length of 11 minutes Also as mentioned above if a track has no data recorded the corresponding WAV file with no data is created though the size is small 111 lt Notes gt e If the file name you are going to save duplicates with the existin
116. ETUP mode 1 Use the JOG dial to select the Click menu then press the ENTER YES key The currently set item On or Off flashes The default setting is set to Off Use the JOG dial to select On flashing then press the ENTER YES key The metronome function is now turned On When the setting has been completed press the EXIT NO key twice to escape from the SETUP mode Set the time base to the BAR BEAT 1 Press the DISP SEL key while the SHIFT key is depressed to switch the time base display to the BAR BEAT display It is possible to check the bar beat set in the tempo map by switching to the BAR BEAT display Checking metronome sound 1 Press the PLAY key to play the VF160 The metronome sound level appears on the level meter of ch16 At this time turn up the master fader and fader of ch16 to 0 then use the PHONES knob or MON OUT knob to turn up the volume to monitor the metronome sound It is possible to output the metronome sound from ch16 as described above It is also possible to use the metronome sound as a guide to record to ch1 15 AAM lt Note gt ELECT INPUT PLAT The metronome sound clicking ry A Ay ot ra fin a Fin sound cannot be heard unless TRE TRH TRE TRE TRE TRE TRE ch16 is set to TRK Track goood da 43 Press the INPUT SEL key to see that TRH TRE TRE TRE TRH TRE TR ch16 is set to TRK as shown in t
117. F160 can be utilized To use this function the head of the measure data in the clip data must be registered in the ALIGN SEL key as shown in Figure 3 lt Actual sound point gt CLIPBOARD IN CLIPBOARD OUT POINT i ALIGN SEL POINT lt Head of the measure gt v lt Actual sound point gt lt Figure 3 gt CLIPBOARD IN data as a result of copy clip or move clip will be directly registered in the ALIGN SEL key Next recall the ALIGN SEL key data press the ALIGN SEL key and after correcting this data to head point of the measure press the STORE key and then the ALIGN SEL key After this by executing copy amp paste or move amp paste the aligned heads of the measures together with data in front of the measures can be pasted lt Note gt The range in correction of the ALIGN SEL data must be strictly limited between CLIPBOARD IN OUT E re IoO Fostex Erase The VF160 provides the following ERASE options Please read the instructions in its entirety prior to actual operations to prevent any erroneous understanding of the description First start the desired program if there are several programs set DO NOT change a program in the middle of the erase procedure Erasing a selected section between ABS REC END A selected section between ABS 0 beginning of disk and RECEND REC end point is erased of the program currently started up Both mono tracks and multiple tracks inc
118. F160 recognizes remains the same before and after erasing data AUTO PUNCH OUT point REC END AUTO PUNCH IN point Any real track ABS 0 REC END Jerse Any real track Silence Silence ABS 0 REC END On the other hand if data is erased from tracks 3 to 7 as shown in the figure below the RECEND point after erasing data will be positioned at the REC END point of tracks 1 and 2 In other words the REC END point prior to erasing data moves after the data is erased AUTO PUNCH IN point AUTO PUNCH OUT point Any real track ABS 0 REC END Jerse Silence Silence Silence Silence Silence Any real track ABS 0 REC END Erasing Data 1 Set the starting point and ending point of the section to erase Set the starting point to erase to the AUTO PUNCH IN key and the ending point to erase to the AUTO PUNCH OUT key For more details on setting data to the memory key refer to page 34 2 Press the EDIT key inthe STOP state Then select Erase Erase Select Track biceectencestustecsaeace A 4 d 3 Usethe CH STATUS CH SEL key to selectthe track to erase Mono tracks or multiple tracks including all real tracks can be selected to ERASE The CH STATUS CH SEL key of the track selected flashes 75 Press the ENTER YES key Sure flashes Press the ENTER YES key once again The erase process will ta
119. G dial and then press the ENTER YES key DiskFull Save POM SCSI j BEG tence Select 18k UP OOWN JOG Sure Hit YES or HO Key If you are going to save data to a disk that is used as the current drive by another digital recorder After executing steps 1 through 4 described above Wrong Disk is shown and then the screen for prompting to format the disk shown above appears you may format the disk by pressing the ENTER YES key while holding down the RECORD key or cancel the save operation by selecting Eject and then pressing the ENTER YES key Rs VY ISO FOSE a e In the saving operation using more than one disk if Loading from a single SCSI disk you use a disk in which save data is already recorded You can load data using the Load PGM menu in the When carrying out step 6 above an existing SETUP mode The following procedure shows how to program number is shown In this condition by using the JOG dial you can select Eject as well as existing programs load song data saved to a single SCSI disk See the next section for loading data saved to more than one To eject the disk select Eject and press the ENTER SCSI disk YES key S lt Details about Load PGM menu gt If you save data to the disk select any existing Input signal options program and press the ENTER YES key OPT adat or S PDIF SCSI or IDE CD 1A The display shows Delete A
120. IDE or SCSI IDE indicates the 3 5 inch E IDE hard disk and SCSI You can set the value for each Program individually the backup SCSI drive The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP oo mode 1 Select Drive Sel in the menu selecting display and press the x ENTER YES key When the drive is changed the program number in the The present setting will flashes IDE will be flashed in normal display will shown as indicated below the initial setting When the current drive is E IDE program display P a HES AMEE i Drive Select me p 0001 l Flashing SCSI SOG Init MixG hi N bd REW Back Ee When the current drive is SCSI program display B Hit YES or HO Key RSs FE p p01 0001 2 Press the REWIND key F FWD key select IDE or SCSI S g Ini t Mix cated and press the ENTER YES key 0 Cnn J 137 fostex VF CO Meee Fader Fix Mode Setting Fader Fix Whether the fader manipulation should be reflected on the sound volume or not can be set The setup content will be held even if the main power is switched off lt Caution gt The Fader Fix Mode can be made to function when set in other CH MST or CH amp MST than Off of the next item on the Fader Recall Mode e Initial setting Off e Options On or Off You can set the val
121. IM 7 15 G and 8 16 H gain to an optimal level RECORD 1 Locate the time to start recording 2 Press the PLAY key while the RECORD key is depressed to start recording The CH STATUS CH SEL key and RECORD key of ch15 and 16lights up RED to indicate that the channels are recording By increasing the fader level of track 1 the user can record to tracks 15 and 16 overdubbing while listening to the playback sounds of track 1 3 Press the STOP key to stop recording Fostex F CO Be Tips Changing the recording mode PLAY To change the DIRECT recording mode to the BUSS re 1 Locate the time to playback cording mode press the BUSS REC TRK key while the tracks to be directly recorded are selected using the 2 Press the PLAY key to start playback step above Rec Mode Change appears and Sure Chl ch15 and ch16 faders can be used to adjust the play flashes on the screen level of each track After recording put the READY trackin the SAFE mode as described earlier Tips MUTE Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key in the Normal Display to MUTE silence that channel CH STATUS CH SEL 4a ae 12345698 JI0I23NISIE dE LR key Light OFF Pressing the ENTER YES key cancels the selection of tracks for the DIRECT recording and changes the dis play to the track selection screen for the BUSS record ing Tips UNDO REDO Press the UNDO REDO key after recording to return to th
122. ING EQ PAN EFFECT Track 12 Track 16 lt Please read this first before executing mixdown gt After executing mixdown a new program on which a mixed down material is saved is automatically created on the current drive The program number of this program is set to one greater than the current greatest program number For example if there are 8 programs PO1 through 08 on the current drive by mixing down a desired program data a new program P09 is automatically created and the mixed down stereo signals are re corded on tracks 1 and 2 of P09 Note that if the unit is under either of the following conditions you cannot carry out internal mixdown 1 There are 99 programs already existed on the current drive even though there is enough recording space If you try to carry out internal mixdown Can t New PGM is shown and the operation is ignored To carry out mixdown delete an unnecessary program There is not enough recording space even though there are less than 99 programs on the current drive If you try to carry out internal mixdown Over time is shown and the operation is ignored To carry out mixdown erase unnecessary song data or delete an unnecessary program 79 Fostex VF OO Meee Activating the internal mixdown mode 1 Select the program to be mixed down
123. LI SCSI Title Edit WAL Ekk kkk FEW FFWD WP DOWH JOG Hit YES or WO Key By rotating the JOG dial you can enter the desired numeric symbolic or alphabetical character in the flashing digit You can move the flashing digit by using the REWIND and F FWD keys See the following table for the available characters Upper case alphabetical characters A to Z Numerals 0 to 9 Symbols amp _ lt Note gt You can use up to 6 characters for a file name Some characters entered are converted as shown below Upper case alphabetical characters A to Z not converted Lower case alphabetical characters a to z converted to the corresponding upper case Numerals 0 to 9 not converted Symbols amp _ not converted e Other symbols converted to _ After entering the file name press the ENTER YES key The save operation is executed and the display shows something like the one as below As the file save goes on the remaining data size shown on the screen counts down oe WAU SCSI Data Savina F gt gt WAL ao PB When saving data onto more than one disk the current disk number is shown on the screen as Disk where indicates the number Immediately after the data save to each disk is completed the disk is automatically ejected and Insert Disk flashes on the screen prompting you to insert
124. N of the VF160 The computer sequence software complying to MMC MTC must be activated Setup of external equipment 1 Sequence software is setup as follows Set for output of MTC Set frame rate of the MTC to be output Confirm start time of the tune Refer to Owners Manual of the respective equipment for details Setup of the VF160 1 Setto same frame rate as the sequence software by the SETUP mode MTC Frame rate setting Refer to page 131 SETUP mode MTC Frame rate setting for operating procedure and details Settothe desired mode by the SETUP mode MTC offset mode setting Refer to page 132 SETUP mode MTC offset mode setting for operating procedure and details Arandom offset time can be set by the SETUP mode MTC offset time setting Refer to page 131 SETUP mode MTC offset time setting for operating procedure and details Set slave mode to On by the SETUP mode Slave mode setting Refer to page 132 SETUP mode Slave mode setting for operating procedure and details 93 5 Setslave type to Vari by the SETUP mode Slave type setting Refer to page 133 SETUP mode Slave type setting for operating procedure and details Press the DISP SEL key while holding down the SHIFT key to change the time base display to MTC lt Precautions at MTC related setups gt The position ABS 0 or 001B
125. OQE 1 2 cccsccesceseeecetesesneeeeeesetensenseessetaees 79 e Activating the internal MixdOWN MOCE csssscecseeseceeseeseees 80 e Rehearsing internal Mixdown recording ssscsecceecseereeenes 81 e Performing internal mixdown mode e Inserting Silence atthe beginning of aSONG scceeseeseees 83 Applications of BUSS RECORD s 1cccccesssseseessessesstesenseeates 85 e Record by Mixing the Input Sound and Playsound 85 Ping Pong RECORD ssssssssecsssecscsssecsesecssseccseescscsecnsseeecseeeesees 86 Metronome FUNCTION 221 2 ccccccccceeseeeeecceneeeaeeeneteneseeeeneeesseeeeees 87 Digital ROCOlOING 3 5 sista costenciv aia Gini Gites tiie eit 88 e Digital Recording from an External Digital Device 88 Recording 16 Tracks atthe Same Time sccccccceseseseeeeees 89 MIDI Clock SYNC SYStOIN eecsssecsseteetetetetseetsenetseeesetseeetseeeteesees 90 MIDI Sync MIDI Machine Control SYStCIM cccececeteeeteteee 91 External MIDI equipment Sync System by the Slave Mode 93 Applications example of Adat Mixer MOC 1 ccccscccscssseesees 95 Chapter 6 Save Load of Song Data Saving data using the S PDIF or adat digital Signal 98 Loading data using the S PDIF or adat digital Signal 100 Saving Loading Data USING SCSI 2 csccscceceessesesseeeseeeseees 102 Save LOAd A WAV FilO 2cceccccccsscesessecetsesesssecessesessseessse
126. PAULO Player ueiaire i 69 AUC RETU o ni daar A aai 69 Set Store Start End Point eeseseeeeeesseeseessosseessesseesee 69 PAULO REPOCAL ciscedcststevcccdecccvsesssvesessbeederscsdsesveddevseesisveadessetes 69 POON ss 3k aed easea thas Sassy ves EEIE TEA 70 Creating a NEW PrOgraMm cessssscecsecessestcceceseeseeseceeeeeees 70 Selecting A PrOSraM cseesescssessesesecssesceseeceecseeeseeeeeeeees 71 Erasing a Programen nai ai a eais 71 e Editing a Program Title sesesesessssesesresesessssesesseresesesseses 71 Editing the TACK eeeccecsecrscreccneececeeneunruernersersennenseneeneanes 72 Copy amp Paste and Move amp Paste eeescesssesssecseeseesseeecees 73 Executing Copy or Move and CLIP eeesseeeeeeeeeee 73 PAStin Dat aistsccscessssceiskedeccaiesicecedecviscsssassiacseenscvaceiceioesedss 73 Undo Redo Paste esssssesssssssesssesseessseecteeeeseeeeseeeees 74 SETAS Enor E e A RAE seen tencasdlpbwencsuvescscesetUevcovseteccdecesens 75 Erasing Data mein a E 75 Undo Redo EL ASC iccissiccssstsssvonssaccossoevesceuswssatrsnesvesssacuaee 76 TACK EX CHANG Oise oa RE a A Executing Track ExChange ssssssssseseesseeeeseeeseseseeeeeees Exchange in 8 track unit Exchange in monoor 2 track unit Chapter 5 Features Application Applications of DIRECT RECORD 2 c csscsssssssesessetstnseees 78 e DIRECT RECORD while Listening to the Input signal 78 Internal MixXQOWN M
127. R BEAT CLK using the JOG dial Move the flashing column cursor by pressing the HOLD gt key 3 Press the STORE key RED Light ON 3 1 Press a voluntary Memory key The time modified is saved as the time point of the Memory Key and the system returns to the Normal Display 3 2 Press the MARK 1 7 key while the SHIFT key is depressed The time modified is saved as a Mark Memory of MARK 1 7 and the system returns to the Normal Display 35 Fostex F CO Be Locating an event memory You can store up to 99 event memory points 00 to 99 These event memory points can be used for locate functions described below as well as for the scene event map function described in Chapter 3 Mixer functions Creating an event memory lt Hint gt Event memory numbers are assigned in ascending order of ABS time regardless of order in which event memories are created For example if you create event memories in order as shown in the upper diagram below the event memory numbers are assigned as shown in the lower diagram 2 3 6 7 1 5 4 ABSO 02M30S 05M00S 07M30S 12M30S 12M30S 15M00S 17M30S EVT03 EVT 04 EVT 01 EVT05 EVTO6 EVT07 ABSO 02M30S 05M00S 07M30S 12M30S 12M30S 15M00S 17M30S EVT 02 At the desired position while the VF160 is stopped or during playback press the HOLD s key The time when pressing the HOLD gt key is held o
128. RW drive 2 Press the SETUP key to enter the Setup mode 3 Use the JOG dial to select highlight the Load PGM menu and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the device from which the data is loaded IDE flashes SETUP R21 Select E i i oaa Reserved Fader F L OFT scsr Flashing REM Hit YES or HO Kew 4 Press the REWIND key F FWD key to select IDE or SCSI and press the ENTER YES key Select SCSI if a SCSI type CD RW drive is used Select IDE if the optional CD RW drive is used By pressing the ENTER YES key the display shows the CD RW drive name and then changes to the load mode select screen where Bkup Backup flashes To loading a song from an audio CD select CD DA 123 SCSI or IDE is shown according to the drive used Ee 2 Select CO DA Flashing r REL FFLID Hit YES or HO Key 5 Use the JOG dial to select highlight CD DA then press the ENTER YES key A warning message for copyright appears You can scrolls the message to read all message by rotating the JOG dial Load PGM SCSI Mode Select BUF FEL FFLID Hit YES or HO Key R21 SETUP Vou are resronsib e for use of this diszital device Be sure to abide by the coryrisht lt Warning message gt The warning message for copyright shown on the scr
129. S seconds The default setting of the MTC offset is set to OOH 59M 57S OOF OOSF This time base can be changed to any 24 hour clock FHI FH i SHG SERRE REEE 12345618 FIO aIMISI6 JE LA It is also possible to change the setting to Bar 001 and Beat 1 of BAR BEAT CLK instead of using the ABS 0 location point The following illustrates the relationship between the 3 time bases ABS 0 00M 00S 00M 03S 00M 06S ABS 002BAR 14 O01BAR 14 002BAR 14 BAR 4 CLK 00H 59M 57S 01H 00M 00S 01H 00M 03S MTC ss VF ISO Fostex Names and Functions gt OTOA OAOA OA et 1 All keys on the panel will be indicated with a around the name in this manual Example PLAY key INPUT terminal etc 2 All keys that require the SHIFT key to be depressed to take effect will be underlined Example EFF EDIT EFF1 MUTE key etc 3 Channel is represented as ch and track as trk according to the contents Example ch1 fader trk16 etc 15 Fostex F i amp O Top Panel Analog Input Output Section MIC LINE 7 INPUT Unbalanced Jack A to F This adjusts the unbalanced output of the external sound source Standard Input Level 5O0dBV to 2dBV Connector Phones jack INPUT BAL Balanced Jack G H Connect to the balanced output of the external sound source Standard Input Level 50dBV
130. S CH SEL keys for these channels applies the compressors to both channels simultaneously See page 138 for details about how to pair faders of ad jacent two channels 3 Press the HI G F Q key to select the desired parameter and enter the desired value using the JOG dial Each time you press the HI G F Q key while holding down the SHIFT key the parameters to be edited are cycled between THSHD threshold level RATIO ATTACK attack time GAIN and ON OFF compressor on off For each parameter rotating the JOG dial can set the following values Channels to be selected Channels 13 14 15 16 and the master channel Available values Threshold level 0 0 dB to 50 0 dB in 0 5 dBincrements The default setting 13 14 15 16 gt 20dB master gt 25dB 1 20 1 10 1 8 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 5 1 3h 29715 21 Ll LeS T 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 The default settings 13 14 15 16 gt 10 1 master gt 4 1 Attack time 5 ms to 75 ms in 1 ms increments The default settings 13 14 15 16 gt 60ms master gt 8ms 0 0 dB to 18 0 dB in 0 5 dB incre ments The default settings 13 14 15 16 master gt 0 0 dB Compressor on off On Off The default is Off ees VE IGo FOSE 4 After completing the parameter setting press the EXIT NO key The VF160 exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display lt Hints gt If you try to select a cha
131. S O or 001BAR 1BEAT OOCLK should the setup MTC MTC offset time is to be output is set When setting the start time of the tune in the sequence software by these setups be careful of the following points Offset mode For ABS If playback is started from ABS 0 since MTC will be output starting from the MTC offset time that has been set the start time of the tune set by the sequence software must be set about 3 seconds later from the MTC offset time that was setup This will provide time because the sequence software cannot sync immediately after MTC is output For example if the initial setting of 00h 59m 57s OOf OOsf is used set the start time of the tune to 01h 00m 00s OOf If playback is thus started from ABS 0 LOCATE ABS 0 sync will be obtained by the time it reaches the first bar and therefore it can be made to sync from the head of the tune Offset mode For BAR As mentioned before because the ABS 0 position is set at the OO2BAR 1BEAT OOCLK position the setup MTC offset time can be set to the head of the tune without taking into account the time until reaching sync as mentioned above The length of the time two bars beforehand will change in accordance to the first bar setting for signature and tempo For example it will be long if the tempo is set slow This mode can be effectively applied when using the MIDI clock and MTC in parallel and when using MTC for the sync signal while
132. The display shows the screen for selecting a program to be saved The program number currently selected flashes while the data size of the program is shown lt Hint gt If you select the backup mode to WAV and press the ENTER YES key while a disk formatted by the FDMS 3 is set the display shows Warning Illegal Disk and the disk is ejected 103 VF IG O Fostex 5 Use the JOG dial to select a program to be saved Depending on a program selected the display shows as below When selecting a vacant program no data is recorded OMB is shown Save POM SCSI Source POM Select Flashing Asko amp MBe UF DOWH JOG Hit YES or HO Key e When selecting a program that can be saved to a single backup disk The example below shows 68 MB This means the data size of the data is 68 MB and the data can be saved to a single disk reas Pan SCSI Z ce PGM Select dk UF DOWH JOG Hit YES or HO Key When selecting a program that needs more than one backup disk for saving The example below shows 2 Disks 130 MB This means the data size of the data is 130 MB and you need two disks to save the data Save POM SCSI Source POM Select Flashing Ekk wee 13h DOW TOG Hit YES or NO Key Flashing After selecting the program press the ENTER YES key The display shows the difference screens de
133. UT A PRE 1 INPUTG estan AB 48V ra o TRIM REC SOURCE SEL PHANTOM SETUP INSERT 10dBV EFF SEND 1 ASP EFFECT o i os aes PROCESSOR ms INPUT H 4 50dBV TRIM REC BUSS REC ASSIGN MODE suss move REC BUSS L DIRECT MODE From AD MST TT On gti RE p NPUTADIR y e o From AD o_TRK2 REC s MPUTBDR PR From AD qT S O IRK 3 REC INPUT C DIR o o From AD TRK 4 REC INPUT D DIR O From AD T Own gL IRS REC INPUTE DIR o o From AD o PKeREC NEU DIR p 7 From AD TT ON LTR TREC INPUT G DIR z D o Erom AD TRK8REC INPUT H DIR o t o o_TRKS REC o o o PK REC o H o o TRKI REG o 9 TRK 12 REC o o TT 7 TRK 13 REC o o a o_TRK 14 REC o TK 15 REC o O TRK 16 REC o Lg DATA IN SP OIF or nal ADAT FOOT SW 7 PUNCH VO TRK1 REP TRK2 REP TRK3 REP sTBUSS ST MASTER MON To DATA OUT To ST MASTER To REC BUSS MASTER iA EFF SEND To EFF1 EFF SEND2 To EFF2 Woyy To AUX1 2 MASTER TRKA REP TRKS REP TAKS REP TRKI REP TAKS REP TAK9 REP 16TRK TRK10 REP HDR TRH REP aKa REP w METER Trig REP TRKA REP TRK15 REP TRK16 REP ST OUT From ST EQ PARAMETERS nicam HI FREQ Hia MID G
134. VF160 will be constantly controlled by vari pitch and Check that the MTC output by the sequence software and follow the MTC which is the master MTC time displayed in the VF160 are the same However if the digital input is set to SPDIF or adat via the SETUP mode Setup of digital input it will be in 2 When the sequence software stops MTC will be interrupted Word clock external sync operation by the digital and the VF160 will also stop signal S P DIF or adat that is input CHASE in the display will change from lit to blinking Therefore it must be noted that when Setup of digital input is executed even though Setup of slave type is set to Vari it will not follow by application of vari pitch and upon completion of lock it will change to external sync operation by the digital input signal 3 During FF REW of the sequence software the VF160 will remain stopped but upon starting to record the VF160 will immediately chase lock Should it not be possible to chase lock re check connections cables and all settings lt One Point Advice gt Sync signal Vari of the Slave mode setting menu When the VF160 is made to chase lock by MTC only variable pitch will be constantly applied by external MTC If a digital signal is output to an external digital equipment from the VF160 it will not be able to follow the speed difference MTC speed difference of the master of the VF160 a
135. WIND key F FWD key to select IDE or SCSI and press the ENTER YES key Select SCSI if a SCSI type CD RW drive is used Select IDE if the optional CD RW drive is used Press the ENTER YES key to display the CD RW drive name and then changes to the load mode select screen where Bkup Backup flashes To load saved data select BkUp To load data from an audio CD select CD DA Let s select Bkup here and go on to the following procedure See loading from an audio CD described later for details about how to use audio CD CD DA discs SCSI or IDE is shown according to the drive used SETUP R21 Flashing CO 04 FEL FFD Hit YES or HO Kes 5 While BkUp is flashing press the ENTER YES key The display shows the backup number and title as well as recorded space Load PEM SCSI f ce PGM Select Flashing SEEK ME kk UP DOWH JOG Hit YES or HO Key By rotating the JOG dial you can select a desired pro gram number title from among available programs in the VF160 current drive You can also select Eject If you select Eject and press the ENTER YES key the disc is ejected Rs VY ISO FOSE When you load song data which is saved to more than one disc the display also shows the disc num ber currently set The example below shows DISC 1 is set Load Pol SCSI 6 While the desired backup number title is shown on the display press
136. YES key 3 Select the desired digital in and press the ENTER YES The items currently set will be shown in reversed white key and black In the initial state Analog will be reversed in white and black TA In E ai poz adat a7 JOG Hit YES or HO Key The selected digital in will be setup If you set the digital input to SPDIF and press the ENTER YES key you will see a copyright warning you can read the entire message by rotating the JOG dial If you accept press the ENTER YES key again i Harnina i 2 Select the desired digital in with the JOG dial Yoy are resrons ib Depending on the item selected the following will be l ror 15 of this shown in the LCD Be 1 Ee O E ba the corariasht AT SELECTION OF SPDIF E Irn a Lai RZ 4 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode ada p JOG REW FFWD Hit YES or NO Key When in the initial setup and selecting SPDIF simultaneous with indicating that L of the S P DIF digital signal is assigned to track 1 and that R to track 2 lt REW F FWD gt will also be shown This is indicating that any track can be selected for assigning to L R If the REWIND key or F FWD key is pressed the blinking L or R will move If the JOG dial is rotated numbers 1 through 16 can be input at the blinking point When selecting SPDIF
137. YES key again deletes all the WAV file on the disk and advances to the next step for editing the file name After completing the save operation only this new WAV file will remain on the disk Hit YES or HO Key Showing the title and MB SETUP R22 Saye WAL SCSI ztn JAU Select DERE J UP DOW JOG Hit YES or HO Key To get enough space for creating a WAV file the specified file on the backup disk will be deleted By pressing the ENTER YES key DEL appears Pressing the ENTER YES key again will delete the specified WAV file on the disk and advances to the next step for editing the file name After completing the save operation the specified WAV file will be replaced with the new WAV file on the disk eShowing the title and MB Even if the specified file is deleted the space for creating a new WAV file on the disk is MB short Pressing the ENTER YES key shows Disk Full followed by Delete All WAV Pressing the ENTER YES key again deletes all the WAV file on the disk and advances to the next step for editing the file name After completing the save operation only the new WAV file will remain on the disk Save WAJ SCSI stm WAW Select Ek UP DOWN JOG Sure Hit YES or HO Key 8 After selecting a file press the ENTER YES key 110 The display shows the screen for editing the WAV file SETUP R22 Save WA
138. a s o nmam D D t Sew Sanat ant Sonn ad L TAK TRH TRA TRH TRA TRR TRH TRE g IO Ii iZ 13 14 15 IB R m fan Gn G a Ga Gaa Ga G a Level does not increase even though the channel TEE TRE TRH TRE TRE TRE TRE TRE fader is raised i J Recording level will not increase although the READY track channel fader is raised to maximum 6 e Sound adjusted by EQ cannot be recorded by DIRECT re cording g la gt Adjust TRIM knob to a suitable level When DIRECT recording EQ cannot be applied The level cannot be raised for small input signals if the Application of EQat recording is permissible only at BUSS TRIM knob is positioned at LINE full CCW recording Although EQ can be applied to the input sig Rotate the TRIM knob to just before the sound distorts nal at DIRECT recording this is strictly listening to the monitor sound only and the original sound will be re corded without alteration However when BUSS recording EQ can be applied to each input signal and recorded XM a E e Effect sound cannot be recorded at BUSS recording e The monitor sound is not heard even though the input level stereo buss L R levels are being indicated by the meter a x Select source channel for the effect When BUSS recording in order to record while apply ing effect to the source channel effect 1 or effect 2 must be selected together with selecting the source channel as shown in the schematic below In the ex
139. aded to program 06 see the screen example below ata Bet Ha saj Bi Pes z 38 AS Be However if you select track 2 after selecting tracks 1 and 3 the unit automatically reassigns track 2 to pro gram 06 and track 3 to program 07 see the screen example below Total 4G 09 oe 9 After specifying track s to be loaded press the ENTER YES key while holding down the RECORD key The VF160 starts loading tracks to the current drive The following screen example shows that track 1 is now being loaded to program 08 on the current drive a a Data Loading Bai gt gt PHS ak HE 1 When the loading ends Load Completed appears on the screen while the disc is automatically ejected from the CD RW drive 10 Press the EXIT NO key to quit the Setup mode The display returns to the Normal display that was shown last time before entering the Setup mode E VIO Fostex Chapter 7 SETUP mode The SETUP mode of the VF160 offers the Changing the initial settings menus which configure the operating environment of the VF160 a Check menu that enables you to check the number of events for each track and an Execution menu that executes certain operations such as save and load and disk formatting The Changing the initial settings menu include 21 parameters as shown in lt Table 1 gt below These parameters were set before the VF160 was shipped from the factory
140. ails csssssessscssssesessecssessseesseeeeees Scene MOM OLY 2sscccsececceceeesecsnseceteesstecsasensatensatereasnees 61 Storing to a Scene Memory seeesessesesesreresesreseseerereseseeseree Recalling a Scene MEMOLY ssecesessssesesecesesseseseeeeeeenees LEVELAGJUS Erns annsin anin Fader ACjUSt ccscsceseeseeseeseseeees e Direct Recall of a Scene Memory Clearing a Scene MEMOTY ceeeesseesccscesceeseeseceeeeeseeescees Scene EVEN MAN sececcccececcccesecnscecnseecssenesseecasencateeessenees Creating an Event Memory essssssssesssesessssesesesssessesesesese e Creating the Scene Event Map sscsssssesesesescseceessseeeeeees Deleting an Event MeMOLY cccsesseseessecesesesseeseeeeeeeeees e Scene Sequence Mode On Off Selection e Executing the Scene SEQUENCE eessseteseteteeeeceeeseeeseeeees es Rico Fostex Chapter 4 Recorder Functions Cueing Digital SCrUDDING 1 cccccccecceccesseeetestetseteeeeeeees e Cueing with the FFWD REWIND keY sceccsesseeeees a ShuttleC eiht r enait Aa iA aieas 67 e Digital Scrubbing with the SCRUB key sesecsseseeeeees 67 Variable Pitch COntr0l ccscscccsescsscssessessseseessssssesseeees 68 e Variable Pitch Control ON OFF ccsssssessssseesseseseseeeeeees 68 e Setting the Speed sesecssssesssssscesssescsesorscenscsncssearscessaseces 68 Auto FUNCION weiet arena nate cesta doa ere teste es 69
141. alternately exchanged in one track two track stereo pair or an 8 track block This is called track exchange This makes it possible to record solo parts on several tracks exchange the parts and compare the results The rhythm section recorded on multiple tracks can also be completely exchanged and remixed with this feature which is a convenience in numerous ways Note that tracks 17 24 cannot be recorded played or edited They must be exchanged with tracks 1 16 to execute these features One track exchange Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 17 Track 18 Track 19 Track 20 Track 21 Track 22 Track 23 Track 24 Track 14 Track 15 1 2 track block exchange 8 track block exchange 12 INPUT Monitoring and PLAYBACK Monitoring There are two ways to monitor the signal output track sound from each track with the VF160 recorder input monitoring and playback monitoring Playback monitoring means that the track output is the sound thatis played This feature is generally used to playback and listen to sounds that have already been recorded Playback monitoring is generally used to playback sound Input monitoring means the signals sounds to be recorded inputon that track are directly sent to the track output This feature is used to check the REC level of the sound to record Therefore tracks that are able to be input monitored are either in
142. am on the disk then only the data saved for that program is erased Note that an empty program 1 PO1 will remain on the disk even in such case Let s take the following case as an example As shown in the figure below there are five programs from PO1 toP05 Note that the program numbers always remain in sequential order Therefore when program number PO3 is erased there will only be a total of 4 programs This means though the data on PO3 is erased and the numbers are sequentially corrected no number is skipped Note that only the contents of PO3 are erased and the numbers are merely reassigned in sequential order according to the number of programs available Simply put P04 becomes P03 and PO5 becomes P04 when PO3 is erased as in this case P03 P05 Delete P03 P04 e Remember that it is not possible to UNDO REDO unerase or re erase the ERASE feature once a program is erased P01 Po2 P04 P01 P02 71 1 Press the SETUP key in the STOP state The system goes to the SETUP mode and proceeds to the SETUP menu selection display 2 Turnthe JOG dial to select the Delete menu then press the ENTER YES key The current program number appears and Sure flashes Title To cancel the ERASE procedure press the EXIT NO key while Sure is flashing See tena Fig Freeroll Time 8s MidisyrncOut CLE nas
143. amp Paste and Move amp Paste This section describes the Copy amp Paste or Move amp Paste details lt Precaution gt The data copied or moved on the clipboard is replaced with new data every time data is copied or moved Note that the data copied in the clipboard is replaced when pasting over the original data copied Executing Copy or Move and CLIP 1 Set the point to start COPY or MOVE and the point to start the PASTE feature Set the COPY or MOVE starting point to the CLIPBOARD IN key the ending point to the CLIPBOARD OUT key and the PASTE starting point to the AUTO PUNCH IN key For more details on how to set store to the memory key refer to page 34 2 Press the EDIT key to proceed to the Copy Clip or Move Clip message To execute the Copy amp Paste feature select Copy Clip Flashing Copa Clir T Ar Flashing owe Clip 3 Usethe CH STATUS CH SEL key to select the track to COPY or MOVE Both monotracks and multiple tracks including ALL tracks can be selected During the Copy amp Paste or Move amp Paste process it is only possible to change the paste destination track of mono tracks or when copying or moving with two tracks that are odd and even number tracks situated next to each other In any other case when copying or moving multiple tracks the data is pasted to the original copy site or move of the same track 4 Pre
144. ample below input H and effect 1 are selected for the source channel Raise the PHONES knob Se eons rs No sound will be heard if the headphones adjuster is turned down Also if monitoring with an external moni tor speaker raise the MON OUT knob Although the READY track is set to input monitor no sound is heard in the headphone although the meter is indicating the level MON OUT PHONES GG 142 es RIGO Fostex e Even though effect is selected for the sourc channel ef fect cannot be applied j Raise the effect send level Initially the effect send level of each channel will all be at o 7 Select the channel for applying effect and raise the ef fect send level with the JOG dial For details read page 52 e Ping pong recording cannot be executed Is the playback track for ping pong set to source channel Press the BUSS SOURCE key and set the track for ping pong to source channel Then press the BUSS REC TRK key and set the ping pong objective track in the READY mode In the example below tracks 1 4 and 9 12 are selected for the source channel and their signals sent for ping pong into tracks 15 and 16 SELECT SOURCE I zZz 3 4 5 E 1 HEH Ea nE a A SRE SRE SRE SRC 9 10 ii iZ 13 14 15 16 HFF mmm Em Em pm m pm SRC SRC SRE SRC 143 e Cannot record external digital signals
145. and Qfor HI and MID equalizers while only G gain for LO lt Note gt Ifchannels 13 14 or 15 16 are specified as the com pressor channels via Setting the compressor chan nels in the Setup mode you cannot apply the equal izer to those channels If you press a CHSTATUS CH SEL key of the compressor channel a warning mes sage Can t Select flashes and the operation is can celled In the screen example shown below the com pressor is applied to channels 13 14 Flashing f 1 Press the HI G F Q or MID G F Q or LO G key The first time you bring up the channel parameter edit screen the message prompting to select a channel Select CH flashes as well as all the CH STATUS CH SEL indica tors on the panel flash From the second time on the previously selected channel is selected and ready to be edited when bringing up the screen as shown in the drawing of step 2 below Flashing CH STATUS CH SEL indicators for the compressor channels do not flash 2 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the desired channel The current settings are shown together with the selected channel name The gain value flashes indicating that you can edit it Flashing Iftwo adjacent channels are fader paired pressing one of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for these channels se lects both channels and you can adjust EQ for both channels simultaneously
146. and these values are called the initial settings Modifying these settings allows you to change the operating environment of the VF160 The Check menu provides two parameters Checking the number of events as shown in lt Table 2 gt Checking the number of events and Checking the current drive information Also as shown in lt Table 3 gt the Execution menus include five items Title Edit Delete PGM Load PGM Save PGM and Disk Format which you can execute by selecting the corresponding SETUP menu This chapter explains how to use the Changing the initial settings menus shown in lt Table 1 gt and the Check menu shown in lt Table 2 gt For more information on the Execution menus refer to the corresponding pages in the Reference page column in lt Table 3 gt lt Table 1 gt Changing the initial settings menu Parameters Display Default setting Refer page Community Setting a time signature Signature Set 001BAR 4 4 126 Setting a tempo Tempo Set 001BAR 12120 128 O Setting the metronome function Click 4 Off 129 O Setting a preroll time Preroll Time 00s 130 O Setting MIDI sync output signal Midi Sync Out CLK 130 O Setting an MTC frame rate Frame Rate 25 frame 131 O Setting an MTC offset value Mtc Offset 00h 59m 57s OOf OOsf 131 O Setting the offset mode Offset Mode ABS 132 O Setting the slave mode Slave Mode Of
147. annel to be adjusted by pressing the correspond ing CH STATUS CH SEL key and move the corresponding physical fader In the screen example below the physical fader position of channel 1 matches the recalled fader position If two adjacent channels are fader paired pressing the CH STATUS CH SEL key for the odd channel selects both channels and youcan simultaneously control both chan nels The fader icon for the even channel as shown ina dotted line indicating that you do not have to adjust it The fader icons below are examples of indicating differ ent status The current physical fader position is higher than the recalled position E The current physical F F fader iti F E position matches the recalled i position The current physical fader position is lower than the recalled position 3 Repeat the previous step for each channel 4 After adjusting all the fader positions press the EXIT NO key The indicator of the FADER ADJUST key turns off lt Note gt The previous description for Fader adjust is assumed that Fader recall setting of the SETUP mode is set to CH amp MST However the default of Fader recall setting is Off In this setting the indicator of the FADER ADJUST key will not flash when recalling a scene memory because the fader positions are not recalled and the current fader positions remain effective Therefore if you wa
148. ations of BUSS RECORD BUSS RECORD makes it possible to record all the source channel signals sent to REC BUSS L R on either 2 tracks or 1 track The source channel is selectable with the INPUT channel and TRACK channel therefore it is possible to record the input signals along with signals that are already recorded Record by mixing the input sound and play sound Here we will mix the play sounds of tracks 1 4 with the signals input through INPUT A D to record on tracks 7 and 8 Sound sources INPUTA D Connecting the sound source 1 Connect the sound sources to record to INPUT A to D Preparations to record 1 Press the INPUT SEL key ORANGE Flashing The display to select INPUT TRACK appears Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch9 ch12 so it flashes ORANGE ch9 ch12 gt INPUT Press the BUSS SOURCE key GREEN Flashing The display to select the source channel appears Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch1 ch4 and the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch9 ch12 Ch1 4 and ch9 12 are set to the source channel Press the BUSS REC TRK key RED Flashing The display to select the REC track appears Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch7 and ch8 Ch7 and ch8 are set as the REC track The signals from ch1 4 and ch9 12 can not be recorded to tracks 7
149. ay slightly opens lens Pull out the tray to fully open it lt Caution gt Do not touch the lens when pulling out the tray doing so may damage it and may cause a malfunction e To close the tray push the tray inside by hand until locked y Push until it is locked Placing removing a disc The following are some notes on placing and or re moving a disc lt IMPORTANT gt When placing a disc on the tray support the tray from the bottom by your hand If you push the disc to fit into the pivot on the tray without supporting the tray the tray drive may be damaged or broken Also note that the disc must be pushed until it clicks so that it is locked into the pivot securely Closing the tray without locking the disc may damage the disc lt Note for removing a disc from the tray gt When removing a disc from the tray also support the tray from the bottom by your hand Also be careful not to unlock the disc from the pivot forcibly which may damage the tray 146 e Place the disc with the label side up When placing the disc support the tray from the bottom by your hand as shown in the illustration below and push the disc gently until it clicks so that the disc is locked into the pivot Push the disc until it clicks so that the disc is locked into the pivot disc Support the tray from the bottom by your hand lt Caution gt Do not touch the lens w
150. because S P DIF digital signals can be assigned to any two tracks within 1 through 16 simultaneous recording of S P DIF digital signal analog signal is possible by input of analog signals into the other tracks Refer to Chapter 5 Features Applications for details When a correct digital signal adat or S P DIF is input from the external digital equipment and then VF160 is locked to the input signal ADAT or SPDIF will be lit in the normal display as shown below If this display blinks it indicating that an incorrect digi tal signal is input to the VF160 In such a case check connections between any external equipment or the ex ternal equipment digital out setting At setting of SPDIF At setting of ADAT Poi 0001 S iiInit Mix sa tHe 12345678 9101112131516 d LR 12345678 110213 ISIE dB LR es VF ISO FOSTEX Setting Digital Output Digital Out In the Setup of digital output menu the type of digital signal to be output to external digital equipment from the VF160 DIGITAL DATA OUT connector can be setup By using this feature digital signals recorded in VF160 can be directly sent without conversion to external digital equipment MD DAT adat digital mixer 2 Select the desired digital out with the JOG dial lt Important gt Depending on the selected item LCD will be as follows When outputting digital signals to external digital equipmen
151. cal jack use the optional COP 1 96kHz optical coaxial converter e Do not connect digital signals for both directions between the VF160 and the external device i e the digital output of the VF160 to the digital input of the external device and the digital output of the external device to the digital input of the VF160 which may form a digital loop and cause feedback Setting the external device 1 Set the sampling frequency to 44 1 kHz the same as the VF160 2 Set the input source to digital input to accept the signal from the VF160 Some machine also needs to select the clock reference to external when setting the input source to digital input See the operation manual of the machine for the detailed information lt Note gt If you cannot hear the input signal or you hear digital noise when monitoring the source signal of the external digital device check the connections cables and settings of both the VF160 and the external device See the operation manual of the external device for the detailed information 98 lt Details about Save PGM menu gt Output signal options OPT adat or S PDIF SCSI or IDE CD 1A Program options PO1 to P99 an individual Program Track options When using S PDIF or adat Tracks 1 8 Tracks 1 16 Tracks 1 24 Tracks 9 16 Tracks 9 24 or Tracks 17 24 When using a SCSI disk All tracks 1 24 is selected automatically You can sel
152. ce station To prevent damage to the VF160 be sure to power on the connected devices first then turn on the power to the VF160 When you remove or connect the cables to the input output connectors on the VF160 make sure that the channel faders and volume controls are set to 0 Before turning the power off to the VF160 first quit setup mode and make sure that the recorder section is stopped Especially never attempt to turn off the power to the VF160 while the hard disk is accessing data the HD ACCESS LED is lit or flashing Otherwise not only will you lose recorded data but you may damage to the VF160 Fostex is not responsible for the data lost during operation of the VF160 Before you change the location of the VF160 pack the unit in the shipping carton or an impact resistant case Make sure that the VF160 is kept free from external vibration or impact since the VF160 is very sensitive to vibration Do not install the VF160 in locations subject to the following Extremely high or low temperature or significant changes in temperature Excessive humidity or dust Excessive changes in power supply voltage Unstable or significantly vibrating or shaking surfaces Near a strong magnetic field such as a TV or speaker If you move the unit from a place with an excessively low temperature to a warm place or if you use the VF160 in a room in which the temperature varies significantly during winter cond
153. cks The Track Exchange feature makes it possible to exchange these tracks with any unneeded tracks 1 16 3 Turn the JOG dial to select the track to exchange from Tips Aa Track Exchange can be done amongall 24 real By rotating the JOG dial you can select the track unit and additional tracks as shown in the figure be among 1 2and8 DENEN Depending on the selected unit the track indication on the low right changes see the figure below You can exchange track s in single stereo or 8 track units e Selection in 8 track unit One track exchange fa Track Track Were tl rac rac apii jams Track 2 i Track 10 an ponnani rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 4 A ences d Track 3 Track 11 gt Track4 Track 12 e Selection in 2 track stereo pair unit Track 5 Track 13 gt Track 6 P Track 14 Track 7 Track 15 Track 8 Track 16 8 track block exchange Instructions 4 Press the HOLD gt key then move the cursor to the track to exchange to The cursor moves every time the HOLD gt key is pressed For this procedure you need a recorded track and a blank track The cursor can also be moved using the REWIND key or F FWD key 1 Repeatedly press the EDIT key while the recorder is in the 5 Turn the JOG dial to select the track to exchange to STOP state to find and display the Track Exchange mode The mode can also be selected by pressing the EDIT key the
154. clock slave Consequently in this system the VF160 will be the master and the MIDI sequencer the slave MIDI clock amp song position ponter MIDI Sound Source TTT MIDI IN MIDI OUT Master Recorder MIDI Sequencer 90 ees VASA Fostex Connecting external equipment 1 Connectthe VF160 MIDI OUT to MIDI IN of the MIDI sequencer 2 Set the MIDI sequencer for external sync mode EXTERNAL SYNC by MIDI clock Refer to the Owner s Manual of the equipment in use for details Setup of the VF 160 1 Because the MIDI clock and song position pointer will be output fromthe VF160 setthe SETUP mode MIDI sync signal output setting to CLK Refer to page 130 SETUP mode MIDI sync signal output setting for correct operating procedures 2 The meter in the desired bar can be set by Time signature setting of the SETUP mode Refer to page 126 SETUP mode Time Signature Setting for operating procedure 3 Tempo in the desired bar can be set by Tempo setting of the SETUP mode Refer to page 128 SETUP mode Tempo Setting for operating procedure 4 Setthe SETUP mode Metronome setting to On if click sound is to be output according to the setup tempo map Refer to page 129 SETUP mode Metronome setting for operating procedure
155. conventional CD player that does not support CD RW playback approx 2 second silent space lt Figure 2 gt In the following operations we assume that there are 4 Press the REWIND key F FWD key to select IDE or one or more programs which are mixed down by the SCSI and press the ENTER YES key internal mixdown mode on the current drive while Select SCSI if a SCSI type CD RW drive is used Select IDE if the optional CD RW drive is used By pressing the ENTER YES key the display shows the CD RW drive name and then changes to the save mode select screen where Bkup Backup flashes To carry out making an audio CD select CD DA If you need to change the copy protection setting the an external SCSI type or Fostex optional CD RW drive is connected to the VF160 lt Note gt Key operations of the VF160 should be done after com pleting access to a CD RW CD R disc default setting is OFF select Setup for setting writing conditions If you make an audio CD without changing 1 After turning on the power of both the VF160 and a connected the copy protection setting skip steps 5 and 6 below and CD RW drive load a non recorded disc to the CD RW drive go to step 7 2 Press the SETUP key to enter the Setup mode SCSI or IDE is shown according to the drive used 3 Use the JOG dial to select highlight the Save PGM menu SETUP R22 gs and press the ENTER
156. corded on track 1 9 Similarly the B input signals are recorded on track 2 10 and finally the H input signals are recorded on track 8 16 Therefore it is possible to easily record on all tracks by simply tuning the gain with the TRIM knob Note that the same signals are sent to tracks 1 9 to 8 16 Therefore when 16 tracks are simultaneously recorded two tracks of the same sound will each be created In other words only a maximum of 8 tracks can be simultaneously recorded with different sounds for input signals A to H By using the adat digital input it becomes possible to simultaneously record different sounds on 16 tracks Refer to the later section for more specific instructions BUSS Recording The second recording mode is the BUSS REC mode This recording mode is mainly used to Record sounds while applying equalizer and built in effects and Record ping pong recording etc signals mixed on multiple channels on two or one track This mode is used to record signals sent to the REC BUSS that is the recording buss after the input signal or track play sound is processed through the mixer and level tuned or equalized Built in effect signals can also be sent to the REC BUSS therefore sounds applied with an effect can also be recorded The channels sent to REC BUSS are called SOURCE The REC BUSS comes with L R 2 channels therefore it is possible to simultaneously BUSS REC either 2 or 1 track
157. cording state UNDO Press the UNDO REDO key again to return to the original state of the recording ontrack 1 REDO The UNDO REDO function is effective for all recordings Es EIS O FOSE RECORDING to 2 Tracks With track 1 now recorded we will record the stereo sound source to tracks 15 and 16 of the recorder Hint QOQO000000N00 Preparing to Record Connect the stereo sound source to record to INPUT jacks 7 15 G and 8 16 H Press the DIRECT REC TRK key RED Flashing Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key forch15andch16 RED Flashing Trk15 and 16 will go to the RDY Ready mode The othertracks will be in the SAFE mode Key Light OFF Press the EXIT NO key CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch 15 and 16 gt GREEN RED Alternately Flash Indicates that trk15 and 16 are RDY Ready Press the RECORD key to put trk15 and 16 in the Input Monitor mode RED Flashing Trk15 and 16 will got to the Input Monitor mode 33 MASTER g Set the ch15 and ch16 fader and master fader to 0 Tips How to make a fader pair You can pair two adjacent faders By pairing faders 15 and 16 for example you can con trol both channels 15 and 16 simultaneously via a single fader See page 138 for details about how to pair faders Output sound from the sound source while adjusting the TR
158. create an event memory 1 EVTO1 with data 05m 00s and then create an event memory with data 03m 30s the 2 event memory 1 data is replaced with 03m 30s auto matically while the previous data 05m 00s is as signed to event memory 2 Select 01 New Event using the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key Rotate the JOG dial to highlight 01 New Event By pressing the ENTER YES key the event edit screen appears where Non flashes in the Scene number field 64 n naa Event Ho Select j per EVENT MAP EN Event Al Edit j Scene Ho EE AaheeneeSsee fabs F UD JOG FWO FFWwo Hit EHTE or EIT While Non is flashing you can selects the scene number from those currently stored by rotating the JOG dial The corresponding scene names are also shown below If no scene memory except the initial setting S00 Init Mix is stored selecting any scene number 01 to 99 except 00 shows Un defined on the screen In the description here we skip selecting a scene number Non continues to flash and go to the next step for time editing You may of course select a scene number after editing the event time Use the F FWD key to select the flashing editing field in the time display Each time you press the F FWD key the flashing editing field moves from h gt m gt s gt f gt sf while each press of the REW key moves the flashing field in reve
159. ctions on adjusting the equalizer Tips Adjusting the PAN Setting of the Source Channel It is possible to set the PAN according to the sound source of the source channel when recording to two tracks Press the PAN key to switch to the PAN setting display Select the channel to adjust the PAN setting with the CH STATUS CH SEL key Then use the JOG dial to optionally set the PAN setting nie The final REC Level REC BUSS Master Level is adjusted according to the earlier mentioned procedures The system is ready to record after you have com pleted the above procedures Record 1 Locate the time to record on the VF160 2 Press the PLAY key while the RECORD key is depressed to start recording The CH STATUS CH SEL key and the RECORD key of ch7 amp 8 lights up RED indicating that recording is taking place 3 Press the STOP key when the recording is completed to stop the VF160 Please Wait appears on the LCD and then returns to the Normal Display This completes recording the sound source of inputs A to Hon tracks 7 and 8 Tips UNDO REDO By pressing the UNDO REDO key after recording the re cording is undone and the track returns to the pre REC state where there is no recording UNDO By pressing the UNDO REDO key again the recording on two tracks are redone to the post REC state REDO The UNDO REDO feature is available for all recordings Play 1 Locate the time in which recording wa
160. d beat with the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key The meter value that can be input is identical with the above signature setup When the ENTER YES key is pressed tempo value will change to flashing Input the desired tempo with the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key The tempo can be input within the range of 30 through 250 When the ENTER YES key is pressed the tempo map value thus input will be set and return to the above mentioned Confirmation display for tempo map To register another tempo map repeat steps 1 through 4 Upon completing registering press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode For a setup example if it is attempted to setup the following tempo in the music that is set to OO1BAR 4 4 J and OOSBAR 3 4 J by the previous signature setup as seen in the music score below the tempo map must be set as follows 2 Tempo 120 Tempo 90 3 ole r NR oy Tempo 60 Tempo 120 Tempo Map Time signature setting Tempo setting 001 BAR 14 J 120 003 BAR 1 J J 90 005 BAR 34 J 60 007 BAR 2 J J 120 001 BAR 4 4 4 005 BAR 3 4 4 E FIO FOSE Correction of the Registered Tempo Erasing of the Registered Tempo 1 Under the above Confirmation display select the tempo map 1 U
161. data or unformatted disks See the following notes for such a case If you are going to save to an unformatted disk The VF160 recognizes that the disk is unformatted after executing steps 1 through 4 described above and the following screen appears Save PEM SCSI F Curr FH Unformat Sure By pressing the ENTER YES key while holding down the RECORD key the disk is formatted and the display shows the screen for selecting the program to be saved as described above If you select a program to be saved to the backup disk which has saved data After executing steps 1 through 6 described above the display shows the screen for selecting the program to be saved You can select from existing programs on the backup disk and New PGM If you select an existing program and execute the save operation the new data overwrites the program the existing data is erased If you select New PGM the data is saved to a newly created program while other existing programs are unchanged If you are going to save data to New PGM but the disk does not have enough available space for the data When you select New PGM the available disk space is shown If you press the ENTER YES key Disk Full is shown at the top of the screen and you cannot execute the save operation In such a case you may save data by overwriting an existing program If you want to cancel the save operation select Eject by using the JO
162. dit Then turn the JOG dial to choose the alphanumeric symbol to input The title can contain up to 16 characters form the following alphanumerics and symbols Editing the Track The VF160 features a 3 5 inch E IDE hard disk as a storage media This allows speedy voice editing in a nonlinear and nondestructive manner in track units There are four track editing options as described below Copy amp Paste Track Exchange Aspecific range of data on a voluntary track can be copied and then pasted to the same track or another track Note that the Copy amp Paste feature is only possible with the current program started Move amp Paste Aspecific range of data of avoluntary track can be moved and pasted to the same track or another track Note that the Move amp Paste feature is only possible with the current program started Erase A specific range of data ona voluntary track or on all real tracks are erased Note that the Erase feature is only possible with the current program started Tracks are interchangeable with each other Mono tracks or several 2 track or 8 track unit tracks are exchangeable to freely exchange between the 24 real tracks and additional tracks Note that the Track Exchange feature is only possible with the current program started lt Precautions gt e DO NOT change the program during the editing process until the entire editing process is completed since the edi
163. e CH STATUS CH SEL key is pressed the status will require selection of either INPUT or TRACK for channel faders 9 to 16 as mentioned earlier Therefore operate only the CHSTATUS CH SEL key of channels 9 to 16 to switch between INPUT or TRACK each time the key is pressed Q CO CH VIEW fostex VF GCO MET When pressing the BUSS SOURCE key the status will require selection of a channel to send to REC BUSS as mentioned earlier Therefore the channel in which the CH STATUS CH SEL key is pressed is sent to the REC BUSS All channels are selected up to this point The following two types only select tracks Jt is possible to select the track to record REC READY in each respective REC mode by pressing the BUSS REC TRK key and DIRECT REC TRK key TIME BASE The term Time Base frequently appears in the text of this manual The time base plays the same role as the tape counter of conventional tape recorders and is used to show the location of the recorder There are 3 types of time bases 1 ABS Absolute Time indication 2 BAR BEAT CLK Bar Beat Clock indication 3 MTC MIDI Time Code The user can switch between time bases by pressing the DISP SEL TIME BASE key while the SHIFT key is depressed An ABS Absolute Time base is the absolute time of the hard disk A time base counter between 00H OOM OOS ABS 0 and 23H 59M 59S is created
164. e Midi Syncout Frame Rate NTC Offset Se Setting an MTC offset value Mic Offset Set The Setting an MTC offset value menu enables you to specify an offset time value the difference between the time of MTC output from the VF160 and the ABS 00m OOs OOf OOsf time You need to specify this value if you have selected MTC for the Setting MIDI sync output signal menu With the initial setting of 00h 59m 57s OOf OOsf for example MTC of 59m 57s OOf OOsf is output at the ABS time 00m OOs OOf OOsf You can also set an offset value from the OOlbar 1beat OOclk value bar beat on the Tempo Map Refer to the next section for information on MTC Offset mode e Initial setting OOh 59m 57s OOf OOsf e Setting range of offset time 00h 00m 00s OOf OOsf 23h 59m 59s 29f 99sf Select Meru You can set the value for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the HAH JIMT Z0 F BESF Flashing song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the aa JOG FFWD lt Note gt For example if you set MTC Offset mode to ABS See the 2 Move the edit point with the F FWD key REWIND key input next section and you wish to start the song from MTC s 01h the desired offset with the JOG dial then press the ENTER 00m 00s OOf you may wish to set a preroll of three seconds YES key with an MTC offset of 00h 59m 57s OOf Offset
165. e WAV flashes When a DOS formatted disk is set WAV initially flashes Saye PRM SCSI SRR Backur Mode FOMSS FEL F N Hit YES or HO be 4 While WAV is flashing press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting On or Off of the Clipboard export function where OFF flashes Pressing the REWIND or F FWD key switches between On and Off SETUP R22 Saue WAU SCSI Board Exrort Or FFWD ALE ve YES or HO Keg Flashing If you save all data from ABS 0 to REC END in most cases you do not have to change the setting here lt About the Clipboard export function gt The Clipboard export function allows you to save the desired range of data If you save data with this function active only the data between the Clipboard IN and Clipboard OUT points is saved Therefore if you want to save only the specific range of data you have to register the Clipboard IN and Clipboard OUT points before the save operation lt Note gt If you save all data from ABS 0 to REC END make sure to set the Clipboard export function to OFF 5 While OFF is flashing press the ENTER YES key 109 The display shows the screen for selecting a program to be saved The program number currently selected flashes while the data size of the program is shown Save WAU SCSI H UP DOWw JOG Hit YES or or HO Kes
166. e song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the VF160 Select Rec Protect in the menu selection display and then press the ENTER YES key The presently set item On or Off will flash flash in the initial setting aa Hernu l off will E Mode AES Slave Hon E OFF lave Tufe i Fec Protect Disital In Analogs 133 2 Select On or Off with the JOG dial and then press the ENTER YES key It will be set to the selected item On or Off Selecting Off enables recording you can record paste and erase data Selecting On disables recording and you cannot record paste or erase data Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode lt Note gt When recording is disabled On and you try to record paste or erase data the VF160 displays Protected for a second indicating that you cannot perform the operation To perform the operation you need to enable recording Off fostex F GO E Setting Digital Inout Digital In In the Setting digital input menu whether the signal assigned to tracks 1 through 16 are digital signals adat digital signal SP DIF digital signal or analog signals can be setup By using this function it becomes possible to digitally record from external digital equipment CD MD DAT adat digital mixer etc If S P DIF
167. e 2 the PAS NS INipoint CLIPBOARD OUT point CLIPBOARD IN point is not changed while the CLIPBOARD OUT point moves as shown in Fig ure 4 If you record data to a CD RW or CD R disc with out changing the CLIPBOARD OUT point data between the CLIPBOARD IN and OUT points is recorded but data between the CLIPBOARD OUT i _ REC END and REC END points are not recorded CEIPROARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point Therefore you have to set the CLIPBOARD OUT mixed down sorig data point to the same point as the REC END point or i latter point lt Figure 4 gt REC END mixed down song data 82 Mees VASA Fostex Inserting silence at the beginning of a song To insert silence at the beginning of a song use ei ther of the following methods depending on the start time The following operations are assumed to be done when the time base is set to ABS If you want to perform the operations with another time base such as Bar Beat press the DISP SEL key while holding down the SHIFT key to change the time base in advance When mixdown starts from ABS 0 You can make a silence at the beginning of a program which is mixed down from ABS 0 by using the move amp paste technique In the following description we assumed that the cur rent program is a 5 minute length program in which the CLIPBOARD IN and CLIPBOARD OUT keys hold OOM 00S OOF OOSF and 0
168. e following manner lt To check whether a demonstration song is recorded or not gt After turning on the unit and boosting up program 1 press the PLAY key to start playback e If the level meters move A demonstration song is recorded Title of the recorded demonstration song will be indicated for the program title e If the level meters do not move No demonstration song is recorded Temporary title such as 0001 will be indicated for the program title HAMAS MES AL PAL shoes SAB Init MixG Bet eta MixB 4a 12345678 FOWIEIIMISIG dE LR TPa4SE 1H SIDMIPIIMISIE dB LA If a demonstration song is recorded you can listen to the song any time by playing back program 1 see page 31 for details about how to play back a program Note that you cannot record a new material on program 1 if a demonstration song is recorded on program 1 Therefore before starting recording for the first time you must carry out any of the following operations Note You can start recording without the need for carrying out any of the following operations if no demonstration song is recorded on your unit If you wish to start recording while keeping the demonstration song Create a new program The newly created program is not record prohibited so you can record a material onto it See page 70 for details about how to create a new program If you wish to record a material on program 1 overwriting the demonstra
169. e is effected and the point has already the REC END point slightly forward Then press STOP passed the AUTO PUNCH IN point By setting that STOP point time to the AUTO PUNCH When the power is turned OFF OUT key it becomes possible to thoroughly erase all data When program selection takes place from that section The hard disk does not access any point after the RECEND point even when PLAY is started When there is no data on that section only the time will be counted Track Exchange Track Exchange allows the tracks currently on the program to be interchanged all real tracks and additional tracks on mono track or multiple track 2 tracks or 8 tracks each units This function makes it possible to exchange real tracks A real track can be emptied by moving a real track toa blank additional track This means that real track can be recorded with other data All in all track exchange allows effective utilization of the tracks As already described in the Erase section the Track Exchange feature is necessary to check the REC END point of an additional track Executing Track Exchange One track exchange 1 Press the EDIT key while the recorder is in the STOP state Track 1 Track 9 Track 17 and show Track Exchange on the display i Track 10 Track 18 Track 11 gt Track 19 Track 12 Track 20 Track 13 gt Track 21 Track 14 Track 22 Dak Tax 2 Next press the
170. e ofany sound data copied or moved on the clipboard e Press the PLAY key while the STOP key is depressed The sound data copied or moved on the clipboard appears if the data is copied Copy Clip Play appears and if itis moved data then Move Clip Play appears and that data is played clipboard play To monitor the sound played make the adjustments with the channel fader corresponding to the track copied or moved The CH STATUS CH SEL key that was copied or moved flashes during playback The recorder automatically stop when clipboard play is over Press the EDIT key after checking the data When the earlier mentioned COPY or MOVE is completed the LCD will then return to the same display flashing Copy Paste or Move Paste Pasting Data 5 Press the ENTER YES key when Copy Paste or Move Paste is flashing The menu to select the paste repeat frequency appears Repeat 01 then 01 and Sure flashes Note that 01 refers to paste once The CH STATUS CH SEL key of the track copied or moved flashes houe Faste Rereat H1 Sure Dsceceisevccecedeseceans Miccsietcdiansecacicsuans 4 A 4 d Use the CH STATUS CH SEL key to select the paste destination track e There is no need to select a track when pasting on the same track e The mono track is the only track in which the paste destination can be changed The
171. e output level from the MON OUT jack 10 PHONES Headphones Knob Adjusts the output level form the PHONES jack For more details refer to the respective instructions of each item es VF ISO Fostex Top Panel Mixer Section 11 er a i h 18 a 12 PREIPOST CH STATUSICH SEL 12 E m E EEEE i 11 24 u CH STATUS CH SEL Key channels 1 16 ON OFF key for each channel during normal display explained later Select the channel to CHECK CHANGE the setting with CH PARAM EDIT Key No 17 22 when CHECKING CHANGING various PAN equalizer and other mixer parameters Select the recorder track 1 16 for REC READY or REC CANCEL SAFE status flashing REC ASSIGN DIRECT key or REC ASSIGN BUSS key when selecting the track to record Pressing the CH STATUS CH SEL key alone switches between on and off mute of the corresponding fader Pressing this key while holding down the SHIFT key switches between on and off the SOLO function The flashing key illustrates the following STATUS ORANGE The level ofthe inputsignals INPUT into input Ato H are adjustable Only channels 9 16 are adjustable with the fader GREEN The level of the audio TRACK PLAY on the track are adjustable with the fader It will continue to flash when the SOLO functionis ON OFF The signals to the fader are MUTE
172. e prerecording state UNDO Press the UNDO REDO key again to return to the original state of the recording on two tracks REDO Locate Function The VF160 provides sophisticated locate functions which allow quick locate to the desired point ABS Locate There are 3 types of ABS Locate procedures The instructions are described below e Press the REWIND key while the STOP key is depressed to locate ABS 0 which is the head of the program That head is located for all time bases Press the F FWD key while the STOP key is depressed to locate the REC end time of the last recording REC END This is a convenient feature to search the end of a song or to find out how long a song is Press the RECORD key while the STOP key is depressed to locate the start time of the last recording Locating a mark point using a Memory Key and Mark Key The VF160 provides seven keys for registering time information These are called memory keys You can register two time data for each memory key One is mark memory point data used for locate functions The other is time data which is used for track editing functions such as auto return auto punch in out and copy paste However you can also use the latter one for locate functions when you do not use track editing functions Therefore when you do not use track editing functions you can store up to 14 locate memory points while you can store up to 7 memory points when usin
173. e program to record If several programs are set use the program selection function to pre start the program to record Setting the digital input 1 Set the VF160 digital input as shown below from the Digital In menu in the SETUP mode For more details on setup procedures refer to the SETUP Mode on page 134 lt When recording S P DIF digital signals gt Set the Digital In SPDIF of the SETUP mode as shown as an example below With this setting the LEFT channel of the S P DIF digital signal is recorded on track 1 and the RIGHT channel is recorded on track 2 As shown in this case when selecting a S P DIF digital sig nal it is possible to set odd and even tracks next to each other SETUP Fi4 Digital In 3 Lai Raz ada p JOG REW FFWDS Hit YES or NO key 88 lt When recording adat digital signals gt Set the Digital In of the SETUP mode to adat SETUF Fi4 Disital In Analog Lal Fee FIUG Hit YES or H Key This setting records the adat digital signals on chl ch8 on tracks 1 8 In other words the ch1 signals are recorded on track 1 ch2 signals on track 2 and so on Simply put the digital signal is recorded on tracks corresponding to the adat digital signal channel When the Digital In settings are completed press the EXIT NO key to escape from the SETUP mode The LCD shows the Normal Display Either MIN or
174. e the Digital Input Setting in the SETUP mode is set to S P DIF or adat E hr IoO Fostex Auto Function The VF160 is equipped with 3 Auto Functions One is the Auto Play which automatically starts playing a track after locating it Another is the Auto Return which locates a predetermined time during playback The third Auto Repeat combines the former two features to repeat playing a certain segment Use the ARTN APLAY key to start the Auto Function Every time the key is pressed the function switches through Auto Play gt Auto Return gt Auto Repeat gt OFF The Normal Display will show an icon of each functional status Auto Play 1 Press the A RTN A PLAY key during the Normal Display to display the Auto Play icon see figure below on the LCD Pal 006 1 ee Taan 2 Followthe above location instructions to locate a chosen point Playback automatically starts from the time located Auto Return The Auto Return function automatically locates a START point when the track is played to the END point To execute the Auto Return function you must set the START point and END point time Start Point 4 End Point 4 Playback EEEN RBBB BRB RBRERB RRR eeeeeeee Locating Stop Set Store START END Point 1 Press the STORE key at the time to set This key can be pressed during then play or stop mode 2 Press the AUTO RTN START key
175. ecognize this file When a backup disk changed in this manner is loaded only WAV files with file names 4 WAV which are located in an acknowledgeable root directory can be loaded For example if the zero number of data made at save is deleted from the backup disk and then load is executed only WAV files recorded with any other sound can be loaded When loading WAV files saved in a multiple number of disks they can be loaded by a special method derived from the above method Assume that there is backup disc 1 saved with O1 WAV through 12 WAV and disc 2 saved with 1 3 WAV through 24 WAV First when backup disk 1 is loaded files in tracks 1 12 will be loaded At this point tracks 13 24 will not be loaded and thus be non recorded Next when backup disk 2 is loaded files in tracks 1 12 remains intact and tracks 13 24 only will be loaded Backup Disk 1 Backup Disk 2 Method in loading by changing the track If the two letters in file name WAV in the backup disk are changed it will be possible to load them on this recorder on a track different from that at the initial save For example if a WAV file named ABCDEFO1 WAV on track 1 is changed to ABCDEFO3 WAV this WAV file will be loaded on track 3 Method in loading by changing the title If the 6 lett
176. ect the REC track appears 3 Turn up the PHONES knob or MON OUT knob to monitor the sound 3 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the track that was set with Digital In 4 When recording is completed press the STOP key to stop The CHSTATUS CH SEL key of the channel selected flashes the VF160 and to stop the external digital device RED Press the EXIT NO key to return to the Normal Display lt mportant gt If the track for digital recording is set from the Digital In menu of the SETUP mode then tracks not assigned for digital REC can record analog signals at the same time For example if S P DIF digital signals are recorded on tracks 1 and 2 it would then be possible to record analog signals on the remaining tracks 3 16 With this function it is possible to simultaneously record 16 tracks with adat digital and analog signals However the prerequisite is that DIRECT RECORD is the recording option being used For further details refer to the section on Recording 16 Tracks at the Same Time described below Recording 16 Tracks at the Same Time This section describes how to simultaneously record a total of 16 tracks consisting of 8 analog signals and 8 adat digital signals Simply put tracks 1 8 record the adat digital signals from VC 8 or VM88 and tracks 9 16 DIRECT RECORD the 8 analog signals 8 analog sound sources MES O000000000000 p 4 le e
177. ect tracks individually when loading a WAV file lt Note gt You cannot load data from a CD RW CD R disc by the WAV file format Press the SETUP key to enter the Setup mode The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup menu Use the JOG dial to select Load PGM and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the device from which the data is loaded IDE flashes N Menu i Reserve Fader F PTs IFF Load FGM Load Device Select OPT SCSI Hia HES or Ho aay Use the REWIND key to select OPT and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting SPDIF or adat in which SPDIF flashes Load FGM j Load Device Select Flashing FFWD FELI Hit YES or HO Key If you load data using the adat digital signal select adat If you load data using the S PDIF digital signal select SPDIF 4 Use the REWIND or F FWD key to select SPDIF or adat and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting a load destination program to which data is loaded A program number currently selected flashes followed by its program name The data size of the current program is also shown When a program number is flashing you can select the desired load destination program ra PGM SPOIF b Desth PEM Select Flashing HHH1 tk PIB UP DOWN JOG Hit YES or HO Key
178. ect tracks individually when saving by the WAV file format lt Note gt You cannot save data to a CD RW CD R disc by the WAV file format 1 Press the SETUP key to enter the Setup mode The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup menu 2 Use the JOG dial to select Save PGM and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the device to which the data is saved IDE flashes Fader FIKS Fader Fe ort SI RE FFWD Hit YES or HO Key Use the REWIND key to select OPT and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting SPDIF or adat in which SPDIF flashes a PGH OFT I Save Device Select Flashing adat 1 REJ FFWD Hit YES or HO Key adat If you save data using the S PDIF digital signal select SPDIF If you save data using the adat digital signal select 4 Use the REWIND or F FWD key to select SPDIF or adat and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the program to be saved The program number currently selected flashes while the data size of the program is shown While a program number is flashing you can select the desired program to be saved Save PEM SPOIF 5 ce PON Select eel HEGEL UWP DOWH JOG Hit YES or WO Key Flashing E Use the JOG dial to select the program to be
179. ed and the point saved appears on the LCD LocATES HHA a 2os2RF Ao se A FUHCH IH 1 2 Press the MARK 1 7 key while the SHIFT key is depressed The name of the Mark Memory and the time saved appears on the LCD The following details are saved in each Memory Key AUTO RTN START MARK 1 Key gt START point and MARK 1 memory AUTO PUNCH IN MARK 2 Key gt PUNCH IN point and MARK 2 memory AUTO PUNCH OUT MARK 3 Key gt PUNCH OUT point and MARK 3 memory AUTO RTN END MARK 4 Key gt END point and MARK 4 memory CLIPBOARD IN MARK 5 Key gt CLIP IN point and MARK 5 memory CLIPBOARD ALIGN SEL MARK 6 Key gt ALIGN SEL point and MARK 6 memory CLIPBOARD OUT MARK 7 Key gt CLIP OUT point and MARK 7 memory 2 Press the LOCATE key This allows Direct Location to the time shown Tips PREROLL By setting PREROLL in the SETUP mode it is possible to locate the time 0 10 seconds several seconds before the time set to locate Changing the Time Saved inthe Memory key and Mark key 1 1 Press a voluntary Memory key The name of the key pressed and the point saved appears on the LCD LOCATE HGHG AES F A PUNCH IH 1 2 Press the MARK 1 7 key while the SHIFT key is depressed The name of the Mark Memory and the time saved appears on the LCD 2 Change the parameter of the flashing column cursor H M S F SF or BA
180. ed area unrecorded area remain PROGRAM You can use up to a maximum of 99 24 hour time counted tapes with the VF160 This tape is called a Program Note that a program exists individually on the hard disk Therefore each respective program can be freely recorded played and edited without affecting other programs A program can be named with a program title making it easier to identify and file the musical piece In the usual menu the Program appears on the LCD as shown in the following Figure F61 8601 Program Por MAMM ope Title 0001 seaneesneeeseesnensnes Ht ssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Perne Hap 123456718 101213415E J LR REMAIN Indicator The REMAIN indicator shows how much recording time is left on hard disk in use The VF160is controlled with a 24 hour clocked program Note that the REC time varies according to how much space there is left on the hard disk By switching the LCD the VF160 remain display appears in the following manner as shown in the figure below The rough recordable time is on the hard disk is computed in terms of a mono track basis The value indicates the available recordable time and disk space when recording one mono track Mast Remain Time 3h 07m Hard disk space FIFE 1 000MB 1GB tHE 12345678 1I0il21315I16 AE LA fostex VF GCO MT ee A mono track refers to one track Therefore a mono track REMAIN time is the recordable length on the hard
181. ed scene number The name of the program which you worked before entering the scene memory mode is dupli cated to the name of the selected scene number whose first character flashes showing that it can be edited 61 amp 17 Q lt gt lt gt After completing the scene name entry press the ENTER YES key The display will change to the Normal display of the pro gram whose scene name has been set fostex F GO Mee lt Hint gt Scene memories stored in the scene numbers 00 to 99 are preserved even if the power is turned off However atemporary memory stored in the Temporary numbers disappear and all the parameters return to the default Un defined settings when the power is turned off though they do not disappear when changing the pro gram If you want to store the temporary memory toa scene number 00 to 99 recall the temporary number before turning off the power and store the memory to the desired Scene number 00 to 99 Recalling a scene memory You can recall the settings stored in scene memories 1 Press the SCENE RECALL key The display shows the screen for selecting the scene number Select Scene Ho IS CUn defined 5 2 Use the JOG dial to select the desired scene number to be recalled and press the ENTER YES key After Scene Recalled appears on the display the selected scene is recalled and the display changes to the Normal disp
182. ed the next num ber to the highest existing program number amp 8 amp 9 amp 10 amp 11 amp 12 amp 13 amp 148 amp 15 amp 16 amp 17 amp 18 amp 19 amp 20 amp 21 amp 23 amp 24 Load New Program Program 1 P01 Program 2 P02 Current drive of the VF 16 lt Note gt You can save or load data using a CD RW drive only with the FDMS 3 Fostex Digital Management System 3 format and CD DA format Note that unlike other SCSI devices you cannot save or load data with the WAV file format See the main manual for saving oading a WAV file e Creating an audio CD You can make an audio CD by recording sound data of tracks 1 and 2 between the CLIPBOARD IN point and CLIPBOARD OUT point to a CD RW CD R disc e Loading an audio CD data You can load a material on a commercial or created audio CD to a program of the VF160 Audio data is loaded to a new program automatically created by the unit which is the same way as backup data loading The unit never overwrites the existing program lt Notes for using a CD RW drive gt e Use a high impedance SCSI cable for connection between the VF160 and a CD RW drive The cable length should be as short as possible e Only a single SCSI device can be connected to the VF160 SCSI port Attach an active terminator to the CD RW drive used If you attach a terminator that is not active you may not be able to save or load data
183. een is as follows Warning You are responsible for use of this digital device Be sure to abide by the copyright conditions of the source material Press Enter Yes key if you agree with the above lt Note gt If you do not agree with the warning message con tents press the EXIT NO key to quit loading The display briefly shows Set Disable and Can t Load ing then returns to the mode select screen If you agree with the warning message contents go to the next step to continue the operation lt Hint gt When loading data using the S P DIF digital signal the same message also appears after selecting the load device to SP DIF and pressing the ENTER YES key Fostex F I amp O 6 If you agree to the message contents press the ENTER YES key After showing Set Enable the display shows the screen for selecting the song s to be loaded If there is more than one track recorded on the audio CD vy flashes showing that you can select a desired track If there is only one track recorded on the audio CD Y is not shown on the screen ara amp kectres Hi MIH Be HOH BS HOH B4 HOH AS HOH BS HOH _ lt When only one track is recorded gt lt When more than one track is recorded gt Use the JOG dial to select a track number to be loaded and press the ENTER YES key The destination program numbe
184. efore connecting to a SCSI device read the following notes carefully lt Notes gt e Make connection with the power turned off e You can connect only one SCSI device via the SCSI connector of the VF160 When connecting a external SCSI device to the unit insert a SCSI terminator to the other unused SCSI connector of the device Or if the device provides a switch that switches the SCSI termination set it to ON There is no limitation for the ID number of the backup SCSI device The unit automatically recognizes the device as a backup SCSI device You must format the disk used with the backup SCSI device after connecting the device See Formatting a backup disk below for the detail information Formatting a backup disk You can use an unformatted disk or disk currently used for a computer etc When formatting a disk currently used for a computer make sure that you do not need the data recorded on the disk Once you start formatting you cannot stop or cancel formatting The following procedure assumes that a removable disk is used 102 lt Notes gt e A write protected disk cannot be used Release the protection before using e The disk formatted by the VF160 can be used for saving loading by the FDMS 3 The VF160 cannot DOS format a disk for saving loading by a WAV file So to DOS format a disk use a personal computer etc After connecting a backup SCSI device to the VF160
185. en shows From 05 to 12 to save tracks 5 through 12 After selecting the track s press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting a WAV file on the disk If no file is recorded on the disk New File flashes You can select Eject by rotating the JOG dial To remove the disk select Eject and press the ENTER YES key Fostex F I amp O a IE WAL SESIO F ztn WAL Select Flashing PROKEE ew File UP DOWH JOG Sure Hit YES or HO Kes lt Hints gt If the backup disk contains any existing program s previously saved the display may show following screens after carrying out the previous step depending on the available space of the backup disk Showing the title and New File There is enough space for creating anew WAV file in addition to the existing WAV files on the disk Pressing the ENTER YES key advances to the next step for editing the file name After completing the save operation this new WAV file will be added on the disk Save WAU SCSI fest ee WAL Select EERE UEZoniN JOG Sure Hit YES or HO Key Showing the title and New File and MB The space for adding a new WAV file to the existing WAV files on Save WAL SCSI BL er es the disk is MB w Fi tHE UE OO jog sureti Shor Pressing the ENTER YES key shows Disk Full followed by Delete All WAV Pressing the ENTER
186. enes that are set for the buss record ing cannot be recalled 5 After completing all the adjustments stop the unit and locate the beginning of the program You can locate the beginning of the program ABS 0 quickly by pressing the REWIND key while holding down the STOP key Now you are ready for actual internal mixdown recording 81 ing to the following procedure the unit automatically arms Tracks 1 and 2 Therefore the CH STATUS CH SEL keys never light up in red during the internal mixdown recording 1 Press the DIRECT REC TRK key while holding down the SHIFT key to activate the internal mixdown mode Make sure that the DIRECT REC TRK key flashes 2 Press the PLAY key while holding down the RECORD key The internal mixdown recording starts Both the DIRECT REC TRK and RECORD keys light up 42 12345678 9012131516 JE LA 3 After completing internal mixdown recording press the STOP key to stop the unit Please Wait appears on the display for a few seconds The internal mixdown mode quits and the unit locates the beginning ABS 0 of the newly created mixed down program In the display example below you can see the newly cre ated program whose number is P09 is mixed down from Song Data 1 data We recommend to give a title of a mixed down program starting by Mix lt to distinguish from other programs ess GMS PASI Mix Sona SA
187. ensation may occur on the hard disk or other parts In such cases leave the VF160 for about an hour in the new location before you turn on the power Note on repair The VF160 does not use any parts that user can repair easily Contact your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service station to ask about repairs Use the packing carton designed for the VF160 when you transport the VF160 to the dealer for repair or return If you have discarded the packing box try to pack the VF160 completely using shock absorbing materials Fostex is not responsible for malfunction or damage due to incomplete packaging or caused during transport About copyrights It is prohibited by law to use any part of a CD recording or video images or audio data for which copyright is possessed by a third party for commercial purposes such as contents broadcasts sales or distribution any purpose other than for your personal pleasure About damage Fostex is not responsible for any direct damage or indirect damage caused by using the VF160 fostex VF CO BT Index for Applications This index is provided for searching the page of the desired application Please use this together with the Table of Contents which follow Va want to try recording a musical instrument Please read pages 31 and 43 Vf want to partially rerecord a previously recorded performance Please refi page 37 a want to listen any
188. er recorder can record 44 1kHz digital signals e Generally speaking the input level of the master recorder is not adjustable for digital input 42 Ess RIGO FOSE Instructions for recording with BUSS RECORD This section will discuss the basic procedures to REC PLAY with BUSS RECORD which is another recording option With DIRECT RECORD the track recorded was determined according to the input of channel A to H However with BUSS RECORD recording is possible regardless of the channel input It is also possible to record the input of all 8 channels on 2 tracks with BUSS RECORD Since the recording process takes place via the mixer it is possible to apply equalizer and effect sound to the recording Note that BUSS RECORD takes place using the REC exclusive REC BUSS This REC BUSS consists of 2 channels L and R therefore a maximum of 2 tracks can be recorded at the same time Description of BUSS RECORD BUSS RECORD takes place by sending signals processed through the mixer to the REC BUSS for recording Therefore signals applied with equalization and built Playback sound in effect can be recorded added and recorded mb Here we will use the channel ORANGE with an IN PUT started with the fader as the source channel However channels GREEN in which TRACKS are started can also be used as a source channel Ping pong recording is possible for the source channel recording with the TRACK started channel GREEN
189. er and program title This indicates the slave type setup by The first 16 characters of the program title are shown MARI the Slave Type menu to Scene number and scene name This icon is indicating that it is The first 16 characters of the scene name are shown presently set to VARI pe meter ee ae 1 to 16 Frame rate figure setup by the MTC master level meter Frame Rate menu is indicated here The icon here is indicating that it is presently set to 25 Frames tHo 12345678 102131516 4E LR 30 Es RISO FOSE Instructions for DIRECT Record This section describes the basic REC PLAY procedures in the DIRECT recording mode which is the easiest recording procedure and also provides recordings that most closely resemble the original Hints and tips to successfully operate the VF160 are included according to the workflow ranging from the actual recording to mix down process Both experienced and novice users of multitracker should try this process so as to learn the VF160 operations The following description assumes that the VF160 has been started up without any recordings DIRECT Recording w Rapa 5 The figure on the right shows the relations between input channels and recording tracks in the DIRECT recojrding mode You can see that up to 8 input channel signals can be recorded simultaneously WARNING Itis also possible to simultaneously record 16 tracks However
190. er will be flash 00 will flash in the initial setup ee iSelect Meru Disital In Anala Disital Out SPOI f Resolution f Dewice ID Humber Of Event Checking the number of track events Number Of Event The Checking the number of track events menu enables you to check the number of events on each track Each track including Additional tracks of VF160 Programs consists of consecutive audio files and zero files The number of events represents the total number of audio files and O files Each track can contain up to 512 events If you are editing a song of typical length about six minutes repeated editing operation does not usually exceed this maximum number Exceeding this limit is called event number overflow Even a 20 minute song will not cause event number overflow This is because the recorder system always optimizes the data structure by keeping the number of events low However if a recording on a track is scattered in different areas of the disk or if you have made a very long recording on a single track and performed many edits you should be wary of event number overflow To avoid this problem use the Checking the number of track events menu to check the number of events on each track prior to recording or editing 1 Select Number of Event in the menu a selection display and 2 Use the JOG dial to select another 01 24 to check the number press
191. ers in file name WAV in the backup disk are changed it will be possible to load them on this recorder under a title different from that at the first save Letters which can be used at changing the file name in a computer are those only indicated below All of these letters must be one byte size Alphabets A Z and a z Numerals 0 9 Symbols amp 113 Fostex VF CO Bee Save Load using CD RW CD R lt CD RW drives usable with the VF160 gt To save load song data or make audio CDs you can use a SCSI type CD RW drive unit or the Fostex optional CD RW drive Model CD 1A If you are going to use a SCSI type CD RW drive unit check the operation confirmed drive unit in the following ways Note that Fostex does not guarantee operation with a CD RW drive that is not listed in the operation confirmed drive list For details about an optional CD RW CD 1A ask your local Fostex distributor lt Customers who are accessible to Fostex internet web site gt Confirm the model number and manufacturer of operation confirmed CD RW drive by accessing the fol lowing URL lt http www fostex co jp int pages sets faqset htm gt lt Customers who are not accessible to Fostex internet web site gt Contact your local Fostex distributor lt Care and handling of CD RW CD R discs gt With a CD RW drive you can use not only CD RW discs but also CD R discs Note that CD R d
192. es On the contrary if you set the fader recall mode to Off the default mode fader po sitions are not recalled so you can manually con trol fader positions as you like We suggest you to make sure to set the fader recall mode suitably for your work before executing the scene sequence See page 137 for details about the fader recall mode setting e When you do not use the scene sequence function set the scene sequence mode to OFF o Effect presets of the internal effect processor are clasified into three types ambience delay type No 1 through 28 modulation pitch type No 29 through 36 and pitch type No 37 and 38 Note that the scene sequence function does not recallan effect preset whose type is different from the cur rent one This is to avoid momentary au dio muting and is not a malfunction The other mix parameters of the scene can be recalled even if it includes an effect preset whose type is differ ent from the current one 66 E VASO Fostex Chapter 4 Recorder Functions This chapter describes the cueing digital scrubbing function vari pitch control auto functions program management and track editing such as copy paste move paste erase track exchange etc Cueing Digital Scrubbing This section describes the cueing feature for cueing sound during the F FWD or REWIND process Cueing with the F FWD REWIND key The user can cue at 3x speed by pressing the F FWD REWIND key while the recorder is
193. eseaners 108 Save Load using CD RW CD R scsccseccsecetsstetetieneteeeteeeees e Saving data usinga CD RW drive Backup e Loading backup datafromaCD RW drive Re e Making an AUCIOCD c ssssssessesssssssessecsecsecsseasensensenceecsscssess Loading from an audiOCn essscsessescsecnseseeceseneeneeneseesenes Chapter 7 SETUP Mode Toenter the SETUP MOG scccecssccsesseeseeesseeteeetsenseetseeeaes 126 Time Signature SCttinQ sceseccceccseseessecesesseeseeeseseetseeeeeeeeees 126 Settinga TOMO oo 2 cceiieecutessicitine iecestbdtateesjesenteencpeeschnedecenes 128 Setting the Metronome FUNCTION 1 ccccceccecesseeteetstessensensees 129 Setting A PrerOll VAIUC ccecceccescescessessesseessesecseenssseeseesseeneeeees 130 Setting MIDI SYNC output SIQN AL ccecceceeeseeteeteteteeneeteeaees 130 Setting AN MTC frAMEC Ate cecceccececcesesceeseesesseeseeseesteseeneesees 131 Settingan MTC OffS t VAIUC 2ccccceccecccseeseesseseeseessestenseseesees 131 Setting MTC OffSCtIMOE 2 2 cccccccseecessesssesesseessesensteseenesees 132 Setting the Slave MOC ccccceccecseeesseesssesssssssessessssseaseaseaees 132 Setting the Slave tVPO esscecssceessecesseseeeeeeeesseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeaes 133 Setting the Record Protect fUNCTION 1 cccccccceseeseetsesseeseees 133 Setting Digital INDUt cccecscceesceeseeeseteeeeteeeseeseeteseeiseeeeeeeaes 134 Setting Digital OUtDU 2 2 ccscceccessescsss
194. essceseeseessesseestereestensens 135 Setting BAR BEAT Resolution MOOE 2 1 ccccesceeseeteeeeesseees 135 Setting the MIDI device NUMDEL 1 cccccseeereessstseeseessetettseees 136 Checking the number Of track VENS ccsccccceseeeessetseeees 136 The Drive Format INfOrMAtiOn 2 cc cccccceccetcesseeteteeeteeeteeees 137 Drive S UING ise seco aie Henan i eea 137 Fader Fix mode SettinG ccscccccceccssesseeeseseeeeeesetssseseeeeneeeeaes 138 Fader Recall Mode Se ttinQ ccccccceccsecessectssseeeseeeeeesseeeeeeaes 138 Pairfader SCUHiNG eeesesesscsnceetcecsecnsecsesesceensensaeneeeeseessecneeasatins 139 On Off of Phantom Power SettinG ccccccsccseieeeeeteeeieens 140 Compressor Channel S ttinG cccccccceceesessssseesseeseseeeneens 141 Trouble Shooting Troubles At FECOFAING oa seseeseceeeceeesseeeecneeseeeceeseeseeeeeeeeaseeeats 142 Having trouble Editing cccecceesceeetseeeeeseeeenseeseetaeeeeeeeaeeees 143 Installing the CD 1A Howto install the CD 1A ccccccsccssssssesssesceseeseeseesesssessesseasens 145 Opening closing the trAY cccecsececceceseseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeseteeetenees 146 Placing removing a diSc sseseeseeeeneneieenererrenerernererninerernenene 146 Others MIDI Implementation CHAME cccceccecccceessessescesssestsseesteneeeees 147 MMC Command LiSt 2 2 cccccccccesecsssesseceeceeeesceseessensseasesseates 148 Inquiry Message LSE ee eeeceeeeetsteeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeetestaetseeasea
195. ety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference 3 Heed Warnings All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to 4 Follow Instructions All operating and use instructions should be followed 5 Water and Moisture The appliance should not be used near water for example near a bathtub washbowl kitchen sink laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool and the like 6 Carts and Stands The appliance should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer LA LC An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care Quick stops excessive force and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn 7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting The appliance should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer 8 Ventilation The appliance should be situated so that its location or position dose not interfere with its proper ventilation For example the appliance should not be situated on a bed sofa rug or similar surface that may block the ventilation such as radiators heat registers stoves or other appliances including amplifiers that produce heat 10 Power Sources The appliance should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the appliance 11 Grounding or Polarization The precautio
196. ex Block Diagram BUSSES ST REC EFF AUX REC SOURCE SEL LRLR 12 12 PEAK To HOR NY INPUT ABI gt eo i o From HOR i 7 _ seme 3BAND ir oe aw INPUT A REP TEKI i 4 50dBV REP TKS EQ CH O i PEAK To HDR CH STATUS L E INPUT B DIR maa play EQ PARAMETERS GAIN 1 TRIM REP TRKE REC HIGAIN O 1 RePTRK HIFREQ REP TRK8 HIQ INPUT B o 4 50dBV MID GAIN No MID FREQ EERS Xd MID Q j PEAK TRIM acd LO GAIN ON INPUT C EQ A B OFF L x INPUT C Ho L 4 50dBV AUX 1 PEAK To HDR INPUT D DIR NEUTD DIR TRM A D Prevost UX 2 INPUT D TRK 1 8 POSI 4 50dBV TRIM PEAK To HDR x8 ORG INPUT REC SOURCE SEL INPUT E DIR GRN PLAY OFF RED REC ON 4 T OFF CH OFF I INPUT E INPUT A i PAN 4 50dBV BEAK ae INPUT B o R 3 BAND EQ o Cc INPUT DIR Ore or COMP TRIM NPUTE CH STATUS INPUT INPUT EQ PARAMETERS GAIN i INPUTG PLAY HI GAIN g INPUT F INPUTH REC HI FREQ 4 50dBV HIQ A From HOR MID GAIN o gu Tam te too M eo 5 o REPTRKTT LO GAIN i PHANTOM REP TRE 2 SETUP INSERT FEST EQ ABIOFF tHo AR t 10dBV REP TAK 14 i ETRE Mono i REPTRK IG PEAK o o ral APU DIR o oan H li i 1 s L o UNBAL I preipost AUX 2 TRK INPUT A H pest i 9 16
197. example you can recall scene memory 02 at OOH 01M 34S OOF and scene memory 04 at OOH 02M 20S 20F etc In the following description we assume that the time base is set to ABS However you may set the time base to Bar Beat Clk which allows you to specify the event position by Bar Beat Clk numbers lt Note gt You must store data to scene memories used in a scene event map in advance See Scene memory above about how to store the current settings to a scene memory Creating an event memory An event memory can be created via two methods lt Viewing the event memories gt The event memories created in real time by the procedure described above can be viewed by the operation below 1 on the fly 2 by specifying a desired time 1 While the VF160 is stopped press the SCENE STORE MAP key while holding down the SHIFT key Tips l me The screen shows the event memory list as below in In addition to the methods shown above during the digital which you can view and check the event memories scrub operation you can register the time after scrubbing created in real time by pressing the HOLD gt key followed by LOCATE key while holding down the SHIFT key See Chapter 4 Recorder Functions for details about digital scrubbing Creating an event memory on the fly 1 At the desired position while the VF160 is stopped or during playback press the HOLD gt key Tips The time when pressing the HOLD gt key is
198. ey lt CAUTION gt Either the Standard or Quick format type can be selected However make sure that the Standard format type is selected when formatting a newly installed hard disk 4 Press the ENTER YES key where the Standard is flashed The format type selected is set and Sure flashes 5 Press the ENTER YES key while the RECORD key is depressed The formatting process is started The formatting process will take some time When the formatting is successfully completed Completed will light up on the display 26 6 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to escape from the SETUP mode The Normal Display appears indicating the beginning of the program P01 that is automatically created after formatting the hard disk 12345698 410123 15 H Lk lt Normal Display gt es RIGO FOSE Chapter 2 Basic Recording and Playback This chapter describes basic recording and playback with the VF160 Before carrying out recording playback read About a demonstration song Connections of Peripheral Equip ment and LCD About a demonstration song Read this before using the unit Your VF160 may have a demonstration song on program 1 P01 when shipped note that some VF160 units may not have a demonstration song depending on the production Please check whether a demonstration song is recorded or not on your unit according th
199. ey The VF160 exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display Controlling fader levels You can control fader levels for channels 1 through 16 and the master channel while viewing the numeric values 1 Press the PAN key while holding down the SHIFT key The current fader positions for all channels are shown both graphically and numerically AES BEMEE FOR UTEW TTATTATT Let Let Lay 2 Use the desired fader to control the channel level The fader position shown on the screen both graphically and numerically changes according to the actual fader position in real time Controllable channels Channels 1 through 16 and the master channel Available values 00 to 99 The value is displayed by a whole number but the actual signal level is changed smoothly and continuously If two adjacent channels are fader paired the fader for the odd channel controls levels for both channels simul taneously See page 138 for details about howto pair fad ers of adjacent two channels 3 After completing fader level setting press the EXIT NO key The VF160 exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display Setting the compressor Youcan apply the built in compressor only to the chan nels selected by Compressor channel setting in the Setup mode lt Compressor function gt The compressor is used to compress the dynamic range of the input s
200. f 132 O Setting the slave type Slave Type Vari 133 O Setting the record protect function Rec Protect Off 133 O Setting digital input Digital In Analog 134 e Setting digital output Digital Out SPDIF 135 8 Setting BAR BEAT resolution mode 2 Resolution Off 135 Setting the MIDI device ID number Device ID 00 136 Setting the drive Drive Select IDE 137 Setting the fader fix mode Fader Fix Off 138 O Setting the fader recall mode Fader Recall Off 138 O Setting the pair fader Pair Fader Set Off 139 O Setting the phantom power Phantom Power Off 140 Setting the compressor channel Comp Channel Off 141 O Modes applicable program by program They can be saved loaded Modes applicable to all program They cannot be saved loaded lt Table 2 gt Check menu Check item Display Refer page Community Check of the event number on the track Number Of Event 136 Check of the current drive information Drive Information 137 lt Table 3 gt Execution menu Execution item Display Refer page Community Editing a program title Title Edit 71 z Deleting a program Delete 71 Saving song data to an external device Load PGM 98 Loading song data from an external device Save PGM 98 Formatting an current drive disk Disk Format 23 125 fostex VF GO DT To enter the SETUP mode Entering the SETUP is possible only when the VF160 is in the Stop mode
201. fader icon in the figure shown in step 3 above is shown in dotted line See page 138 for details about how to pair faders of ad jacent two channels The screen example above shows the following status The signal is fed to ST OUT L R The post fader signal of the selected channel is fed to EFF1 EFF2 AUX1 and AUX2 at level 80 3 To turn off the channel view screen press the EXIT NO key The VF160 exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display fostex F GO Mee Effect Edit Mode The VF160 offers high quality ambient effects by employing the A S P Fostex Advanced Signal Processing Technology which is exclusively developed by Fostex With the A S P you can obtain an incomparably clean and high density Hall Reverb overwhelmingly clear Room Reverb and wonderfully hi fidelity Plate Reverb In addition to these typical Reverbs the VF160 provides not only various practical algorithms such as Delay Cho rus Flanger and Pitch Bend but some combinations of these are also available e g Delay Reverb A S P Fostex Advanced Signal Processing Technology The A S P is an exclusive new digital effect processing technology designed by Fostex This method extracts maximum efficiency from the limited DSP power It achieves an overwhelmingly high density Early Reflection sound and wonder fully smooth High Dump response through the H F A Harmonic Feedback Algo rithm Also it carr
202. from 001 to 999 Time 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 1 8 3 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 Signature or DEL DEL is used to deleted time signature data Next to register other bar and time signature repeat steps 2 through 5 Upon completion of registering press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key and exit from the SETUP mode Correcting the Registered Time Signature 1 Under the previous Confirmation display select bar time signatures to be changed and press the ENTER YES key Input the desired signature via the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key The newly input signature will be setup 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 1 8 3 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 or DEL DEL is used to deleted time signature data Time Signature Upon finishing press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode Deleting a Time Signature 1 Under the above Confirmation display select bar time signatures to be deleted and press the ENTER YES key 2 Press the ENTER YES key again to make J3 to flash and input DEL via the JOG dial a Sisnature Set HOCBAR Offset a0 1BAR a HAZBA B fai A11 Ce 3 Press the ENTER YES key The selected measure signature setting will be deleted Flashing 4 After deleting press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode 127 lt Note gt You ca
203. ftware are slightly different even if both use the same tempo Some sequence software can read the tempo output from the VF160 correctly We recommend that you use the tempo of the VF160 on the sequence software No such problems will occur if the sequence software synchronizes the VF160 via MIDI clock instead of MTC e Initial setting ABS 2 Select the desired offset mode with the JOG dial and press e Offset mode option ABS or Bar 3 the ENTER YES key You can set the mode for each Program individually The selected offset mode will be set The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data ABS Initial setting The specified MTC offset time is The settings are maintained after you turn off the output at ABS 00h 00m 00s OOf powerto the VF160 BAR J The specified MTC offset time is 1 Select Offset Mode in the menu selection display and press output at 001bar 1beat 00clk of the the ENTER YES key Tempo Map The currently set offset mode will flash ABS will flash in the initial setting SETUP Fil Select Menu MidisSyncOut CLE Frame Rate 2D MTC Offset Se Offset Mode Slave Mode wo Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode FF Setting the Slave mode Slave Mode This mode allows you to choose the VF160 slave mode setting either On or Off If you set the slave mode to On
204. g WAV file name on the backup disk Warning Already Exist is shown on the screen and the save operation will not be executed In such a case change the file name according to the procedure above and carry out the save operation again A disk on which you have overwritten data many times may lower the access speed because of the disk fragmentation Therefore we suggest that you should use a newly formatted clean disk for backup If any other file but 4 WAV or folder which cannot be recognized by the VF160 is created on the backup disk using a personal computer the VF160 cannot calculate the available backup disk space accurately Accordingly it may happen that the save operation cannot be completed You should note this when changing the file name or creating a folder using your computer Loading a WAV file 1 Press the SETUP key to enter the Setup mode The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup menu 2 Use the JOG dial to select Load PGM and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the device from which the data is loaded SCSI flashes 3 While SCSI is flashing press the ENTER YES key The display shows the drive name and DOS Format followed by the screen for selecting the WAV file to be loaded showing the WAV file name and size If no disk is inserted No SCSI Disk is shown Load WAL SCSI pepe cee rere ee 00S Format
205. g track editing functions The table on the next page shows the data stored for each memory key You can do this operation in any time base 34 E RISO FOSE AUTO RTN 5 PBOARD ALIGN SEL OUT 7 OPN a eaan C SOAD a START IN OUT END IN 1 H 2 E 3 w 4 a 5 eal 6 fea lt Note gt Normally the CLIPBOARD ALIGN SEL MARK6 key can store the MARK6 memory When doing a copy paste or move paste function the time data stored in the CLIPBOARDIN key is automatically copied and stored in this key allowing you to use it as the ALIGN SEL point See Copy paste and Move paste on page 73 for details Saving on the Memory key and Mark key 1 Ensure the system is in the PLAY or STOP status Press the HOLD gt key at the time to save The time is held on the LCD at the point the HOLD s key is pressed 3 1 Press a voluntary Memory key The time held is saved as a point of the Memory Key and then the system returns to the Normal Display 3 2 Press the MARK 1 7 key while the SHIFT key is depressed The time held is saved as a Mark Memory of MARK 1 7 and the system returns to the Normal Display Tips How to check stored time data To check the memory points press the desired memory key To check the mark memory press the desired memory key while depressing the SHIFT key Direct Location of Memory key or Mark key 1 1 Press a voluntary Memory key The name of the key press
206. guitar etc to inputs 7 and 8 4 Connect the VF160 MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of the personal computer and feed MTC from the VF160 to the computer 95 fostex VF CO Bee Chapter 6 Save Load of song data You can save or load the desired song data using an S PDIF digital signal adat digital signal SCSI device MO zip or CD RW as well as the Fostex optional CD RW drive Model CD 1A The file formats you can use are the FDMS 3 Fostex Digital Management System 3 and WAV SCSI device only You cannot save a WAV file to a CD RW CD R disc This function allows you to save finished or unfinished song data including audio data and various SETUP information to an external digital recorder or SCSI backup device and load the data later You can also make an original audio CD CD DA using a CD RW CD R disc kkkkkk About song data The format and time required for the save load operations are different between each method Using the S PDIF digital signal you can save load data for each program individually Five seconds after the pilot signal shown in gray in the diagram below the song data is output to an external DAT recorder The audio data is divided into data blocks of track pairs shown in black in the diagram below and transferred To save data for all Real and Additional tracks totally 24 tracks 12 two track units of data are transferred Therefore it will take about 12 times as much as
207. hannel s to which you wish to apply the effect 3 Pressilhe ENTERMES key J The effect type will be finalized and the parameter set ting screen will appear The default initial parameter values will be displayed 1 If you wish to set EFF 1 press the EFF EDIT mode EFF 1 key To set EFF 2 press the EFF 2 key EFFi EDIT MUTE Dorr With the initial settings the following displays will ap LA1 Horm s ear i Level Rew Tin Pre Delay Hi Fatio Erk Level Flashing When the EFF 1 key is pressed With the initial settings L01 Norm HALL will appear MUTE OFF Details on the parameters are given in the following sec Eff Level ae SH tion Parameter settings Rew Time 3 05 Pre Delas 4ime 4 To exit Effect Edit mode press the EXIT NO key twice in Hi Ratio z succession Erk Level T eee Peia i er sams You will return to Normal display 58 lt Note gt When you press the ENTER YES key to finalize the ef fect type the sound will be muted for an instant 3 Use the JOG dial to adjust the value For details on the meaning and range of each parameter refer to Effect parameter details on the below 4 If you wish to adjust another parameter repeat from lt step Effect parameter settings 2 gt Here s how to set the effect parameters 5 When you are finished making settings press the EXIT NO key
208. he RIGHT R The position of the recorded signal can be checked 10 Adjust the faders PAN equalizer and effect of each source channel ch1 14 and ch9 12 The sound is recorded on track 15 by setting the source channel PAN to the LEFT The sound is recorded on track 16 by setting the source channel PAN to the RIGHT The sound is recorded on both tracks by setting the source channel PAN to the CENTER OAO O DOIO0CI0I0IOO 11 86 WA el 1 To start recording press the PLAY key while the RECORD key is depressed How to adjust the REC BUSS Master Level To adjust the REC BUSS Master Level press the BUSS REC TRK key then use the JOG dial while the following dis play is shown The default setting of the REC BUSS Mas ter Level is set to 80 However this can be set to a vol untary REC BUSS Master Level with the JOG dial After adjusting the level press the EXIT NO key The Normal Display appears The master level while re cording appears on the level meter shown on the display below ees hie O Fostex Metronome Function The VF160 incorporates a tempo map to set a desired bar beat 4 4 3 4 etc and tempo 30 250 Itis possible to output a metronome sound according to the setting of the tempo map This allows for recording in sync with the rhythm output from the VF160 without having to use an external metronome or rhythm box Setting the tempo map The user
209. he display on the left Use the ch16 fader to adjust the output level of the metronome sound clicking sound lt Caution gt When the metronome function is no longer necessary always go to the SETUP mode to turn OFF the metronome function As long as the metronome function is ON it is not possible to record on track 16 and any sounds already recorded on track 16 cannot be played 87 Fostex F OO Ee Digital Recording This section will describe digital recording from external digital devices using the DATAIN connector of the VF160 Digital signals recorded are either S P DIF or adat digital signals Digital recording from an external digital device This section describes digitally record from an external S P DIF digital device CD MD DAT etc or adat digital device Fostex D 1624 D 824 VC 8 VM88 etc to the VF160 adat digital signal or S P DIF digital signal DATA IN DIGITAL OUT soraucoceamen VAO E i DIGITAL DATA OUT eS 000 OOOO ULE E e ETE c lt aution IMPORTANT gt To digitally record to the VF160 only input digital signals S P DIF or adat with the same sampling rate 44 1 kHz 16bit as the VF160 Selecting th
210. he faders of channel faders 9 to 16 When executing DIRECT recording with the SHIFT key pressed down each time the INPUT SEL key is pressed while in the normal display mode the input monitor READY can be switched ON OFF for all tracks 1 16 However any track that is setup to IN Input by the INPUT SEL setting IN TRK cannot be changed to input monitor 26 REC ASSIGN BUSS SOURCE Key Select the channel SOURCE to send to the REC BUSS during BUSS recording Select the SOURCE channel with the CH STATUS CH SEL key This key lights ON when the SOURCE is selected a REC ASSIGN BUSS REC TRK Key The track READY to record in BUSS recording is selectable when this key is flashing Set READY track with the CH STATUS CH SEL Key This key lights ON when the READY trackis set for BUSS recording REC ASSIGN DIRECT REC TRK Key The track READY record in DIRECT recording is selectable when this key is flashing Set READY track with the CH STATUS CH SEL key This key lights ON when the READY track is set for DIRECT recording 29 DISP SEL TIMEBASE Key This key is used to alternate the menu shown on the LCD in the following order 29 30 31 LOCATE SCRUB JOG MMi sporre MINI The tracks recorded vary as shown below according to the connection jack a Current location of TIME BASE selected Shows the current location of the sound b REMAINING TIME B
211. he most efficient way in order to elimi nate harmful reverb elements and roughness This makes it possible to establish high density and transparent sounds Before the operation we will briefly discuss the effect functions here such as Reverb Delay Chorus and Flanger which are integrated in the VF160 The so called Reverb effect consists of various reflec tion sounds mixed together For example when you clap your hands in a tunnel you will hear the sound linger even after you stop clapping your hands This is the Reverb The sounds we normally hear in daily life have three types of sounds mixed together i e Direct sound Early Reflection sound and Late Reflection sound The Direct sound means the sound directly reaches the ears from the sound source The Early Reflection sound means the sound that comes after the Direct sound and has rebound off the wall of the tunnel up to a few times The Late Reflection sound means that the sound rebounds many times long after the Direct sound has disappeared Our ears normally hear the Direct sound Early Reflection sound Late Re flection sound in the order 56 This is the effect to added a delayed sound to the original sound You can obtain a richer sound or com pletely change the original source sound by using the Delay This makes the one original sound appear to have many sources The Chorus is used to widen or thicken the original sound
212. he speed can be set only in the recorder STOP or PLAY mode It cannot be changed when the recorder is recording By playing back a program with the variable pitch control ON it is possible to adjust the speech while monitoring the changes 1 Putthe recorder in the STOP or PLAY mode Press the VARI PITCH P EDIT key while the SHIFT key is depressed The current setting appears on the LCD and flashes This means that the recorder is ready to edit with the variable pitch control feature 68 Flashing Variable pitch control ON OFF alternates between ON and OFF each time the VARI PITCH key is pressed in this state EEG or TEE lights up 2 Turn the JOG dial to set the setting 3 Press the EXIT NO key to return to the normal display lt Precaution gt e You can turn ON the variable pitch function by pressing the VARI PITCH key even when the current pitch data is 0 0 state where there is nochange in speed However this does not mean that there is any change in speed in this state It simply means that the variable pitch function is ON e The variable pitch is automatically turned OFF in the following cases 1 When the power is turned ONagain the pitch data is reset to 0 0 at this time 2 When the Slave Mode On Off Setting of the SETUP mode is turned On previously set pitch data are saved 3 When M and fim lights up on the display whil
213. held The event memory number that is nearest to the current position flashes in the screen above By selecting the desired event number using the JOG dial and pressing the LOCATE key you can locate the event memory position You can create up to 99 event memories 01 to 99 or Hor J Creating an event memory by specifying the desired time lt Notes gt e The following procedure is assumed that no event 3 Press the LOCATE EVT MEM key while holding down the memory has been created SHIFT key Entry EVT where shows the event memory number appears for a short time while the time held in step 1 is 2 Press the STORE key e Event memory OO cannot be edited entered in the event memory 1 While the VF160is stopped press the SCENE STORE MAP key while holding down the SHIFT key 4 Tocreate other eventmemories repeat step 1 through3 above The display shows the screen for selecting event memory numbers When no event memory is created the screen lt Note gt shows as below An event memory created by the above procedure only contains event time data To set the desired scene num ber to be recalled to each event memory see Creating the scene event map described later lt Hint gt Event memory numbers are assigned in ascending or der of ABS time regardless of order in which event memories are created For example if you first
214. hen placing a disc doing so may damaged may cause a mal function es VAS Fostex MIDI Implementation Chart Digital Multitracker Date Model VF160 MIDI Implementation Chart Version V1 00 Function Basic Default Channel Changed Default Mode Message x Altered FR KR RIK IRR I KK IK IK IK KK KR KI KIRA Note x Number True Voice JOSH REKEREKE REEK AEK nie Velocity Note ON Note OFF After Key s Touch Channel s xx x kK I xK XIXXXIXKX Pitch Bend x x Control Change Program x Change True EAEE AE KE E III E E AEK K II II System Exclusive O rem 1 Quarter Frame Common Song Position Song Select Tune System Clock Real Time Commands Local ON OFF All Notes OFF Active Sense Reset rem 1 MMC Device ID 00 99 127 MTC Identity reply rem 2 MMC Device ID 00 99 127 MTC Inquiry rem 3 START STOP CONTINUE Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No 147 Fostex VF CO Mee MMC Command List Command list Movement Recorder 01 STOP STOP 02 PLAY PLAY 03 DEFERRED PLAY DEFERRED PLAY 04 FAST FORWARD F FWD 05 REWIND REWIND 06 RECORD STROBE REC 07 RECORD EXIT PUNCH OUT 09 PAUSE STOP 40 WRITE Refer to MMC Response Information Field List 41 MASKED WRITE Refer to MMC Response I
215. hen you complete performing any of the following while the internal mixdown mode is active Therefore if you want to continue the internal mixdown mode you need to activate the mode again e Program change e Program delete e Creating a new program e Formatting a disk e Copy paste Move paste e Erase e Save to load from DAT adat lt Note gt If Rec Protect in the Setup mode is set to ON you cannot carry out internal mixdown If you try to perform the internal mixdown opera tion Protected appears on the display In this case set Rec Protect in the Setup mode to OFF before performing the internal mixdown operation Mes VASA Fostex Performing internal mixdown recording lt Note There is no recording track selection gt In the internal mixdown mode unlike the normal record ing you do not have to select recording tracks When executing the internal mixdown recording accord Rehearsing internal mixdown recording Before performing the actual mixdown recording you can rehearse it while adjusting level balance and sound character EQ effect etc of each track In the following description we assumes that you are going to mixdown all program tracks 1 through 16 on which instruments or vocals are recorded and headphones for monitoring are connected to the PHONES jack lt Note gt Make sure that the CH STATUS CH SEL keys of all the source and MASTER channels are
216. holding down the SHIFT key Note that the magnification is resets to x 01 when turn ing off the power Fostex VF OO I 3 Turn the JOG dial left and right to hear the playback sound of only the track selected The center line indicates the current location Scrub takes place inthe FORWARD or REWIND direction from this point Either lt Scrub or Scrub gt appears when turning the JOG dial which moves the cursor forward or reverse The time value or BAR BEAT also appears in realtime while scrubbing 4 Press the STOP key to return to the normal display The time display when ending the scrub process appears Variable Pitch Control This section describes the Variable Pitch Control feature to play or record programs at variable recorder speeds The VF160 can change the speed in 0 1 units within a 6 0 range Note that the key changes when changing the variable pitch speed Variable Pitch Control ON OFF When the vari pitch function is active the key is illuminated Press the VARI PITCH key The key lights up GREEN This means the feature is ON Press the VARI PITCH key once again The key lights OFF This means that the feature is OFF lt Precaution gt The variable pitch control can be turned ON OFF when the recorder is in the STOP PLAY modes Variable pitch control is not available when the recorder is recording even though the key is pressed Setting the Speed Note that t
217. i PHSORTA 1 z PeSOATA 2 3 BATA 4 Flashing lt Note gt qo Bie When making an audio CD if you select a program Be toy 4 PES or HO Kew which consumes more disc space than the recordable space of a CD RW CD R disc Disk Full appears on the display and you cannot select the program If you erase recorded data SETUP Press the ENTER YES key while ERASE and Sure are EAE LUARNING Jaek flashing After the key press the display changes as follows and the unit starts erasing the data As the erasing process is HE AEE going on the number of flashing increases SETUP R22 Save POM SCSI BG 1 i HERRER 10 After specifying the program s press the ENTER YES key while holding down the RECORD key The VF160 starts recording to the disc while the display shows the following screen aM The number of flashing increases When the recording ends Save Completed appears on the screen while the disc is automatically ejected from ae the CD RW drive When erasing is completed the display shows the same screen which appears when pressing the ENTER YES key after selecting CD DA on step 7 above So follow the same procedure from step 8 on page 121 11 When completed press the EXIT NO key or STOP key P i ree to quit the Setup mode e If you eject the disc Use the JOG dial to make Ejec
218. ial and press the EN TER YES key The setting is completed and the display returns to high light a single line as shown in step 1 above 4 To set another pair repeat steps 2 and 3 5 After completing all settings press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key to exit the SETUP mode lt Note gt If you control the even channel fader which is paired the following message appears Controlling the paired even channel fader does not affect the level E et et dos do i i eo eis do oud os is ds de c Fader Pair see eee ee ee eb eee G 139 lt Hints gt For paired fader channels besides fader control the following functions are controlled simulta neously Effect send level adjustment By pressing either of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for paired channels the icons for both channels start flash ing and you can control the effect send levels for both channels simultaneously using the JOG dial Effect send pre post setting By pressing either of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for paired channels the icons for both channels start flash ing and you can set pre or post for the effect sends of both channels simultaneously using the JOG dial Aux send level adjustment By pressing either of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for paired channels the icons for both channels start flash ing and you can control the Aux send levels for both channels simultaneously using the JOG dial Aux send pre pos
219. ial setting Off e Options Off 13 14 or 15 16 The channel in which the LED green is blinking is an Common to all programs in the same disc indication that EQ editing is possible in this channel and The setup content cannot be saved loaded as song the channel in which the LED is not lit is an indication data that EQ cannot be applied to this channel Although the setup content will not be held at switch If a channel that cannot be EQ editing had been selected off of power it can be saved as a scene memory the Can t Select message will blink to warn that the operation is ineffective The schematic below is an example of channels 15 16 setup as the compressor channel Se 1 Select Comp Channel in the menu selection display and press the ENTER YES key The currently set will flash Off will flash in the initial setting SETUP F2e Select Menu Fader Recall Off Pair Fader Set Phan tomP ower Come Channel Disk Format This is indicating that channels 15 and 16 are setup as the compressor channel 2 Select the desired comp Channel with the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key The selected item will be set Off Compressor can be applied only in CH Channel the master channel 13 14 The compressor can be applied to channels 13 14 and the master channel 15 16 The compressor can be a
220. ibutors as of August 2000 lt AUSTRIA gt NAME ATEC Audio u Videogeraete VertriebsgesmbH ADD Im Winkel 5 A 2325 Velm Austria TEL 43 2234 74004 FAX 43 2234 74074 lt BELGIUM gt NAME EML Sound Industries NV ADD Bijvennestraat 1A B3500 Hasselt Belgium TEL 32 11 232355 FAX 32 11 232172 lt DENMARK gt NAME SC Sound ApS ADD Malervej 2 DK 2630 Taastrup Denmark TEL 45 4399 8877 FAX 45 4399 8077 lt FINLAND gt NAME Noretron Oy Audio ADD P O Box 22 FIN 02631 Espoo Finland TEL 358 9 5259330 FAX 358 9 52593352 lt FRANCE gt NAME Musikengro ADD ZAC de Folliouses B P 609 01706 Les Echets France TEL 33 472 26 27 00 FAX 33 472 26 27 01 lt GERMANY gt NAME Studio sound amp Music GmbH ADD Industriestrasse 20 D 35041 Marburg F R Germany TEL 49 6421 92510 FAX 49 6421 925119 lt GREECE gt NAME Bon Studio S A ADD 6 Zaimi Street Exarchia 106 83 Athens Greece TEL 30 1 3809605 8 3302059 FAX 30 1 3845755 lt ICELAND gt NAME I D elrf electronic Ltd ADD ARMULA 38 108 REYKJAVIK ICELAND TEL 354 588 5010 FAX 354 588 5011 lt ITALY gt NAME General Music S p A ADD Via delle Rose 12 S Giovanni M RN Italy TEL 39 0541 959511 FAX 39 0541 957404 lt THE NETHERLANDS gt NAME IEMKE ROOS AUDIO B V ADD Kuiperbergweg 20 1101 AG Amsterdam The Netherlands TEL 31 20 697 212
221. ies out an elaborate reverb simulation with clear sounds through the H D L P Hi Density Logarithmic Processing which eliminates the mutual interference between the numerous integrated delay modules and reduce the impurity and girt of the sound AS e P ADVANCED SIGNAL PROCESSING H F A Harmonic Feedback Algorithm There is one of indispensable elements in the natural echo called Early Reflection Sound which is usually sacrificed in commercial reverb products in order to reduce costs In practice the Early Reflec tion Sound means the very first reverberated sound that bounces back from walls floors and ceilings of concert halls The entire reverb sound quality depends on this Early Reflection Sound and how closely it can resemble the real echo The H F A is an algorithm that enables the effect unit to reproduce a clear and natural Early Reflection Sound by applying an ideal harmonic feedback to each delay module H D L P Hi Density Logarithmic Processing The reverb sounds consist of lots of small delay elements combined in a complex way which are pro duced by many delay modules inside the effect unit In order to obtain smooth and comfortable reverb sounds it is very important to efficiently organize the relationship between each delay module and minimize negative mutual interference The H D L P is a technology which applies efficient logarith mic processing to each delay module so that they can work in t
222. ignal If the input signal exceeds a given level the threshold level the gain is decreased as the input signal level increases to reduce the dynamic range of the output signal lt Hints gt You can apply the built in compressor only to channels 13 through 16 and the master channel You can select the channels to be compressed between channel 13 14 and 15 16 by using Compressor channel setting in the Setup mode Youcan apply the compressor to the master channel anytime regardless of the compressor channel setting See the detailed information on page 140 for the Setup mode 54 lt Note gt You cannot apply the equalizer to the input channels that the compressor is applied to However you can apply both the equalizer and compressor to the master channel The following operations are assumed that the compres sor is applied to channels 13 and 14 1 Press the HI G F Q key while holding down the SHIFT key The compressor setting screen appears The message prompting to select a channel Select CH flashes as well as the CHSTATUS CH SEL indicators for the master channel and input channels 13 14 or 15 16 to which the compressor is applied flash Flashing GAH A Bde 2 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the desired channel You can now edit parameters of the compressor for the channel If two adjacent channels are fader paired pressing one of the CH STATU
223. ination program to which a WAV file is loaded You can select the program by using the JOG dial SETUP Fei Load WAL SCSI Dest POH Select PERJE EEEE aR PIE UP OOWwH JOG Sure Hit YES or WO Key 8 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key repeatedly until exiting the Setup mode To go back to the previous step or abort the operation you can also use the EXIT NO key or the STOP key When the screen shows Title and Size the selected program will be deleted and replaced with the WAV file loaded When the screen shows Title and New PGM the WAV file loaded will create a new program lt Note gt If the current drive does not have enough available space for loading the WAV file the size indication on the screen shows a negative value In such a case select a program that can be replaced with the WAV file loaded without causing the disk space shortage or delete unnecessary programs by the Delete PGM menu in the SETUP mode 7 After selecting the load destination program press the ENTER YES key When selecting a new program as the load destination by selecting an option showing Title and New PGM the load operation immediately starts When selecting an existing program as the load destination by selecting an option showing Title and Size Overwrite and Sure appear Pressing the ENTER YES key will start the load operation During the load operation the
224. ing Effect type table the following four parameters can be adjusted Adjust the effect return level 0 99 Adjust the length of reverberation Range 0 1 9 9 seconds Adjust the time from the original sound until reverberation begins Range 0 100 ms Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies Range 0 10 Adjust the volume of the early reflections Range 0 99 1 Eff Level 2 Delay Time 3 Feedback 4 Delay Bal 5 Rev Time Delay reverb effect parameters parameter type DELAY REVERB For effect types 25 28 of the preceding Effect type table the following four parameters can be adjusted Adjust the effect return level 0 99 Adjust the delay time Range 1 230 ms Adjust the number of delay repeats Range 0 99 Adjust the delay balance Range 0 99 Adjust the length of reverberation Range 0 1 9 9 seconds 1 Eff Level 2 Delay Time 3 Feedback 4 Hi Ratio 5 Filter Delay effect parameters parameter type DELAY For effect types 29 and 30 of the preceding Effect type table the following four parameters can be adjusted Adjust the effect return level 0 99 Adjust the delay time Range 1 680 ms Adjust the number of delay repeats Range 0 99 Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies Range 0 10 Adjust the tone of the delay sound Range L9 L1 OFF H1 H9 L1 L9 LPF larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency H1 H9 HPF larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency
225. ing down Using the S PDIF signal data is saved in 2 track unit Using the adat signal data is saved in 8 track unit When the data saving is completed Completed appears on the screen and the VF160 stops lt Note gt If you interrupts saving before completing the saved data is invalid 11 Stop the external recorder machine 12 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key repeatedly until exiting the Setup mode To cancel each operation or to return to the previous screen before pressing the ENTER YES key press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key Each press of the key returns to the previous screen and finally exits the Setup mode Fostex V I6 Bee Loading data using the S P DIF or adat digital signal You can load data using the S PDIF or adat digital signal via the DIGITAL DATA IN jack Use an external device that supports 44 1 kHz sampling frequency the same as the VF160 Connecting to an external device Connect the DIGITAL DATA IN jack to the digital output jack of the external digital device lt Notes gt e The DIGITAL DATA OUT jack accommodates either the S PDIF optical or adat digital signal selected Though the S PDIF optical and adat digital signal use the same connector shape the signal formats are different Do not do anything such as unplug the optical cable that interrupts the digital signal until the loading operation is completed Otherwise the
226. ion display and press e Initial setting 00 second e Setting range of preroll time 00 10 seconds in the ENTER YES key one second steps The currently set preroll time will flash 00 will flash in You can set the value for each Program individually the initial setting The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data AP _ The settings are maintained after you turn off the Select Menu power to the VF160 Teneo ce t Preroll time before the locate point can Ti 1 t l A Edi 1 t Plata 1 be set between 00 and 10 seconds aI a a FaMi 1 Pa Preroll Time Flashing 2 Input the desired preroll value with the JOG dial and press Hal nadie ay the current position is the ENTER YES key This point is located if the lt Gammmm The VF160 will be set to the Preroll time thus input current position is before the i locate point i i 4 4 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the This point is actually located Locate point stored in the memory key SETUP mode lt Note gt The preroll function is active when locating using the LOCATE key or in the auto return function It is not active when locating using the combination of the SHIFT PREV keys or the SHIFT NEXT keys or locating ABS 0 or REC END Setting MIDI sync output signal Midi Sync Out The Setting MIDI sync output signal menu enables you to
227. iscs has some restrictions as shown below CD RW disc E gt CD R disc E gt dise Recordable MiS ReWritable You can save record data to a disc as many times required Note that when saving new data it is re corded after the previously recorded data is erased You can save record data to a disc only once You cannot save data to a recorded disc You can of course load data as many times as required In other words every time you save new data all disc data is rewritten See Saving data described later lt Note gt A CD RW CD R disc on which VF160 data is recorded can only be played by Fostex machines Do not play it by non Fostex devices The drive or system used may be damaged However a CD R disc with audio CD format created by the Fostex machine can be played by general machines such as audio CD players If an audio CD is made using a CD RW disc it can be played back only by a player that supports CD RW playback You cannot playback such a disc by a conventional CD player that does not support CD RW playback lt About data writing and reading speeds for data save load gt The writing and reading speeds for data save and load of the VF160 are automatically set as below e Writing speed according to a CD RW drive used however the maximum speed is 8 times e Reading speed according to a CD RW drive used The writing speed depends on a CD RW drive but it is li
228. it Hard disk unit Cushion 3 Hold the connector section and gently pull out the two Cabin Connecrorsingimiiie harddisk 6 After checking that the cables etc are not sticking out from the main unit put the panel onto the hard disk and the case Align the position of screw holes on the panel case with the VF160 bottom panel screw holes and fix the panel case using the four screws to the VF160 main unit When the new hard disk is successfully assembled go to the next section Now format the unformatted hard Hard disk unit disk Connector 25 fostex VF GCO MET ee Formatting the Hard disk Carefully follow the instructions below to newly format the hard disk properly 1 Turn ON the VF 160 after plugging the power cable in the electric outlet The VF160 will startup Unformat will appear on the LCD The menu will automatically go to the SETUP mode The display showing the Disk Format menu appears Select Menu FaderFecall off Reserved FhamtomFower Off 2 Press the ENTER YES key The drive selection display appears IDE will be flashed Drive Select tasting RA SESI See eras FEW FF lil Hit YES or HO key 3 Press the ENTER YES key where the IDE is flashed The menu to select the format type appears represents the name of the drive Disk Format Format Tyre Select EE E EE E E EE ok FFWD i Hit WES or HO k
229. ition P iion You can adjust the pan or balance of each input chan Pan position an positon an posimon 5 center hard left hard right nel signal fed to the stereo outputs as well as fed to the Rec buss outputs The panpot for master channel con Controllable channels trols the L R level balance of the stereo outputs Channels 1 through 16 and the master channel Available values 1 Press the PAN key L10 hard left through C center to R10 hard right All channel settings are shown on the screen the default setting C for all channels The first time you bring up the channel parameter edit Values are displayed betweenL10andR10in21 steps screen the message prompting to select a channel Select but the actual pan setting is changed smoothly and CH flashes as well as all the CH STATUS CH SEL indica continuously as rotating the JOG dial tors on the panel flash From the second time on the previously selected channel f is selected and ready to be edited when bringing up the 4 To set another channel s pan repeat steps 2 and 3 above screen as shown in the drawing of step 2 below 5 After completing pan editing press the EXIT NO key The VF160 exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display Flashing 50 E VE 1Go Fotex Adjusting EQ The VF160 provides a 3 band equalizer section includ ing HI MID and LO bands You can control G gain F frequency
230. kes place Wait Erasing flashes onthe display while datais being erased Completed lights fostex VV F OO DET UNDO REDO Erase The erase procedure can be undone and redone with the UNDO REDO feature Data eased can be undone unerased by pressing the UNDO REDO key after ERASE The data will return to the pre erase status The data erased but undone unerased can be redone re erased by pressing the UNDO REDO key immediately after undoing the erase process The data will return to the post erase status up on the display when the data is successfully erased Note the following when executing the UNDO REDO 6 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key feature The LCD returns to the Normal Display prior to the editing mode lt Precautions gt The UNDO REDO feature is valid only when the recorder is in the STOP state UNDO REDO is no longer possible if the following procedures take place after ERASE lt Remember gt To erase all data between ABS O and REC END it is recommended that the time after REC END is set as the ERASE end point AUTO PUNCH OUT point to ensure that all the datais completely erased In such case move When data is newly recorded the current location of the recorder to the RECEND point When data is newly edited prior to setting the AUTO PUNCH OUT point and then When the AUTO PUNCH mode is ON and PLAY or press the PLAY key from that REC END point to move RECORD mod
231. key and adjust levels Note that there may be sudden level jumps depending on the fader positions If you do not adjust levels press the EXIT NO key e Initial setting Off e Options Off CH MST or CH amp MST You can set the value for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the VF160 1 Select Fader Recall in the menu a selection display and press the ENTER YES key The currently set will flash Off will flash in the initial setting Select Menu Save PEM Rererved Fader Fix Fader Recall Fair Fader Set 2 Input the desired item with the JOG dial and press the EN TER YES key The selected item will be set Off When scene is recalled the fader Initial setting position immediately prior to recalling the scene will be directly employed without recalling the setup figures of each channel fader and the master fader CH Channel When scene is recalled setup figures of each channel faders only will be recalled and not recall the master fader setup figure MST Master When scene is recalled the setup figure of the master fader only is recalled and the channel fader setup figures will not be recalled CH amp MST When scene is recalled each channel faders and the master fader set up figures will both be
232. l param eters such as setup of PANor EQ be sure to check that the Scene Sequence Mode explained later is switched Off Should the pa rameters be edited with this Pan setting 3 band equalizer setting Effect send level setting e Pre post selection of the effect send e Aux auxiliary send level setting AUX1 AUX2 MID G F Q Scene Sequence Mode switched On the parameters will be re turned to their original setting when VF160is operated in PLAY or STOP Refer to page 66 for On off of the Scene Sequence Mode e Pre post selection of the Aux auxiliary send Compressor setting e Fader level setting Channel view viewing only 2 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the desired channel lt Hints gt The current settings are shown together with the selected If a channel whose source is set to INPUT via the IN channel name The icon for the selected channel is flash PUT SEL setting is selected as the edit channel the ing indicating that you can edit it channel name is shown as below In the following example channel 9 which is set to INPUT is selected as the edit channel Flashing Lighting 3 Use the JOG dial to adjust panning Rotating the JOG dial to the left or right moves the pan position to the left or right respectively The following show examples of the pan settings Flashing Adjusting Pan F L4 HR es P
233. lay lt Hints gt e Thecontentsrecalled differ depending on the settings in the Fader recall menu in the SETUP mode See Settings for fader recall menu in the SETUP mode for the detailed information e Regardless of the current physical positions of chan nel and master faders audio is output at the fader position location when they were stored We suggest you turn the audio volume down when recalling a scene memory to prevent accidentally accessing high volume sound e When switching the display to the fader adjust level adjust or fader view screen the FADER ADJUST key may flashes when the fader recall setting is not set to Off This indicates that the fader position in the current scene does not match the physical fader position In such a case you can turn off the key by adjusting the fader to the position in the current scene or by adjusting the level to the current phisical position See the following description for details about the fader adjustment and level adjustment 62 Level adjust When recalling a scene memory if the recalled fader level does not match the current physical fader posi tion the red indicator of the FADER ADJUST key flashes you can adjust the level to match the current fader position 1 Press the FADER ADJUST key while holding down the SHIFT key The unit enters the Level adjust mode The fader icons appear on the display as well as flashing Sure The recal
234. led fader positions are shown as fader knob positions while the current fader positions are indi cated by gt and lt In the following example all recalled fader positions are at the lowest positions Flashing 2 Press the ENTER YES key The display shows Completed immediately followed by the Normal display after each actual internal fader po sition is set to match the corresponding physical fader position The flashing indicators of the FADER ADJUST turn off With the example above all actual faders are set to mini mum Fader adjust When recalling a scene memory if the recalled fader level does not match the current physical fader posi tion the red indicator of the FADER ADJUST key flashes youcan move the physical faders to match the current fader positions of the scene The following description is assumed that Fader recall setting of the SETUP mode is set to CH amp MST 1 Press the FADER ADJUST key alone The unit enters the Fader adjust mode The fader icons appear on the display as well as flashing Select CH The recalled fader positions are shown as fader knob po sitions while the current fader positions are indicated by gt and lt Flashing If you press the FADER ADJUST key when the fader recall setting is set to Off the display shows Fader Recall Off and then returns to the Normal display 2 Selectthe ch
235. leted appears on the screen lt Note gt If you quit loading before completing the loaded data is invalid 10 Stop the external DAT or adat machine 11 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key repeatedly until exiting the Setup mode To cancel each operation or to return to the previous screen before pressing the ENTER YES key press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key Each press of the key returns to the previous screen and finally exits the Setup mode 101 Fostex V 60 Bee Saving Loading data using SCSI MO zip You can save load song data using a SCSI backup disk MO zip Normally a backup SCSI disk should be formatted by the backup format for backup use only You can also save data to or load data from a WAV file on a SCSI disk formatted for DOS format for computer use Since song data written in a WAV file can be read by a computer as well as be loaded in the VF160 you can use such data with a music software For details about save load using an external SCSI type CD RW drive or the optional CD RW drive Model CD 1A see page 114 lt Note gt You can save load scene memories and scene event memories only to from a FDMS 3 formatted SCSI disk Scene memories and scene event memories can be saved or loaded when using a SCSI device except WAV Connecting to an external device Connect the unit s SCSI connector half pitch 50 pin type for Macintosh to an external SCSI device B
236. lit in the following example all the CH STATUS CH SEL keys should be lit A channel whose CH STATUS CH SEL key is unlit will not be mixed down 1 Select the desired program to be mixed down To select the desired program press the PGM SEL key and select the program using the JOG dial then press the ENTER YES key 2 Set the MASTER fader to the 0 position 3 Press the PLAY key to start playback from the beginning of the selected program 4 During playback adjust track levels using the channel fad ers as well as pan EQ and effect settings if necessary You can monitor the mix down sound in other words stereo buss signals through the headphones by raising the PHONES control You can record the exact sound you are monitoring by executing the actual mixdown re cording as described in Performing internal mixdown record ing You may playback the program repeatedly to tailor the sound by setting pan EQ and effects until you are satis fied For details about setting pan EQ and effects see the main owner s manual lt Hint gt You can make internal mixdown recording with the Scene sequence function active By executing the scene sequence after creating the scene event map you can make mixdown recording while playing back materials according to the scene event map However only the scenes that are set for the direct recording can be recalled by the scene sequence Note that the sc
237. ll and Sure flashing as below Program options PO1 to P99 an individual Program cc poo Track options An i Po SCST When using S PDIF or adat a Tracks 1 8 Tracks 1 16 Tracks 1 24 Tracks 9 16 Tracks 9 24 or Tracks 17 24 Delete All When using a SCSI disk Sure All tracks 1 24 is selected automatically You can select tracks individually when loading a WAV file lt Note gt You cannot load data from a CD RW CD R disc by Press the ENTER YES key while the above screen is the WAV file format shown All backup data recorded in the disk are erased and then the save operation starts 1 Press the SETUP key to enter the Setup mode The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup menu 2 Use the JOG dial to select Load PGM and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the device from which the data is loaded IDE flashes SETUP kzl OPT SCS Flashing 1 RELIJ Hit YES or HO Key 3 Press the REWIND key to select SCSI and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the program to be loaded The backup number currently selected flashes while the data size of the program is shown While a backup number is flashing you can select the desired program to be loaded If a disk has more than one program saved you can select the desired program by using the JOG dial Load POM SCSI ce PON
238. load operation Note that loaded data before the error message appears is all invalid Load PEM SCSI jf Patek p kkk Load Hot Completed Error occurred EXIT Hit YES or HO Kes Fostex V 60 Bee Making an audio CD This section describes how to make an audio CD CD DA using a CD RW CD R disc from mixed down materials created by the internal mixdown mode See details for the internal mixdown mode on page xx The Save PGM menu in the Setup mode which is used for saving song data is also used for making an audio CD CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point When making an audio CD using the VF160 mixed down ARSO BS 06M Hana materials on the current drive are recorded to a CD RW mixed down song data CD R disc by the CD DA format Only data between the CLIPBOARD IN and CLIPBOARD OUT points of the mixed down program is recorded to a ABSO ABS 00M 10S 00F ABS 06M 00S OOF CD RW CD R disc You can record more than one material j to a disc successively In this case a 2 second silent space is automatically inserted between materials as shown in Figure 2 CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point mixed down song data lt Figure 1 gt CLIPBOARD CLIPBOARD IN OUT point point lt Note gt If an audio CD is made using a CD RW disc it can be played Program XX data Program YY data Program ZZ data back only by a player that supports CD RW playback You i i cannot playback such a disc by a
239. luding all real tracks can be erased if assuming that they are real tracks To erase data it needs to first be on a real track When erasing a selected section between ABS 0 REC END END of recording point remains unchanged as shown in the figure below Only the section erased of data meaning there will be no sound on that section will be erased Once the data is erased there will be more disk space remaining on the disk more storage space to save new data AUTOPUNCHINpoint By Tea OUT point Any real track i i Erase Any real track Erasing from a voluntarily specified point to REC END All data from a voluntarily specified point other than ABS 0 to REC END is erased from the currently started program Both mono tracks and multiple tracks can be erased as in the case described to the left When erasing all tracks to REC END the REC END point moves forward However the REC END point may not move forward Refer to lt Precautions gt on this page for more details even when erasing data on multiple tracks that are not mono tracks or all tracks Note that the disk space remaining increases as in the case to the left after data is erased from a section AUTO PUNCH pede AUTO PUNCH dae REC END Erase Silence ABS 0 REC END lt Precautions Upon Erasing Data gt As in the case below if data is recorded on real tracks 1 to 7 and data is erased from tracks 1 and 2 then the RECEND which the V
240. m or pasting to the clipboard Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to CHECK CHANGE the parameters saved in MARK7 This can be used as Locate Memory 39 A RTN A PLAY SCENE SEQ Key Every time this key is pressed the mode switches from Auto Play gt Auto Return gt Auto Repeat gt OFF and this mode is shown on the LCD 20 p AUTO PLAY AUTO RETURN AUTO orn REPEAT Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to turn ON OFF the scene sequence When scene sequence is switched on the normal display section S will change to reversed black and white display HOLD gt Key This key is used to hold the parameter time or BAR BEAT CLK when the key is pressed The parameter is simultaneously displayed and is editable Whenthiskeyis pressed at editing of the value the digit can be moved to the right or below and if this key is pressed while pressing on the SHIFT key it can be moved to the left or above 41 STORE Key This key is used to store the edited parameters time or BAR BEAT CLK to the editing point AUTO PUNCH POINT etc MARK point LOCATE MEMORY etc 42 EDIT Key This key is used to copy past and edit the sound The following 5 types of sound editing types are possible a Copy Clip b Move Clip c Copy Paste or Move Paste d Erase e Track Exchange 43 UNDO REDO Key This key is used to copy past and edit s
241. may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings E ISO FOSE Precautions About power supply Be sure to connect the VF160 to the power supply specified in the Specifications section of this owner s manual Donot usean AC outlet of any other voltage Do not connect the VF160 to the same AC outlet to which devices that could generate noise such as a large motor or dimmer or the devices that consume alarge amount of power suchas an air conditioning system or large electric heater are connected If you use the VF160 in an area with a different power voltage first consult your dealer or the nearest Fostex service station You can use the VF160 with a power frequency of 50Hz or 60Hz Itis very dangerous to use a power cord that is frayed or damage In such a case stop using the VF160 immediately and ask your dealer to repair the cord To avoid possible electric shock and damage to the VF160 avoid contact with water or other liquids or do not handle the power plug while your hands are wet To prevent possible electric shock and damage to the VF160 do not remove the main unit cover or reach the inside the VF160 Do not let water or other liquid or metal objects such as pins accidentally enter the inside of the VF160 because this may lead to electric shock or damage Should water enter the inside of the VF160 remove the power plug from AC outlet and consult your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX servi
242. me appears according to the currently selected time base In such case either shorten the COPY DATA or MOVE DATA by the time it is in the excess or erase unnecessary data or programs from the erase to secure enough disk space Then repeat the paste procedure Refer to the Erasing a Program on page 71 for instructions on how to erase a program in terms of the ERASE instructions to erase unnecessary data lt Please note gt For regular copy amp paste or move amp paste as shown in Figure 1 the CLIPBOARD IN point of the data which was copy clipped or move clipped onto the clipboard is aligned with the AUTO PUNCH IN point and pasted CLIPBOARD IN CLIPBOARD OUT lt Figure 1 gt Due to this as shown in Figure 2 inthe case whereby data registered in the CLIPBOARD is the actual sound point and head of the measure is behind this then even though you attempted to paste this head of the measure in alignment with this previously head it will be pasted off alignment by this procedure due to the CLIPBOARD IN ALIGN SEL function CLIPBOARD IN POINT I ALIGN SEL POINT lt Actual sound point gt pe EEE LE eee ose ese ar eke se oe eee eee gt lt Head of the measure gt CLIPBOARD OUT POINT vi t lt Head of the measure gt lt Figure 2 gt AUTO PUNCH IN POINT 74 Toalign the head of the measure for pasting together with sound data in front of the measure the ALIGN SEL function of V
243. me you bring up the channel parameter edit screen the message prompting to select a channel Select CH flashes as well as all the CH STATUS CH SEL indicators on the panel flash From the second time on the previously selected channel is selected and ready to be edited when bringing up the screen as shown in the drawing of step 2 below Flashing 2 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the desired channel The current settings are shown together with the selected channel name The icon for the selected channel is flash ing indicating that you can edit it Flashing Flashing If two adjacent channels are fader paired pressing one of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for these channels selects both channels and you can set PRE or POST for both channels simultaneously See page 138 for details about how to pair faders of adjacent two channels 3 Use the JOG dial to switch the selection The icon color and label changes according to the selec tion as shown below Ea The pre fader signal is fed to the AUX SEND jack The post fader signal is fed to the AUXSEND jack Controllable channels Channels 1 through 16 Available options PRE or PST post default all channels PST 4 Tosetanother channel s pre postselection repeatsteps 2 and 3 above fostex F GO Me 5 After completing the pre post selection press the EXIT NO k
244. med track changes to input at the punch in point and returns to source at the punch out point You can check or adjust the record level and timing in the rehearsal mode as many times as you want until you are satisfied 4 Press the STOP key to stop the VF160 38 e AUTO PUNCH IN OUT take 1 After rehearsal is completed locate the point immediately before starting the recording as with step 2 of AUTO PUNCH IN OUT rehearsal 2 Press the RECORD key while the PLAY key is depressed to start recording TAKE RHSL changes to TAKE The actual recording is made between the PUNCH IN and PUNCH OUT points At the PUNCH OUT point recording as well as the AUTO PUNCH mode stops PE 1 6801 SOO SS Light up 3 Press the STOP key to stop the VF160 Tips Undo Redo If you are not satisfied with the take you can rerecord after pressing the UNDO REDO key Es RISO FOSE Track Exchange Up to now we changed the input channel according to the track to record However there is also a way to record all tracks with one input jack You can do this by exchanging a recorded track that was recorded normally with an unrecorded track This procedure is called Track Exchange This feature is convenient to use when recording with all G and H INPUT jacks that can be connected with a condenser mic or balanced output for example Note that the VF160 comes with 16 tracks plus 8 additional tra
245. mited to 8 times For save load of the VF160 data use discs that can be written at 4 times or higher speed Do not use discs that only can be written at real time or twice speed 114 A VIO FOSE Save load of Song Data Using a CD RW drive Using a CD RW drive in addition to make backup of song data as with other SCSI devices such as zip and MO drives you can also make an audio CD e Save r 7 TkK1 amp 2 amp 38 amp 48 amp 58 amp 6 amp 7 Save You can only a single selected program data toa disc RRR Rr ener nk feos regardless of the program data amount amp 14 amp 15 amp 16 amp 17 amp 18 amp You cannot save more than one program data even if Beadad kia there are enough disc space However you can save a program data to more than one disc if the data amount is larger than a disc space 2 As shown on the right you can save almost all neces Program 1 P01 Program 2 P02 sary information such as song data of all tracks real and additional tracks and mixer scene data as with using other SCSI devices Program 99 P01 Current drive of the VF 16 TrkK1 amp 2 amp 3 amp 48 amp 5 amp 6 amp 7 e Load Unlike data load using other SCSI drives data loading using a CD RW drive is taken place after a new pro gram is created in the current drive the load destina tion You cannot overwrite an existing program with the loaded data The newly created program is number
246. n S Punch Out 4 Recording is canceled and playback takes place when the foot switch is stepped on again punch out Recording Track i mi Playback Record Playback 1 Pressthe PLAY key fromthe pointimmediately before starting the recording and then playback 2 Press the RECORD key while the PLAY key is depressed to start recording punch in 3 Recording is canceled and playback takes place if only the PLAY key is pressed punch out Punch IN OUT with Foot switch Step on the foot switch Step on the foot switch again Punch In Punch Out Recording Tracki 1 p Playback Record Playback 1 Connect a Fostex Model 8051 foot switch to the FOOT SW jack on the rear panel of the VF160 0o OO Foot Switch Tips Rehearsal Step on the foot switch while the STOP key is depressed to start rehearsing the recording Rhrsl On will appear on the LCD then RHSL will light ON ness MS Poi 064 SHG ENNNANNNN flashing Rehearsal instructions are the same as recording with the foot switch However stepping on the foot switch will go to input monitor and stepping onit again will cancelit Tocancel the rehearsal mode step on the foot switch again while the STOP key is depressed Rhrsl Off will appear on the LCD then RHSL will light OFF Tips Foot Switch Use the optional Fostex Model 8051 or a universal foot switch of the unlatched type
247. n the SHIFT key z HADAL After SCENE SQ ON is briefly shown on the screen the Init Mix Normal display appears frvstesesesteateanennees dfrceeeeeseceseenseceaees Op Each time you press the ARTNAPLAY SCENE SEQ key while holding down the SHIFT key ON and OFF alternates The unit starts playback with scene number When the scene sequence mode is set to ON the scene 00 Init Mix number indicator on the Normal display is highlighted When OFF it is not highlighted HES TRAP TRE SCEHE SEG OH The unit recalls scene number 2 XXX at Olm 30s and continues playback The unit recalls scene number 5 YYY atO5m 00s and continues playback lt Hint gt The unit continues playback with the scene number recalled by the last event memory Executing the scene sequence Therefore if you want to recall scene number 00 again When the scene sequence mode is set to ON the scenes after recalling scene number 05 you have to create the will be recalled according to the scene event map dur last event memory that recalls scene number 00 at the ing playback desired time lt Notes gt e When executing the scene sequence the fader positions are recalled according to the fader recall mode in the SETUP mode the default is Off For example if you set the fader recall mode to CH amp MST both the channel and master faders are automatically recalled everytime the current scene chang
248. n the screen 2 Press the STORE key The key lights up in red and HitAny Memory Keys appears on the screen LocaTES HAHA IMS Ss24r 99 5F Hit Ana Memora Kess 3 Press the LOCATE EVT MEM key while holding down the SHIFT key Entry EVT where shows the number appears for a short time while the time held in step 1 is entered in the event memory Viewing the event memories 1 Press the SCENE STORE MAP key while holding down the SHIFT key The display shows the event number select screen for the scene event map in which you can view and check the event memories created by the procedure above The unit for event memories ABS Bar Beat Clk or MTC depends on the time base setting msHehk z BERESMeeSae HS Beha TMSeSshe G4 Gehl 2nsesee 2 Rotate the JOG dial to scroll through the event memorylist 36 3 After viewing the screen press the EXIT NO key The display returns to the Normal display lt Hint gt You can delete unnecessary event memories See Edit ing the event map in Advanced mixer operations de scribed later for details Locate by specifying the event memory 1 Press the SCENE STORE MAP key while holding down the SHIFT key to bring up the event map screen 2 Usethe JOG dialto select the desired eventnumber and press the LOCATE key The unit locate the selected memory point and stops while
249. n turning the JOG dial 6 Press the ENTER YES key Exchange appears on the LCD and the exchange process takes place instantaneously Completed appears on the LCD when the exchange process is completed Track Exchanse Then the system returns to the Normal Display Daenen E EP TET M nes Benes Exchange 2 Press the ENTER YES key The track selection menu of the Track Exchange mode appears Come leted Tips Select Err appears on the LCD and the exchange process is invalidated if the same track is selected for the track to exchange from and track to exchange and ENTER YES is pressed Ex 03 lt gt 03 and so on 39 Fostex F CO BE After recording with DIRECT Recording adjust the play level equalize the sound or add some effects to the audio sound of track 1 16 This section describes how to adjust the level PAN equalizer effect send level and effect Level Adjustment Use the Channel Fader to adjustthe play level of each channel Use the Master Fader to adjust the stereo OUT level of the output signal of the sounds mixed Tips Master Level Check the stereo OUT level with the L R level meter on the LCD If the output level is too high the output will distort Adjust the Master Fader so it does not exceed 0 on the L R level meter PAN Adjustment e lt Caution gt If you must edit channel parameters such as setup of PAN or EQ be
250. nd left of mono tracks mean the same thing therefore the numbers can be reversed and still mean the same thing In other words 04 lt gt 01 and 01 lt gt 04 mean the same thing This representation means that tracks 1 and 4 will be exchanged regardless of which number comes first Le lt Caution gt If you select the same track s for both the left and right columns for example 04 lt gt 04 01 amp 02 lt gt 01 amp 02 or 01 08 lt gt 01 08 you cannot carry outa track exchange Select Err appears on the display and the display returns to the previous one Press the ENTER YES key The tracks are instantly exchanged Completed appears on the display when the tracks are successfully exchanged Then the LCD returns to the original time base display Fostex VF OoO eee Chapter 5 Features Application Applications of DIRECT RECORD This section describes applications of the DIRECT RECORD feature DIRECT RECORD while listening to the input signal DIRECT RECORD basically takes place with the play TRACK started for all the channel faders However it is also possible to start INPUT signals A to H Here we will DIRECT RECORD to tracks 1 to 16 while monitoring the counter and listening to a rhythm machine in this case a drum machine from input H Recording source Guidance source INPUTA F INPUT H AAAA Ao Tat w
251. nd the external digital equipment in some cases may not be able to input a continuous digital signal As a counter measure the sync signal should be set to Free by the Slave mode setting menu Using this setting the VF160will enter self operation by the internal clock after completion of chase lock and it will be possible to supply a stable digital signal to the external equipment Under this setting when MTC drift between the master recorder and slave recorder exceeds 10 frames the VF160 will assume that chase lock has been disengaged and the slave recorder will carry out position matching again with the master unit re chase operation During the re chase operation sound output will be muted and the digital signal will also be interrupted If it is within 10 frames the slave recorder will continue to run while admitting this drift XR Execution of recording 1 Carry out various recordings while the recorder is chase locked to the sequence software lt Note gt Chase lock of the VF160 by MTC only is permissible when speed difference of the MTC from the master is within 5 6 Against the MTC within this range variable pitch will be constantly applied internally for chasing Chase lock however will not function against MTC at a speed difference outside this range Also when the master speed difference is large it is advised to let the VF160 learn the master speed by entering PLAY prior to reco
252. nder the above Confirmation display select the tempo map which is to be changed and press the ENTER YES key which is to be erased and press the ENTER YES key The same as before tempo value will flash In the same way as before tempo value will flash and DEL will be shown aside it 2 Input the desired tempo with the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key 3 Upon completing registering press the EXIT NO key or laa Set F gra a STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode AiBAR LS J 5 HAZBARIJ a Insert Hew Ewent 2 Press the F FWD key and select DEL then press the EN TER YES key The selected tempo map will be erased 3 Upon completing registering press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode lt Note gt You cannot register the OO1BAR 1 4 4 120 Setting the Metronome function Click Setting the Metronome function menu allows you to determine whether or not the VF160 outputs a metronome sound from track 16 during playback or recording Turning the Metronome function on enables you to record your performance while playing the instrument accompanying the metronome sound lt Note gt Metronome sound will be output from track 16 For this reason when the metronome function is activated a new sound source cannot be recorded on the track to which the metronome sound is to be output or sound recorded on this track cannot be pla
253. nformation Field List 42 READ Refer to MMC Response Information Field List 44 LOCATE LOCATE to Setting Data 46 SEARCH CUE REVIEW 1 60 times 47 SHUTTLE CUE REVIEW 1 60 times 4C MOVE Refer to MMC Response Information Field List 4D ADD Refer to MMC Response Information Field List 4E SUBTRACT Refer to MMC Response Information Field List MMC Response Information Field List Command 01 SELECTED TIME CODE READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT 03 REQUESTED OFFSET READ WRITE 04 ACTUAL OFFSET READ 08 GP 0 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT 09 GP 1 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT OA GP 2 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT OB GP 3 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT 0C GP 4 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT 0D GP 5 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT 0E GP 6 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT OF GP 7 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT 48 MOTION CONTROL TALLY READ 4C RECORD MODE READ WRITE 4E TRACK RECORD STATUS READ 4F TRACK RECORD READY READ WRITE MASKED WRITE 51 RECORD MONITOR READ WRITE Inquiry Message List IDENTITY REQUEST FO 7E lt channel gt 06 01 F7 IDENTITY REPLY FO 7E lt channel gt 06 02 51 01 00 13 02 F7 51 Fostex ID 01 00 Device family code 13 02 Device family number VF160 oe eee Software version 148 es VAS Fostex Maintenance Cleaning the exterior For normal cleaning use a soft dry cloth Fo
254. ng Pong RECORD By using BUSS RECORD it is possible to select a maximum of 15 source channels when recording to 1 track anda maximum of 14 source channels when recording to 2 tracks Here we will ping pong record the sound recorded on tracks 1 14 onto tracks 15 and 16 for temporary mix down Ping pong RECORD refers to the process in which the sound of several tracks are mixed and then recorded on another track SSS SST A AAA oKeolololeley ye SS E a E L Preparations to record 1 Press the INPUT SEL key ORANGE Flashing The display to select INPUT TRACK appears Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch9 ch16 so it flashes GREEN TRACK Press the BUSS SOURCE key GREEN Flashing The display to select the source channel appears Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch1 ch14 Ch1 8 and ch9 14 are set to the source channel Press the BUSS REC TRK key RED Flashing The display to select the REC track appears Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch15 and ch16 RED Flashing Tracks 15 and 16 are set to the READY track Press the EXIT NO key to return to the Normal Display Press the RECORD key to go to the input monitor RED Flashing Setthech15 16 fader and PAN thatis used to monitor the REC track Set the ch15 PAN to the LEFT L and ch16 PAN to t
255. ng playback To set the BPM value to follow the tempo map 1 Press the EFF2 key and use the JOG dial to select L31 MonoBpmDL or L32 Pan BpmDL 2 Select BPM for the editing parameter and rotate the JOG dial clockwise If you furthermore rotate the dial clockwise after the value reaches 250 which is the maximum value the BPM value field shows M where shows the tempo value at the current position while M shows map 3 After setting the BPM value to M press the EXIT NO key to quit the effect edit mode lt Note gt The operation above assumes that the appropriate tempo map is set in the SETUP mode If you carry out the operation above with the default tempo map tempo 120 the BPM value is set to 120 If you do not want to reflect the tempo map value set to a value with no M Short delay effect parameters parameter type SHORT DELAY For effect type 33 of the preceding Effect type table the following four parameters can be adjusted 1 Eff Level Adjust the effect return level 0 99 2 Delay Time Adjust the delay time Range 0 1 9 9 ms 10 99 ms 100 200 ms 3 Feedback Adjust the number of delay repeats Range 0 99 4 Hi Ratio Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies Range 0 10 5 Filter Adjust the tone of the delay sound Range L9 L1 OFF H1 H9 L1 L9 LPF larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency H1 H9 HPF larger numbers will raise the cut
256. ng pong recording want to ascertain the hard disk format information L Please read page 86 J Please read page 137 J 7 want to apply protect on a recorded program want to exchange the hard disk Please read page 133 Please read page 24 J f want to use the recorded sound in the computer want to make event map of the scenes Please read page 108 J Please read page 64 J want to setup PAN want to ascertain the recording functions of VF160 L Please read pages 40 and 50 Please read page 9 J a N w want to delete an unnecessary program want to operate the Adat Mixer Mode Please read page 71 L Please read page 95 want to locate to a point previous to the desired point Please read page 130 VE CO Mle Table of Contents Safety ISM UCHON vaceetscesiistenecpecedadesdibsteeesee vedi 2 PreCaullOnS cnt ha soit tote eile eee 3 Chapter 1 Basic Features of VF 160 INMPOQUCHON EEEE febed esd Beskid Mish ithe ede dven aha 8 Product FOALUICS ccscccessccsscsssscenscsessesessessesecasessaseesseseseseasessees 8 Before OPC ratiG csccecceccsssecessssreenesecestsnesessssenneneenes 9 TWO RECORDING MOde ssscssssesesescescsseseseceecssecereseeeseees 9 RECORDING SYSteM eeessesecesccsseesereeceeceescesceeserseceeeeeees 11 PROGRAM eeeeeeeeeeees e REMAIN Indicator CHSTATUS CH SEL K y cccsssssssssesesessssssssssssesesesesensees 13 e TIME BASE
257. ng the UNDO REDO key after Copy amp Paste or Move amp Paste The data will return to the pre paste status when undone unpasted e Data pasted but undone unpasted can be redone re pasted by pressing the JNDO REDO key immediately after undoing the paste process The data will return to the post paste status when re done re pasted Note the following when executing the UNDO REDO feature lt Caution gt The UNDO REDO feature is valid only when the recorder isin the STOP state UNDO REDO is no longer possible if the following procedures take place after Copy amp Paste or Move amp Paste Please Wait flashes while the data is being pasted Completed lights up when the data has been successfully 1 When data is newly recorded 2 When data is newly edited pasted 3 When the AUTO PUNCH mode is ON and PLAY or 9 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key RECORD mode is effected and the point has already The system exits from the edit mode and returns to the passed the AUTO PUNCH IN point original time base display 4 When the power is turned OFF 5 When program selection takes place lt Caution gt Note that Copy amp Paste or Move amp Paste is not possible unless there is enough disk space to UNDO REDO as explained in the next section When attempting to paste to a disk that does not have enough disk space Over Time appear on the display and the insufficient ti
258. nnel to which the compressor cannot be applied a warning message Can t select will flash and the operation will be cancelled The following screen shows that you can apply the com pressor to channels 13 14 and the master channel Channel view You can see the current setting information for chan nels 1 through 16 via the Channel view screen 1 Channel on off 2 Fader levels 3 Send levels and pre post selections for EFF1 EFF2 AUX1 and AUX2 4 Pan positions 5 Signal destination stereo busses or Rec busses 1 Press the LO G key while holding down the SHIFT key The channel view screen appears The first time you bring up the channel parameter edit screen the message prompting to select a channel Select CH flashes as well as all the CH STATUS CH SEL indica tors on the panel flash From the second time on the screen shows the status in formation of the previously selected channel when bring ing up the screen as shown in the drawing of step 2 be low CH WIEW Et onl EFF Flashing Select CH ET pa FTE Arm Crud cH a a2 eign pe ane cee F 2 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the desired channel The current setting information is shown together with the channel name TRACE 1 oOo ON OD 55 If two adjacent channels are fader paired when press ing the CH STATUS CH SEL key for the even channel the
259. nnot register the OO1BAR of OO1BAR 4 43 lt Note gt Take care because this procedure wipes out the tempo setting as well as time signature setting Clearing All Time Signature Tempo Data lt Note gt Be careful because this procedure wipes out the tempo setting as well as time signature setting Under the above Confirmation display select All Clear and press the ENTER YES key A following display of All Clear SURE will flash This indicates the standby mode for clearing all signature setting data and the tempo data SETUP Rai BB2BAR Offset BRIBAR 4 4 BESBAR 3 42 Insert Hew E All Clear t Flashing Press the ENTER YES key Except for the initial setting OO1BAR 4 4 J other time signature settings and the tempo setting will be cleared at the same time Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode Changing the Bar Offset Figure 1 Under the above Confirmation display select O0O2BAR Offset and press the ENTER YES key The 002 display will change to flashing SETUP Fel Sismature Set eee Offset HEIBAR 4 4 HESBAR 3 4 Insert Hew Event All Clear Flashing 2 Input the desired offset value with the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key Offset value can be input in the 2 through 9 range 3 After correction press the EXIT NO key
260. ns that should be taken so that the grounding or polarization means of an appliance is not defeated 12 Power Cord Protection Power supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them paying particular attention to cords at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the appliance 13 Cleaning The appliance should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer 14 Nonuse Periods The power cord of the appliance should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time 15 Object and Liquid Entry Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings 16 Damage Requiring Service The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when A The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or B Objects have fallen or liquid has been spilled into the appliance or C The appliance has been exposed to rain or D The appliance does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance or E The appliance has been dropped or the enclosure damaged 17 Servicing The user should not attempt to service the appliance beyond that described in the operating instructions All other servicing should be referred to qualified service openings or placed in a built in installation such as a bookcase personnel or cabinet that
261. nt to make the recalled fader posi tions of a scene memory effective set the Fader recall setting properly according to your requirement See SETUP mode on page 137 for details about the fader recall setting lt Hint gt If the fader recall setting of the SETUP mode is set to CH the display shows the screen as below when the unit enters the fader adjust mode indicating all the channel fader positions are recalled while the master fader po sition is not recalled Moving the master fader in this mode directly affects the actual fader level 63 Direct recall of ascene memory Besides recalling a scene memory by selecting the de sired scene from the list as described above you can recall a scene directly lt Note gt You can directly recall only the scene memories following to the current scene For example if the current scene number is 05 while scene memories are stored in scene numbers 01 through 10 you can directly recall scene numbers 06 through 10 Also note that scene number 00 cannot be recalled 1 Press the SCENE RECALL key while holding down the SHIFT key Every time you press the SCENE RECALL key while hold ing down the SHIFT key the next scene is recalled You cannot use the direct recall function When there is no scene that stores data other than scene number 00 orwhen the highest scene number is recalled If you carry out the above operation the display will
262. nterclockwise respectively Rear Panel eh AUX SEND 1 2 Jack External effector or other devices are connected to output the AUX SEND 1 2 signals Standard Output Level 10dBV Use a Y cable as shown below to connect an external effector since the 6 TRS Phones jack is used TIP To Effect 1 Aux1 GND RING AUX2 To Effect 2 62 ST OUT L R Jack Master recorders and other devices are connected to output stereo L R signals Standard Output Level 10dBV Connector RCA pin 63 MIDI IN Jack Connect tothe MIDI OUT jack of an external MIDI device MIDI control signals such as MMC MIDI Machine Control is mainly input Connector DIN 5 PIN MIDI OUT Jack Connect to the MIDI IN jack of an external MIDI device MIDI synchronization signals such as MTC MIDI Time Code and MIDI clock signals amp song position pointers are mainly output Connector DIN 5 PIN 65 DIGITAL DATA IN Jack Connect to OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT S P DIF or adat DIGITAL OUT of an external digital device for signal input to the VF160 This is used to load DAT adat song data Connector Square optical 66 DIGITAL DATA OUT Jack Connect to OPTICAL DIGITAL IN S P DIF or adat DIGITALIN of an external digital device for signal output from the VF160 This is used to save DAT adat song data Connector Square optical 67 FOOT SW Jack Punch IN OUT option by connec
263. o output busses Channel mute and Solo function In the Normal display pressing a CH STATUS CH SEL key mutes the corresponding channel The CH STATUS CH SEL key for the muted channel is unlit Pressing the key again releases muting and lights the key If two adjacent channels are fader paired pressing one of the CHSTATUS CHSEL key forthe two channels mutes both channels Also pressing the CH STATUS CH SEL key while holding down the SHIFT key alternates on and off of the solo for that channel Master channel mute While the Normal display is shown pressing a CH STATUS CHSEL key for the master channel mutes the stereo out put signals The CH STATUS CH SEL key of the master channel is unlit Pressing the key again releases muting and lights the key 49 Light in orange Light in orange Adat Mixer Mode Input monitoring of all tracks Inthe normal display mode every time the INPUT SEL key is pressed with the SHIFT key depressed down the Adat Mixer Modewill alternately switch on off The input moni tor READY of all tracks will simultaneously switch on off The Adat Mixer Mode is a convenient for example when recording by connecting a VF160 to a personal computer installed with an adat optical sound card In this way the VF160 can be used in four roles Asan AUDIO track monitor mixer using faders of ch1 8 As an AD the level adjusted by TRIM is possible in low latency monitoring As a monitor mixer
264. o adjacent channels are fader paired pressing one of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for these channels se lects both channels and you can adjust levels for both channels simultaneously See page 138 for details about how to pair faders of ad jacent two channels 3 Use the JOG dial to control the send level The numeric value and the marker position of the rotary pot icon change according to the current level Controllable channels Channels 1 through 16 and the master level Available values 00 to 99 dB the default setting channels 1 through 16 00 master level 80 4 Tosetanother channel s sendlevel repeatsteps 2 and3 above 5 After completing send level editing press the EXIT NO key The VF160 exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display 52 Selecting pre post of Effect sends You can select whether the pre fader or post fader sig nal is sent from each channel 1 to 16 to the effect processor If you select Post the signal adjusted by the channel fader is sent to the effect processor is also lowered If you select Pre the signal that is not affected by the channel fader is sent to the effect processor so even if you lower the channel fader to minimum the sig nal can be sent to the effect processor 1 Press the EFF1 EFF2 key while holding down the SHIFT key Each time you press the EFF1 EFF2 key while holding down the SHIFT key the pre pos
265. o import a data file edited by a computer to the VF160 lt Important notes for using a WAV file gt About backup disks The save load by a WAV file can be done only by using a disk DOS formatted with FAT16 The VF160 executes the save load of a WAV file when it recognizes the disk DOS formatted with FAT16 The VF160 cannot recognizes a disk DOS formatted with FAT32 eYou cannot DOS format a disk from the Disk Format menu in the SETUP mode A backup disk that handles WAV files must be DOS formatted with FAT16 by a personal computer in advance When a disk larger than 2 GB is DOS formatted with FAT16 the disk is partitioned at the 2 GB maximum size In such a case the VF160 only recognizes the first partition and does not recognize the following partition s Therefore the maximum available size of a backup disk for the VF160 is 2 GB To avoid an accidental erasure of data by overwriting etc we suggest to use a clean disk just formatted for the save load of WAV files About directory of a backup disk A WAV file saved is recorded in the root directory in the first layer on the backup disk A WAV file that can be loaded must be allocated in the root directory on the backup disk A WAV file moved from the root directory to another area such as a folder cannot be recognized by the VF 16 which may cause a malfunction About file names of WAV files A WAV file the VF160 saves is recorded with a file name WAV A W
266. of adat digital signals in DIRECT Rec e Built in Scene Memory function to set fader effect setting and to program search up to a maximum of 99 mixer modes e Output mixed down signals as S P DIF digital signals and digital record with DAT and other external digital recorders e Youcan mixdown within the VF160 itself by utilizing the internal mixdown mode In addition a CD of the mixdown can be recorded Recorder Section e Employs the FDMS 3 Fostex Disk Management System 3 Fostex format 16 track plus 8 additional tracks REC PLAY with high quality uncompressed 16 bit 44 1kHz sound Roughly 3 hour recording per 1GB in mono track e Nondestructive voice editing of copy paste move paste erase and undo redo features as expected from a digital recorder e PROGRAM feature names musical pieces and manage up to a maximum of 99 titles e 6 pitch control e CD S P DIF or adat digital signal direct digital recording e Auto punch IN OUT with rehearsal function set in 1 100 frame units Foot switch for manual punch IN OUT Others e Dot matrix LCD and auto illuminating keys Graphic display of mixer and recorder settings modes e 3 5 inch E IDE hard disk compatibility e Standard SCSI terminal to connect external SCSI equipment MO zip etc Save load all VF160 data recorder mixer data as well as read write recorded sounds as WAVE files e Save load of song data using CD RW CD R discs is possible by moun
267. off frequency Doubling effect parameters parameter type DOUBLING For effect type 34 of the preceding Effect type table the following three parameters can be adjusted 1 Eff Level Adjust the effect return level 0 99 2 Lch Delay Adjust the delay time of the L channel Range 0 1 9 9 ms 10 99 ms 100 200 ms 3 Rch Delay Adjust the delay time of the R channel Range 0 1 9 9 ms 10 99ms 100 200 ms 4 Filter Adjust the tone of the delay sound Range L9 L1 OFF H1 H9 L1 L9 LPF larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency H1 H9 HPF larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency Chorus effect parameters parameter type CHORUS For effect type 35 of the preceding Effect type table the following four parameters can be adjusted 1 Eff Level Adjust the effect return level 0 99 2 Depth Adjust the chorus depth Range 0 99 3 Double Time Adjust the time difference of the doubling effect Range 0 99 4 Double Lvl Adjust the volume of the doubling effect Range 0 99 5 Filter Adjust the tone of the delay sound Range L9 L1 OFF H1 H9 L1 L9 LPF larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency H1 H9 HPF larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency 60 aes VE IGo Fotex Flanger effect parameters parameter type FLANGE For effect type 36 of the preceding Effect type table the following four parameters can be adjusted 1 Eff Level Adjust the effect return level 0 99
268. oint CLIPBOARD OUT point lt Figure 1 gt When internal mixdown starts from ABS 00M 10S 00F and at ABS 06M 00S 00F ABSO ABS 00M 10S 00F ABS 06M 00S 00F f 1 1 mixed down song data However if you make an audio CD from the material whose actual audio starts from the exact CLIPBOARD IN point there will be no silence before starting audio If you want to make a CD which have a silence before actual audio starts move back the mixed down data for a few seconds as shown in Figure 2 or move ahead the CLIPBOARD IN point for a few seconds as shown in Figure 3 CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point CLIPBOARD IN polnt CLIPBOARD OUT point i ABS 0 REC END i i REC END 1 mixed down song data mixed down song data 1 CLIPBOARD IN point ABS o Move amp Paste REC END ie i i VE REC END ABS o ae e mixed down song data mixed down song data silent lt Figure 2 gt lt Figure 3 gt lt Note gt When recording songs continuously to a CD RW CD R disc the unit automatically record a 2 second silence after the REC END point Therefore you do not have to make a silence as shown above if a 2 second silence is enough for you If you want to have a longer silence than 2 seconds use either of two methods shown above to make a silence longer See the next page for details about how to make a silence lt Note gt When you move data as shown in Figur
269. olved by saving or loading the program procedures described later in such case The following are specific examples of the number of events C gt gt e e m y m gt m y ee A The VF160 counts the silent portion of a silent track which is counted as one file but not recorded with any sound Therefore this means that there will be one file on the track B One audio file is created when recording sound on a track Therefore this means that there will be two files on the track C Anew audio file is created when consecutively recording Therefore this means that there will be three files on the track D An audio files is created after a 0 file when re recording after fast forward Therefore this means that there will be five files on the track E When straddling b and c to record the track will have four files and thus the number of events are reduced ss VASO Fostex A Silence B Rec B Silence Cc Rec B Rec C Silence D Rec B Rec C Silence Rec D Silence E Rec E Silence Rec D Silence TRIM It is important to take care when analog signals input are converted into digital signals A D conversion when recording with the VF160 TRIM is used to tune this process and the PEAK LED is used to monitor the process If the trim gain is too high PEAK LED illuminated for the analog signals input into
270. ong data gt Memory data Data for CLIPBOARD IN OUT AUTO RTN START END AUTO PUNCH IN OUT Locate data for Locate No 00 through 99 only available with save load using SCSI Timebase ABS MTC or BAR BEAT CLK SETUP mode Bar beat setting tempo setting metronome on off preroll time MIDI synchronization output signal setting MTC offset time MTC offset mode REC protect setting slave mode on off slave type setting lt ltems that cannot be saved or loaded as song data gt On off settings for Auto play mode and Auto return mode eVaripitch on off and pitch data SETUP mode DIGITAL IN and DIGITAL OUT settings bar beat resolution on off and device ID lt Notes for DAT and adat machines to be used gt The VF160 song data only can be saved to or loaded from a digital machine that can record 16 bit 44 1 kHz linear digital data with S PDIF or adat format such as DAT and adat machines lt Notes for saving data using the S PDIF or adat digital signal gt When saving all data including both real and Additional track data using the S PDIF or adat Addtional digital signal note the following tracks Only the data recorded within the time duration between ABS 0O and REC END of the Real tracks is saved Therefore if the recorded time of Additional tracks is longer than the Real tracks only the Real tracks Additional track data within the time duration between ABS 0O and REC END of the Real tracks is saved
271. oonan While this screen is displayed you can select the recording track s by pressing the appropriate CH STATUS CH SEL key s In the following example channel 16 which accepts input H is set as a source channel for BUSS recording to track 1 You can select a mono or a pair of odd even tracks as the BUSS recording track s Note that you cannot select a track whose number corresponds to a source channel as the recording track 11 RECORDING System Unlike conventional systems the VF160 records ona hard disk storage device instead of cassette tape Sound source recording can start from any point ona formatted disk as long as the point is within a 24 hour time range in ABS time Note that itis also possible to move locate to any point within that time range as well Just think of the VF160 as coming with a tape that is pre programmed with a 24 hour counter ABSO oon 00s REC END 05m 00s 10m 00s ion 00s 23h 59m 59s recorded area unrecorded area recorded area unrecorded area a The REC time of cassette tape type recorders vary according to the REC time of the tape Recording with the VF160 is more efficient since unrecorded areas of the disk are not used although the REC time is not unlimited gt You can record at any point within 24 hours in ABS time 24 hour recording unrecorded 5 minute recording 5 minute recording recorded area record
272. orded also note the following By performing step 5 in the save operation procedure shown above While BkUp is flashing press the EN TER YES key When a recorded disc is inserted the display shows a warning message followed by the con firmation screen where Sure flashes With this screen you can choose whether erasing the recorded data or ejecting the disc SETUP F22 PERE WARHI HG J aes Hot Emrt4 ESE SE EE EE EE EEE EE EE ata cta o pave PGM SCSI BE esto e To erase the existing recorded data Press the ENTER YES key while both ERASE and Sure are flashing The display shows the screen below and the VF160 starts erasing the disc As the erase process progresses the number of flashing increases from left to right pave Pom SCSI BE ikk Flashing SETUP Increases as the process progresses Immediately after completing erasing the disc the display shows the same screen for selecting a program to be saved which appears after step 5 is performed Hereafter perform the same pro cedure as described above Fostex F CO Bee e To eject the disc Use the JOG dial to highlight Eject flashing and press the ENTER YES key The disc is ejected while the display shows Insert Disk By inserting a disc you can start the save operation again from the beginning lt Hint 2 gt
273. orr LAL ES Horm Eff Lewel ees ime Pre Delas Hi Fatio E R Level The parameter settings alternate every time the EFF EDIT EFF1 key or EFF EDIT EFF2 key is pressed Turn the JOG dial to modify the parameters Only the effect type is modified here For more details refer to a later section 4 When adjustments are completed press the EXIT NO key several times The system returns to the Normal Display Fostex F OCO E Create the master tape after adjusting all tracks Start recording the piece with a master recorder cassette tape DAT MD etc The VF160 can output S P DIF optical digital signals making it is possible to directly mix down digital signals if the master recorder can input S P DIF optical digital signals Tips Internal Mixdown Mode The VF160 features an Internal mixdown mode By using the Internal mixdown mode you can mix down up to 16 tracks without using an external master recorder Also by using the optional CD RW drive or an external SCSI type CD RW drive youcan make your original audio CD from materials mixed down by the Internal mixdown mode See Advanced Features on page 79 for the Internal mixdown mode and Save load of Song Data on page 119 for making an audio CD Analog Mix Down 1 Connectthe IN input jack ofthe master recorder with the ST 2 Adjust the recording level of the master recorder OUT L R jack of the VF160
274. ou completely drop down the channel 1 fader you cannot monitor the sound but the input level of chan nel 1 recording level of track 1 is not affected Tocontrol the input level of each channel use the TRIM knob as mentioned in step 8 RECORD 1 Press the REWIND key while the STOP key is depressed to locate ABS 0 Locate ABS 0 Press the PLAY key while the RECORD key isdepressed to start recording The RED light of CH STATUS CH SEL key and RECORD key of ch1 lights up to indicate that ch1 is recording 3 Press the STOP key to stop the recording operations The LCD will show a Please Wait message and then return to the Normal Display This completes the process to record on track 1 Check the sound recorded using the following procedures Cancel READY Status of Recording Track Press once again the DIRECT REC TRACK key that is lit up RED then press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the channel that is in the READY mode to cancel the ready state of the track recorded and to put that track in the SAFE mode Then press the EXIT NO key to return to the Normal Display PLAY 1 Press the REWIND key while the STOP key is depressed to locate ABS 0 2 Press the PLAY key to start playback The play level of track 1 can be adjusted with the ch1 fader This concludes the procedures to check the sound recorded Tips UNDO REDO Press the UNDO REDO key after recording to return to the prere
275. ound as well as cancel and undo the auto punch in out recording and other processes Press this key again to return to the state prior to undo redo F VARI PITCH P EDIT Key Every time this key is pressed the mode alternates between VARI PITCH PLAY REC at different speed ON Key Light ON OFF Key Light OFF Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to alter the speed variation Pitch Edit 45 LOCATE EVT MEM Key This keyis used to locate the editing point AUTO PUNCH POINT etc and Mark Point The last located parameter is saved as the parameter of this key every time Therefore it is possible to simply press this key to go to the last located point L A S T LOCATE Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to edit the parameter saved in Event Memory Event number 01 99 es VF ISO FOSTEX 46 SCRUB Key This is used to digitally scrub sounds in the FWD and REV direction without any change in pitch ae RECORD AUTO PUNCH Key Press the PLAY key while this key is depressed or press this key while the PLAY key is depressed to start recording the READY track Key Light ON The READY track goes in the input monitor mode when only this key is pressed Key Flashing Pressing this key again cancels the input monitor and the READY track goes to the Playback Monitor mode Press this key while the SHIFT keyis depressed to turn ON OFF AUTO PUNCH wie STOP Key Press
276. p media for VF160 is mentioned in the following Fostex international web site lt http www fostex co jp int index htm gt For those who are unable to check our web site please contact the Fostex distributor in your territory lt Warning gt This section describes the procedures to replace the hard disk However we recommended that the customer ask the Fostex Customer Service Department to replace the VF160 hard disk Note that the product is not warranted for any malfunctions that may occur after the customer replaces the hard disk on their own Also note that Fostex will not be held liable for any accidents that may occur during the replacement process or any hard disk damages if the customer decides to replace their own hard disk on their own lt Precautions Upon Replacement gt Always turn OFF the power of the VF160 and unplug the power plug from the electric outlet when replacing the hard disk Always place the hard disk on a flat and stable platform during the replacement process Place a soft cloth under the unit to protect the product from scratching Gloves are recommended to prevent any hand injuries lt Precautions Upon Handling the Hard Disk gt Ahard disk is an extremely sensitive precision device Never expose the hard disk to strong shocks when replacing assembling or handling Never leave the hard disk by a device that generates strong magnetic fields Always set the DIP switch and Jumper of the newly
277. pending on whether or not the program can be saved to a single disk as below When the program can be saved to a single disk The display shows the screens for creating a new program on the backup disk the program number B01 is shown for the backup disk and Sure flashes eae PoM SCSI f Desth PGM Select Fah Flashing Hew EE UF D0DWH JOG Sure i Hit YES or ey ERENG Pressing the ENTER YES key in the above condition starts saving and the screens shown below appears Fostex VF CO Bee lt Hint gt While B01 New PGM is flashing you can select Eject for the forced eject by using the JOG dial When you remove the disk forcibly select Eject andpress the ENTER YES key The disk will be ejected and Insert Disk will flash on the display en PGM SCSI H Data Saving k ME Pai gt gt Be1 The screen above shows that the VF160 is saving the song data of program 01 to BO1 on the backup disk The remaining data size shown on the screen counts down while the data save goes on Wait for a while unti the save operation is completed When the save operation is completed the display changes to something like the one as shown below while the VF160 stops SETUP R22 Save POM SCSI POL pkk Save Completed EXIT Hit YES or HO Kes When the program requires more than one disk for saving Pressing the ENTER YES key immediately start
278. pplied to channels 15 16 and the master channel 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode 141 fostex F OCO Be Trouble Shooting A breakdown If you suspect so please read the following explanations before requesting repairs Troubles at Recording e Input signal not indicated by the level meter e When attempting to select a recording track for DIRECT Level meter does not light up even though recording recording are there some tracks between 9 16 that can track is set and channel fader master fader is raised not be selected to the 0 position la Couldtherebe some channels setto INPUT atsetup Set the recorder to input monitor of INPUT TRACK Press the RECORD key only The key will blink in red DIRECT recording is executed basically with all chan and the READY track will be in the input monitor mode nels in the TRK mode at setup of INPUT TRACK as The recorder output can be applied to each channel shown below Should any one channel of 9 16 is set to faders The level meter is unable to function unless the INPUT that channel cannot be set as a recording track READY track is changed to the input monitor mode at DIRECT recording For details read pages 32 33 and 45 46 as ARB S _ j i ie SELECT INPUT TRACK f ems CLIPBOARD PLAY mumm at a a al 3 E al 4 ioc
279. provided at INPUT 7 and 8 XLR 3 31 can be setup lt CAUTION gt Do the following before using the phantom power e When connecting a condenser microphone to MIC INPUT 7 and 8 XLR 3 31 type of the VF160 be sure this microphone requires phantom power 48V e Switch ON the phantom power after connecting the condenser microphone e Always mute the VF160 output when switching ON OFF the phantom power and when connecting or disconnecting the microphone cable from the VF160 e Always switch OFF the phantom power when connecting a dynamic microphone to INPUT 7 and 8 XLR 3 31 type Otherwise a malfunction could occur Phantom power cannot be used with the following equipment e Unbalanced output microphones e High impedance microphones e In a microphone where there is voltage leak between pin 2 pin 3 and pin 1 of the microphone cable canon connector e Old model ribbon microphones of the ground center tap output type lt CAUTION gt If the phantom power supply is switched ON do not connect an unbalanced line dynamic type microphone to INPUT 7 or INPUT 8 Be extremely careful of this as this could damage the internal microphone amplifier of VF160 e Initial setting Off 2 Select the desired item with the JOG dial and press the e Options On or Off ENTER YES key You can set the value for each Program individually The selected item will be set The settings cannot be saved
280. r faders of adjacent two channels 3 Use the JOG dial to control the send level The numeric value and the marker position of the rotary pot icon change according to the current level 80 the default value is the reference level Controllable channels Channels 1 through 16 and the master level Available values OO to 99 dB the default setting channels 1 through 16 00 master level 80 4 Tosetanother channel s send level repeatsteps 2 and3 above 5 After completing send level editing press the EXIT NO key The VF160 exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display 53 Selecting pre post of AUX sends You can select whether the pre fader or post fader sig nal is fed from each channel 1 to 16 to the AUX SEND jack If you select Post the signal adjusted by the chan nel fader is sent to the effect processor so if you lower the channel fader the signal sent to the effect proces sor is also lowered If you select Pre the signal that is not affected by the channel fader is sent to the effect processor so even if you lower the channel fader to minimum the signal can be sent to the effect processor 1 Press the AUX1 AUX2 key while holding down the SHIFT key to bring up the pre post selection screen Each time you press the AUX1 AUX2 key while holding down the SHIFT key the pre post selection screens for EFF1 and EFF2 alternate The first ti
281. r starts flashing which is one greater than the highest program number among those available on the current drive This means a track is going to be loaded to a new program For example if there are 4 programs available on the current drive the destination program number is P05 If there are already 99 programs on the current drive Disk Full appears and no destination program number is shown In such a case delete the unnecessary program s on the current drive and then perform step 7 above again Total Gi oe 30 Flashing Ba HOH By rotating the JOG dial you can select NON as well as a Program When performing the load operation tracks that are set to NON are not loaded While the program number is flashing press the ENTER YES key The flashing program number changes to light solidly showing that the first track is ready to be loaded to the program To load more than one track repeat steps 7 through 8 above The following screen example shows that tracks 1 and 2 will be loaded to program 05 and 06 respectively The track title and track time are also shown to the left of each program number SETUP R21 Total 8G BS So az 38 lt Note gt When loading from an audio CD no title is shown when selecting the track lt Hint gt If you are going to load tracks 1 and 3 in the example above instead of tracks 1 and 2 track 3 will be lo
282. r stubborn dirt moisten a cloth in diluted detergent wring it out firmly and wipe the dirt off Then polish with a dry cloth Never use solvents such as alcohol thinner or benzene since these will damage the printing and finish of the exterior Specifications Recording Reproducing Recording Medium Recording Format Save Load Format Sampling Frequency Quantization A D Converter D A Converter No of Recording Track Vari Pitch Control Crossfade Recording Reproducing Frequency Input Output Input 1 6 Connector Input Impedance Standard Input Level Input 7 and 8 Connector Input Impedance Standard Input Level Phantom Power XLR only Output Tip Load Impedance Input Level INSERT Input Output Connector Output Tip Load Impedance Input Level Input Ring Load Impedance Output Level MONITOR Output Connector Load Impedance Output Level HEADPHONE Connector Load Impedance Output Level AUX SEND 1 and 2 Connector Load Impedance 3 5 inch hard disk E IDE type FDMS 3 FDIO 1 44 1kHz 16 bit linear Non expanded 20 bit 64 times over sampling Delta Sigma 24 bit 128 times over sampling Delta Sigma 16 real tracks 8 additional tracks 16 tracks for simultaneous recording 6 10msec 20Hz 20kHz 6mm Phone jack Unbalanced 50kQ or more Unbalanced 50dBV 2dBV 6mm Phone jack Unbalanced XLR 3 31 type Balanced 50kQ or more Unbalanced 10k or more Balanced
283. rameter set tings to each memory Items to be stored include all parameters set by the channel parameter edit and effect edit modes as well as all channel fader levels Furthermore you can give a desired scene name with up to 16 alphanu meric or symbolic characters to each scene memory In addition to 100 scene memories the VF160 also provides 10 temporary memories Temporary numbers 00 to 09 Note that all the setting stored in a temporary memory disappears when turning off the power Storing to a scene memory You can store the current settings to a scene memory i TS 3 CUn defined by the following procedure Tas FUn defined S66 Init Mix 1 Press the SCENE STORE key Flashing The display shows the screen for selecting the scene num ber ey Scene Hof it Mix S62 Un defined Select Scene Hoj 3 Enterthe desired scene name using the JOG dial for selecting a character and using the REWIND F FWD keys for mov ing the editing flashing point You can specify a scene name with up to 16 alphanumeric or symbolic characters and can see up to 14 characters on the display The following characters can be entered CUn de tined n de fine CUin definedd AtoZ atoz Oto9 Usethe JOG dial to select the desired scene number to which you want to store the current settings and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for editing a title of these lect
284. rding By doing so it will be lock faster from the second and later sessions 94 Mees VASA Fostex Application example of Adat Mixer Mode The following is an application example of Adat Mixer Mode input monitor for all tracks The Adat Mixer Mode is especially useful when using the VF160 with a personal computer containing a built in sound card as shown below In this system example the VF160 acts as e A monitor mixer for the audio tracks of the personal computer Channel faders 1 through 8 act in that capacity e A D converters for converting analog instrument signals to digital signals which are then sent to the personal computer e Finally a monitor mixer for MIDI sound sources Channel faders 9 through 14 act in the capacity All the signals above can be simultaneously recorded to tracks 1 through 16 lt Notes gt e The Adat Mixer Mode can only be used via DIRECT recording It cannot be used with BUSS recording Ifan attempt is made to activate the Adat Mixer Mode when the recording mode is set to the BUSS mode the display will show Rec Mode Change with a flashing Sure If you press the ENTER YES key the recording mode changes to the DIRECT mode and activates the Adat Mixer Mode If you press the EXIT NO key Adat Mixer Mode will be canceled and the recording mode will remain the same e Tracks set to IN input via INPUT SEL selection IN or TRK will not be input monitor mode
285. ress the INPUT SEL key Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch9 16 to switch ch 9 16 to INPUT Ch9 16 is ready to start signals of input A to H Ifinput signals are started for ch9 16 faders the play sounds of the corresponding track can no longer be heard and you cannot go to the READY REC state Press the BUSS SOURCE key GREEN Flashing Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch 9 16 ORANGE Flashing Signals of input A to H can now be sent to REC BUSS g Press the BUSS REC TRK key RED Flashing Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch7 and 8 RED Flashing Track 7 and 8 will proceed to the RDY Ready state 8 Press the EXIT NO key to return to the Normal Display 47 Adjusting the Source Channel 9 Press the RECORD key and set tracks 7 and 8 to the input monitor RED Flashing As in the earlier case the monitor sound is output at this stage Adjust the volume of the monitor sound with the MON OUT or PHONES knob Set the ch7 amp 8 fader ch9 16 fader and master fader to 0 Output the sound of the sound source to record and adjust the TRIM to an appropriate gain The guideline for optimal gain is when the PEAK LED is about to light when the sound source is turned up to the maximum volume Accordingly equalize the signals of ch9 16 being recorded and or adjust the PAN according to the sound source Refer to the earlier section for instru
286. ress this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to show the current fader location Finer level adjustment is possible by using the JOG dial Use the CH STATUS CH SEL key to select the channel to change any settings together 22 CH PARAM EDIT EQ COMP LO G CH VIEW Key This is used to CHECK CHANGE the low frequencies of the parametric equalizer settings Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to show the settings of the selected channel 18 Use the CH STATUS CH SEL key to select the channel to change any settings together 23 MASTER CH STATUS CH SEL Key This becomes the master channel ON OFF key when the LCD is in the normal display mode described later Select the channel to CHECK CHANGE any settings with the CH PARAM EDIT Key No 17 22 to CHECK CHANGE any PAN equalizer or other mixer settings The STATUS of the key lights ON are defined below GREEN The level of the stereo buss L R outputs are adjustable with the fader OFF The signals to the master fader are MUTE no sound 24 MASTER Fader This is used to adjust the master level of the sound signals output from the STEREO OUT L R jacks For more details refer to the respective instructions of each item Top Panel VF I amp O Fostex Recorder Section 25 26 27 28 FADER ADJUST a INPUT SEL Key Set whether to send the A to H input signals INPUT or track 9 16 play TRACK sounds to t
287. rogram ABS 23H 59M 59S the program stops and the PLAY key flashes Digital scrubbing with the SCRUB key To enter the Digital Scrub Mode press the SCRUB key while the recorder is in the STOP state to cue at 0 1x speed without any change in musical key Digital scrub is possible for each track The level envelope volume wave form of that track appears This feature is effective when it is necessary to conduct a pinpoint search of the beginning of a song or a point location between songs 1 Press the SCRUB key while the recorderis inthe STOP state The scrub mode is activated and the following display appears AH Se Lr oesr ctTRE zoom xl FIN 2 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the track to scrub The level envelope of the selected track appears The first time you enter the scrub mode after turning on the power the magnification is set to x 1 Zoom x61 KRIH Current location magnification Tips How to change the zoom magnification Youcan select the zoom magnification by using the F FWD and REWIND keys Each press of the F FWD key increases the magnification from x 01 gt x 02 gt x 04 gt x08 gt x 16 Each press of the REWIND key decreases the magnifica tion The magnification setting is global for all tracks and is shown at the bottom of the display Also when the mag nification is not set to x 01 you can temporarily change it to x 01 while
288. rosesessoseseseseosesesnoseseses 42 Instructions to Record with BUSS RECORD 43 e Recording the H Input Signal to Track 1 ee eeeeeeeee 44 e Recording 8 INPUTS to Tracks 7 and 8 eeseseeeseseseseeeees 46 Chapter 3 Advanced Mixer Operations Initial condition when the power is turned ON 21 c1cceeeeeees 49 Operations while the Normal Display iS SHOWN 49 PACT onian r aa a E A tesa eevee 49 e Channel mute and Solo function ssesesssessesessesesessesesee 49 e Master channel Mute e ssssssesessssesessssesesssresesessesesssrosesesee 49 e Adat Mixer Mode On Off sessssssesessssesesessssesessssesesesse 49 Channel Parameter Elit ccsccecccssscsessessssssesseessesesees 50 Adj sting PAN sccsiessecisseseasessesesacssonsdeatsavessevassasnosoisessssces 50 Adjusting EQ si desecsrieeectie sien Saitiavcseratitiee conta siieedeliccnties 51 e Controlling Effect Send Level csssesesecseeeeeeeseeeeeenees 52 e Selecting Pre Post of Effect Sends ccsssseesseesseeereeeees 52 e Controlling AUX Send Level e Selecting Pre Post of AUX Sends e Controlling Fader Levels e Setting the COMPLeSSOM sessesseseeceeceeceeceeceessceseseeseeees Channel View ienueiaiieea Effect EditMode aenieiai esate inian EEEE e About the Effect Types e sssessssssessesressessessessesessessessessese e Selecting the Effect Type e Effect Parameter Settings e Effect Parameter Det
289. rs the free run mode with reference to the internal clock If Digital In is selected the VF160 runs in sync with the clock derived from Digi tal In After chase lock is achieved the VF160 runs in the varipitch mode to keep sync with the master Note that if the Digital In is selected the VF160 runs in the same manner as Free Free Vari Initial setting After chase lock is achieved if the VF160 receives an S PDIF digital signal from the master it runs in sync with the S PDIF clock Note that if Digital In is selected the VF160 runs in sync with the clock derived from Digital In SPDIF After chase lock is achieved if the VF160 receives an adat digital signal from the master it runs in sync with the adat clock Note that if Digital In is selected the VF160 runs in sync with the clock derived from Digital In adat 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode Setting the Record Protect function Rec Protect The Setting the Record Protect function menu allows you to turn the Record Protection function On or Off When this function in turned On you cannot record paste or erase data Use this function to protect your important data from being accidentally erased e Initial setting Off e Offset mode option On or Off You can set the mode for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of th
290. rse order Rotate the JOG dial to enter the desired value for the editing field Repeat step 3 and 4 to enter the desired values to all fields Press the ENTER YES key after editing the time The event memory with the edited time is created and the display returns to the Normal Display To create other event memories repeat step 1 through 5 Creating the scene event map After preparing the event memory list you can create the scene event map Note that all necessary scene memories must be stored in advance when carrying out the following 1 While the VF160is stopped press the SCENE STORE MAP key while holding down the SHIFT key The screen shows the event memory list Horn 65 VF amp O Fostex Select the desired event memory using the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting the scene number for the selected event memory Non flashes Select the desired scene number by using the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key The selected scene number is assigned to the event memory In the example shown below a scene number is assigned to each event memory Deleting an event memory You can delete unnecessary event memories lt Note gt You cannot delete event memory 00 1 While the VF 160 is stopped press the SCENE STORE MAP key while holding down the SHIFT key The screen shows the event memory
291. s saving to the first disk and the Data Saving screen same as described above appears Save POM SCSI Data Savina Pl Bel ME The first disk is ejected when it becomes full and Insert Disk2 flashes on the screen Inserting the second disk to the SCSI device automatically resumes saving If more than two disks are required for saving repeat the same procedure as above When the save operation to all disks is completed Completed appears on the display while the VF160 stops lt Note gt You cannot abort the save operation before completed unlike the save operation using the S PDIF or adat signal Especially during the save operation to more than one disk if you happen to press the EXIT NO key while removing or inserting a disk you have to redo the save operation from the beginning using the first disk 7 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key repeatedly until exiting the Setup mode e To remove the disk from the SCSI drive after the save operation is completed press the eject key on the SCSI drive 104 S lt Hint gt The save operations described above both for using a single disk and multiple disks are assumed that backup disks used are newly formatted and have no recorded data It will be ideal to prepare newly formatted clean disks before the save operation however there must be some cases where you have to use disks containing recorded
292. s started REC starttime 2 Press the PLAY key to play the VF160 Adjust the play level of tracks 7 and 8 with the ch7 amp 8 faders to check listen to the sound recorded Fostex F CO I Tips Applying an Effect on the Source Channel It is possible to apply effect sound on the source channel during BUSS RECORD 1 EFF1 or EFF2 can also be selected at the same time for the source channel from the display appears by press ing the BUSS SOURCE key to select the source chan nel as described earlier The following figure shows the example where input Hand EFF1 are both applied to the source channel and allows EFFECT 1 to be applied to the input H signals Press the CH PARAM EDIT EFF1 EFF2 key to adjust the send level of effect 1 Press the CHSTATUS CHSEL key of ch16 select input Hand use the JOG dial to adjust the send level of input H The signal level adjusted here is sent to effect 1 To adjust the master send level use the CH STATUS CHSEL key of the master channel to select the master send level and adjust it with the JOG dial Press the EFF EDIT EFF 1 key select the effect type desired and then edit the effect parameter It is possible to apply the selected effect on the sound recorded EFFi EDIT MUTE s OFF L i Horm HALLE J Eff Level Fey Time Pre Delay Hi Fatio Ere Level Tips Itis possible to apply different effects EFF1 EFF2 on multiple so
293. s this key while editing the parameters to move the column digit to edit 21 ce F FWD NEXT Key Press this key while the machine is stopped for 30X rewind speed 3X cuing rewinding with sound takes place when this key is pressed during the PLAY status Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to locate the NEXT memory locate the next event memory Press this key while depressing the STOP key to LOCATE REC END Press this key while editing the parameters to move the column digit to edit 52 FADER ADJUST LEVEL ADJUST Key This key flashes during scene memory recall etc to notify the user that the currently set fader parameter and the internally set fader position are not the same Press this key to go to the Fader Adjust Mode The internally set fader position is checked By adjusting the fader setting manually it is possible to adjust the actual fader position according to the internally set fader position Press this key while the SHIFT key is depressed to go to the Level Adjust Mode This forcibly adjusts the volume to the current fader position 53 SHIFT Key This keyis used as the function key for various keys and dials that have a shift function The key functions are shown at the bottom of the key if the key has a shift function 54 EXIT NO EJECT Key This is used to CANCEL PAUSE the SETUP menu settings copy paste and various other sound editing processes
294. screen shows something like the one as below As the data load goes on the remaining data size shown on the screen counts down SETUP Rei Load WALI SCSI l Data Loadins WAL gt Pk ak 112 A VY IO FOSE lt lt Special loading method when using a computer gt gt lt Note gt WAV files which can be saved loaded by this recorder must have file names written as WAV Other file names cannot be acknowledged by this recorder Unknown file names will not be acknowledged and could cause malfunction Extreme care should be taken when changing file names and making folders on a computer The first six letters will be the title shown in the SETUP mode Title Edit display The last two letters represent each track number 1 24 of the WAV file which are to be saved loaded The last WAV is the extension which indicate that this is a WAV file File name of the WAV file which is to be saved in the backup disk of this recorder will all be recorded in capital letters However in certain computers this WAV file name will be displayed in small letters Method to load specific tracks The backup disk in which files are saved will contain files from 01 WAV up to 24 WAV Should these files be deleted moved from the root directory for example into a another folder or the file name changed which cannot be acknowledged this recorder will not r
295. show No additional Scene and the operation is ignored When a scene is directly recalled the Fader recall setting of the SETUP mode is also effective as described in Recalling ascene memory above Clearing a scene memory You can clear an unnecessary scene memory by using the following procedure lt Note gt You cannot clear the memories in scene number OO or current scene whose scene number flashes in the screen If you select scene number 00 and try to clear the memory Warning Can t Clear Current Scene appears on the display and the operation is ignored 1 Press the SCENE RECALL and SCENE STORE keys si multaneously The display shows the screen for selecting a scene to be cleared shows a user defined scene name In the next step you can select any scene number except S00 Init Mix Select Scene Ho CUn de fined a SER EE oe a e e 2 Select the desired scene to be cleared using the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key The confirmation message for clearing the selected scene appears in which Sure flashes To cancel the operation press the EXIT NO key 3 Press the ENTER YES key The selected scene memory is cleared and the scene name changes to Un defined showing that no memory is stored fostex F GO Mee Scene Event Map By creating a scene event map you can recall desired scene memories mixer settings at desired positions during playback For
296. sing the last part When mixdown starts from non ABS 0 You can make a silence at the beginning of a program which is not mixed down from ABS 0 by setting the CLIPBOARD IN point appropriately In the following description we assumed that the cur rent program is a 5 minute length program which is mixed down from ABS 00M 10S OOF 00SF in which the CLIPBOARD IN and CLIPBOARD OUT keys hold OOM 10S OOF 00SF and 05M 10S 00F 00SF respec tively and audio immediately starts from 00M 10S OOF OOSF And you are now going to create a 3 second silent space at the beginning of the song e Change the CLIPBOARD IN point 1 When the unit stopped press the CLIPBOARD IN key The time registered with the CLIPBOARD IN key is shown in this tutorial ABS 00M 10S 00F 00SF and S on the display flashes showing that you can now edit the sec ond field LOCATE AE HOLD Flashing 2 While S flashes enter 07 using the JOG dial 3 Press the STORE key followed by the CLIPBOARD N key OOM 07S 00F OOSF is registered with the CLIPBOARD IN point Now you made a 3 second silent space at the beginning of the song by changing the CLIPBOARD IN point See Making an audio CD in Save load using CD RW CD R de scribed later for details about how to make an audio CD from the mixed down song 84 es VASA Fostex Applic
297. ss the ENTER YES key Press the ENTER YES key to complete the data copy or move process Completed appears on the display then the CopyPaste or Move Paste message flashes This means that the sound data has been copied or moved to the clipboard and that the system is ready to proceed to the following paste process The recorder is ready to paste if there is no problem with the COPY CLIP or MOVE CLIP process At this stage it is possible to check the sound data in which COPY CLIP or MOVE CLIP was executed To check the data on the clipboard refer to the instructions described in Checking Data in the Clipboard 73 lt Precaution gt e If COPY or MOVE is executed without selecting a track to COPY or MOVE then Select Track will appear on the LCD with a flashing Copy Clip or Move Clip message In this case repeat the procedure by using the CH STATUS CH SEL key to choose the track to COPY or MOVE Ifthe CLIPBOARD IN point and CLIPBOARD OUT point is stored in the reverse time relationship when attempting to COPY or MOVE then a Void IN Point or Void OUT Point warning appears on the display and prevents any further process In such case reset the proper time relationship of the CLIPBOARD IN OUT points prior to COPY or MOVE lt Check the Clipboard Data gt Prior to pasting any sound data follow the instructions below to check for the presenc
298. steneetees 148 M inten nte snein anA O iii 149 01101161110 EPEE 149 Block Diagram aseestaan rapae aeaa aieiai anini 150 fostex VF GCO MTT Chapter 1 Basic Features of VF 160 Introduction Congratulations You have chosen a truly unique multitracking device The VF160 Fostex Digital Multitracker features a myriad of high tech functions These include a digital mixer incorporates high performance DSP multi effect made possible using the Fostex original A S P Fostex Advanced Signal Processing technology as well as an integrated 16 track 8 additional tracks digital recorder that can record or play uncompressed 44 1kHz 16 bit high quality sound Please read the entire User s Manual to ensure safe and proper use of your recorder Product Features Mixer Section e Standard high performance DSP multi effects with A S P Fostex Advanced Signal Processing technology e Intuitive control of all signals with 16 input and stereo master fader e Allinput channels come with channel ON OFF switch 3 band equalizer PRE POST switchable 2 channel EFF AUX send e All 8 channel analog inputs come with built in trim Mic to line level compatibility e Analog channel input 7 and 8 come with phones connector and XLR connector for phantom power Built in insert terminals e 2 Record Assigns DIRECT Rec to simultaneously record 8 analog channels and REC BUS Rec for ping pong recording 16 track simultaneous recording
299. t flashing and then press the ENTER YES key The disc is ejected while Insert Disk appears on the screen When inserting a blank disc you can go on the next step see the procedure described above 122 Rs VIO FOSE Loading from an audio CD You can load a desired song to the unit from an audio CD you created by recording on a CD RW CD R disc When a desired song is loaded the unit automatically creates a new program on the current drive and the song are recorded on tracks 1 and 2 of the program Loading data from an audio CD is operated via the Load PGM menu in the Setup mode which is the same way as loading backup data lt mportant note for copyright gt You can also load a material from a commercially available audio CD in the same manner however never use a material for which a copyright is re served for a commercial purpose Any unauthorized use will constitute infringement of such copyright and will render the infringer li able to an action at low The following procedure is assumed that a CD RW is connected to the SCSI connector of the VF160 or the optional CD RW drive CD 1A is installed to the VF160 and you have an audio CD you made or a commercially available CD lt Note gt Key operations of the VF160 should be done after com pleting access to a CD RW CD R disc 1 After turning on the power of both the VF 160 and a connected CD RW drive load a recorded audio CD disc to the CD
300. t IDE if an optional CD RW drive is used Press the ENTER YES key to display the CD RW drive name and then changes to the save mode select screen where Bkup Backup flashes To save backup song data select BkUp To make an audio CD select CD DA or Setup This procedure describes how to save song data so we select BkUp here See making an audio CD described later for details about how to make an audio CD SCSI or IDE is shown according to the drive used SETUP R22 I j Flashing ERT CO DA Setur REL FFWD Hit YES or HO Key 116 TATL Flashing Gip 5 While BkUp flashing press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen for selecting a program to be saved the program number of the selected program flashes a Save PGM SCSI source PEM Select UWP OOWH JOG Hit YES or HO Key By rotating the JOG dial you can select a desired pro gram number title from among available programs in the VF160 current drive The recorded space of the se lected program is also shown If you select a program which requires more than one disc for saving the display shows the required number of discs see the screen example below Save PEM SCSI BWH JOG Hit YES or HO Key After selecting a program press the ENTER YES key The display shows the screen as below Save FEM SCSI I ztn PEM Select deo BME UP
301. t the external digital equipment sampling frequency must be set identical to that of theVF160 AT SELECTING OF SPDIF initial setup When this setting is selected STEREO BUSS L R signals will be output as S P DIF digital signals and should be selected at digital mixdown to a digital master recorder e Initial setting SPDIF e Options SPDIF or adat You can set the mode for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data AT SELECTING OF adat The settings are maintained after you turn off the At selecting of adat signals from tracks 9 16 will be power to the VF160 output as adat digital signals If signals from tracks 1 8 are to be output as adat digital 1 Select Digital Out in the menu selection display and press signals it must be executed after exchanging between tracks 1 8 and 9 16 by using the track exchange function the ENTER YES key i The same applies at output of data in the additional The current setting will flash SPDIF will flash in the initial setting SETUP F15 Rec Protect Off Disital In A Disitsl Out Resolution Dewice ID track 3 Select the desired digital out and press the ENTER YES key The selected digital out will be setup Flashing 4 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode Setting BAR BEAT Resolution mode Resolution The
302. t selection screens for EFF1 and EFF2 alternate The first time you bring up the channel parameter edit screen the message prompting to select a channel Select CH flashes as well as all the CH STATUS CH SEL indica tors on the panel flash From the second time on the previously selected channel is selected and ready to be edited when bringing up the screen as shown in the drawing of step 2 below m Flashing 2 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the desired channel The current settings are shown together with the selected channel name The icon for the selected channel is flash ing indicating that you can edit it 15 POST lashing l 1 B Flashing LJ Ly Loy d Co d d d If two adjacent channels are fader paired pressing one of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for these channels selects both channels and you can set PRE or POST for both channels simultaneously See page 138 for details about how to pair faders of adjacent two channels 3 Use the JOG dial to switch the selection The icon color and label changes according to the selec tion as shown below The pre fader signal is sent to the effect pro cessor J The post fader signal is sent to the effect pro FST cessor Controllable channels Channels 1 through 16 Available options PRE or PST post default all channels PST 4 Tosetanother channel s pre post selection repeat s
303. t setting By pressing either of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for paired channels the icons for both channels start flash ing and you can set pre or post for the Aux sends of both channels simultaneously using the JOG dial EQ HI MID LO adjustment By pressing either of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for paired channels the icons for both channels start flash ing and you can adjust EQ for both channels simulta neously On off of SOLO By pressing either of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for paired channels you can select on or off of solo moni tor for both channels simultaneously On off of channel mute By pressing either of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for paired channels you can select on or off of mute for both channels simultaneously e Setting of INPUT TRACK INPUT SEL channels 9 through 16 only By pressing either of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for paired channels you can select the input sources for both channels simultaneously Setting of REC source for BUSS recording By pressing either of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for paired channels you can select the REC sources for both channels simultaneously e Setting of the built in compressor By pressing either of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for paired channels channels 13 14 or 15 16 you can set the compressor parameters for both channels si multaneously fostex V 6o Bee On Off of phantom power setting Phantom Power ON OFF of phantom power
304. teps 2 and 3 above aes VIGO Fotex 5 After completing the pre post selection press the EXIT NO key The VF160 exits the channel edit mode and the display returns to the Normal display Controlling AUX SEND level You can control send levels of channels 1 through 16 pre or post fader from the AUX SEND jack on the rear panel The master channel controls the AUX send master level 1 Press the AUX1 AUX2 key to bring up the AUX send level screen Each time you press the AUX1 AUX2 key the AUX1 send level and AUX2 send level screens alternate The first time you bring up the channel parameter edit screen the message prompting to select a channel Select CH flashes as well as all the CH STATUS CH SEL indica tors on the panel flash From the second time on the pre viously selected channel is selected and ready to be edited when bringing up the screen as shown in the drawing of step 2 below Flashing 2 Press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of the desired channel The current settings are shown together with the selected channel name The icon for the selected channel is flash ing indicating that you can edit it Flashing Flashing If two adjacent channels are fader paired pressing one of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys for these channels selects both channels and you can adjust levels for both chan nels simultaneously See page 138 for details about how to pai
305. the READY or recording state Signal output from the recorder 1 track Playback sound Playback monitor Signal input in the recorder Input signal Input monitor Playback sound Playback monitor Playback sound Playback monitor Playback sound Playback monitor Playback sound Playback monitor 3 track 4 track 5 track 6 track 7 track Reavy Input signal Input monitor 8 track reapy Input signal Input monitor 9 track 10 track 11 track 12 track 13 track Playback sound Playback monitor M Playback sound Playback monitor Playback sound Playback monitor Playback sound Playback monitor Playback sound Playback monitor 14 track Playback sound Playback monitor 15 track Playback sound Playback monitor 16 track Playback sound Playback monitor EVENT When recording with the VF160 an independent audio file for each recording is respectively created on the tracks recorded Remember that silence is also recognized as one 0 file These audio files and 0 silent files are called an events A total of 512 events can be created for each track with the VF160 An excess of 512 events cannot be recorded It is rare that this happens in normal use The VF160 is also complete with the function to indicate the current number of events An alarm will sound when exceeding the maximum number of events authorized This problem can be res
306. the VF160 will synchronize to the incoming MTC MIDI Time Code from master unit It will also synchronize to a type of external sync signal which you have chosen with the section Slave Type setting e Initial setting Off 2 Select On or Off with the JOG dial and press the ENTER e Offset mode option On or Off YES key You can set the mode for each Program individually PE een reer 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the The settings are maintained after you turn off the SETUP mode power to the VF160 Upon exit from the SETUP mode the SLV SLAVE icon will flash 1 Select Slave Mode in the menu selection display and press This icon will change to constant lighting when VF160 is the ENTER YES key correctly synchronized with the external equipment The currently set slave mode will flash Off will flash in the initial setting Sai I ri 1 t tl i x Eady Flashing m me Fate 5 P A EAE EE Oftset Set P o Beccaceletetl ocd al taat ue seus teha lai EETETETETTEE TEA e Tyre ari eC in 132 ss VF ISO FOSTEX Setting the Slave Type Slave Type If you have set Slave Mode to On in the previous section Slave Mode Setting you can choose what type of external sync signal that the VF160 synchronizes to This mode allows you to choose the external sync signal type e Initial setting Vari
307. the next disk Inserting the next disk resumes the save operation Save WAJ SCSI Data Savina Paste gt gt WAL Disk ask AB After the save operation is completed Completed appears on the screen Save WAJ SCSI Pk doko Save Comeleted EXIT Hit YES or HO Key A VIO FOSE lt Hint gt In the save operation which requires more than one backup disk if you use a backup disk which contains any program s saved the display shows the screen as shown below a Save WAU SCSI OJ l 1 i reads Exists H Delete Eject Sure El FFWD YES or H Key This screen is asking you weather to delete all existing WAV files on the disk or to eject the disk To delete all the existing files select All Delete and press the ENTER YES key All existing files are deleted and the disk is ready for saving data If you do not want to delete the existing files select Eject and press the ENTER YES key The disk is ejected so you can insert another disk To select between All Delete and Eject press the REWIND or F FWD key oA i 10 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP key repeatedly until exiting the Setup mode lt About WAV files saved gt WAV file structure A WAV file on the backup disk has 24 files one file per track in the root directory of the disk The file names are Q1 WAV through NH
308. the recorded time of a program from ABS O to REC END to save all the data recorded on the program When loading song data from a DAT to the VF160 data is transferred with two track data blocks the same as saving data See also lt Notes for saving data using the S PDIF or adat digital signal gt on the next page wk rk 21822 IM Tix 23824 Program 1 P01 Program 2 P02 Program 99 P99 Using the adat digital signal you can save load data for each program individually Five seconds after the pilot signal shown in gray in the diagram below the song data is output to an external adat recorder The audio data is divided into data blocks of 8 tracks shown in black in the diagram below and transferred To save data for all Real and Additional tracks totally 24 tracks 3 units of eight track data are transferred Therefore it will take about 3 times as much as the recorded time of a program from ABS 0 to REC END to save all the data recorded on the program When loading song data from an adat recorder to the VF160 data is transferred with eight track data blocks the same as saving data See also lt Notes for saving data using the S PDIF or adat digital signal gt on the next page Trk9 amp 10 Trk 17 amp 18 amp 11 amp 12 amp 19 amp 20 amp 13 amp 14 amp 21 amp 22 amp 15 amp 16 amp 23 amp 24
309. then go to step 10 6 After setting the copy protection press the EXIT NO key The display returns to the screen for selecting the save e To record more than one song to a CD RW CD R disc mode in which CD DA now flashes repeat the procedure for selecting a program described above i e use the JOG dial to select a program and press the ENTER YES key until Save POM SCHI selecting all desired programs and then go to step Mode Sele 10 BUF REL FFD Hit YES or HO Key Flashing lt Note gt If the program time shows 00 00 when selecting a program as the screen example below the CLIPBOARD 7 While CD DA is flashing press the ENTER YES key IN and CLIPBOARD OUT points are not correctly set After showing Please Wait the display shows the screen for selecting the program s to be record SETUP R27 In the screen a number such as 01 or 02 shows the track number while NON shows that no program is kot AG aealp assigned to the track Save PEM SCSI 247 it Please Wait In other words in the following conditions the CLIPBOARD IN and CLIPBOARD OUT points are not regarded as being correctly set CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point CLIPBOARD IN point gt CLIPBOARD OUT point Flashin j If you press the ENTER YES key after selecting such a program the warning message as below appears on the display and you cannot select the program
310. there will be 2 consecutive tracks on which the same sound is recorded The channel with the ORANGE light ON INPUT from among ch9 16 of the CH STATUS CH SEL keys cannot output the audio sound on the tracks corresponding to 9 16 therefore RECORDER recording will be prohibited Jee Track As a result the READY state cannot be established with the DIRECT REC TRK key Recording to One Track Here we will record to track 1 of the recorder Check to see that the channel faders of ch1 16 and the master fader are set to completely down and that TRIM A to H are set to LINE position fully turn to left Also use connect a headphone or monitor speakers to monitor the sound QUOD000000 Caution MASTER 31 Fostex F CO I Preparing to Record Connectthe sound source to record to the INPUT 1 9 A jack Press the INPUT SEL key Key Flashes ORANGE CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch9 16 gt Flashes GREEN Indicates that all channels are TRK Track the following LCD display appears WARNING In DIRECT Recording all channel faders are basically TRK If there is channel in which the IN Input RED Flashing press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of that channel so it is a TRK Press the DIRECT REC TRK key RED Flashing The menu to select the track to record appears
311. ting an optional Fostex CD RW drive Model CD 1A in the VF160 or by connecting an external CD RW drive unit via the SCSI port Youcan also make an original audio CD using the CD R disc Note that not all SCSI CD RW drives in the market can be used e Save load to S P DIF or adat digital signal e MIDIclockand song position pointer and MTC MIDI Time Code output e MMC MIDI Machine Control e Slave program run from external MTC input e Internal metronome function to rhythm guide recordings e Bar beat edit cut off clock with bar beat resolution e Six editing memory points and 7 marked points e 0 10 second pre roll time settings ss hie O Fostex Before Operating This section defines the contents names and terms the user should know prior to actually operating the VF160 Please read the overview before going any farther with your new recorder as it will save you a lot of time in the long run Two RECORDING Modes The VF160 has 2 recording modes called REC ASSIGN DIRECT Recording The first recording mode is the DIRECT REC mode This recording mode is mainly used to Record signals that are not processed and input in A to H and Simultaneously record all signals input in A to H on separate tracks In this mode the signals input in A to H are gain tuned with the TRIM knob then directly sent to the recorder track The tracks are recorded as shown at the input terminal The A input signals are re
312. ting process only effects the program currently selected Note that the editing process other than Track Exchange is only an option for real tracks Trk 1 16 To edit data on additional tracks Trk 17 24 exchange it to a real track to execute the editing process Copy amp Paste Copy amp Paste refers to the procedure to temporarily copy to a clipboard Copy Clip a specific range of data on a voluntary track That copied data can then be pasted toa specific paste point on a voluntary track Since the data copied remains in the clipboard even after pasting the data that same copied data can be pasted numerous times CLIPBOARD IN POINT CLIPBOARD OUT POINT COPY ae ye SOURCE TRACK COPY CLIP AUTO PUNCH INPOINT PASTE PASTE TRACK Copy amp Paste and Move amp Paste Move amp Paste Move amp Paste resembles the Copy amp Paste feature and refers to the procedure to temporarily move toa clipboard Move Clip a specific range of data on a voluntary track The difference between the Move amp Paste and Copy amp Paste feature is that with Move amp Paste the original data moved can only be pasted ONCE At the point the move data is pasted the data in the clipboard and original data is no longer available to paste again CLIPBOARD IN POINT aS CLIPBOARD OUT POINT MOVE vise SOURCE TRACK MOVE CLIP AUTO PUNCH INPOINT PASTE PASTE DESTINATION TRACK F2 E VASO Fostex Copy
313. ting the Fostex Model 8051 foot switch unlatched type 68 SCSI Connector This is where external SCSI devices SCSI ID to 6 for backup purposes are connected Connector Half pitch D sub 50 pin female 69 POWER switch This turns ON OFF the power of the VF160 70 AC IN Jack This is where the accessory power cable is inserted For more details refer to the respective instructions of each item Front Panel 71 71 Blank Panel The optional CD 1A is installed you can save load song data in CD RW CD R discs or produce an original audio CD To install optional equipment refer to page 144 as VASO Fostex About the hard disk storage device The VF160 is complete with a 3 5 inch E IDE hard disk storage device which is formatted in the Master 16 mode Therefore there is no need to newly assemble a hard disk or to format the hard disk The user can immediately start recording with the VF160 Note that the current hard disk can also be replaced with another model for use with the VF160 However please only use hard disks that Fostex recommends Reformatting the hard disk This section describes how to reformat the hard disk The VF160 adopts a FDMS 3 Fostex Disk Management System 3 format which is a Fostex exclusive format Eight additional tracks can be used in addition to recording and playing 16 tracks of uncompressed 44 1kHz 16 bit high quality sound i The hard disk formatted in the
314. tion song Set Rec Protect menu in the setup mode to Off Now you can overwrite the demonstration song on program 1 by a new material See page 133 for details about how to make the record protect setting to Off If you wish to record a material onto program 1 after deleting the demonstration song Delete program 1 After deleting program 1 a new blank program 1 is automatically created onto which you can record a new material See page 71 for details about how to delete a program 27 Fostex F I amp Connections of Peripheral Equipment The VF160 is equipped with input output jacks to connect the following sound sources and external equipment Always turn the MASTER fader MON OUT knob and PHONES knob to O when connecting the external equipment to the input output jacks Compressor Limitter i oooo oooo Monitor Speaker Microphone Input Output tt Microphone Um BEEEE oe A Keyboard Unbalanced output Balanced output Headphones Single processor etc SSS a SS 0000y O68 t Sequencer PC w sequence software etc SCSI devices Save Load MIDI OUT MIDI IN i AC 100V Digital In Out SAHARNA AD S P DIF Io ES Analog input
315. to 2dBV approx 48dBu to 4dBu Connector XLR 3 31 type No 2 Hot Phantom power 48V for condenser mics This input is disconnected when INPUT UNBAL jacks G and H are plugged INPUT UNBAL Unbalanced Jack G H Connections with unbalanced output from external sound source Standard Input Level 50dBV to 2dBV Connector Phones jack INPUT UNBAL jacks G and H are disconnected when this input is plugged INSERT Jack G H External effector generally acompressor limiter etc only used for G and H channel input is connected Standard Input Output Level 10dBV Use a Y cable as shown below to connect an external effector since the 6 TRS phones jack is used To Effect Input TIP aie GND RING RETURN From Effect Output 16 MON OUT PHCHIES 8 9 10 5 MON OUT Monitor Output Jack L R Connect a speaker with internal amp or amp speaker for monitoring purposes Standard Output Level 10dBV Connector Phones jack 6 PHONES Headphones Jack Headphones connection for monitoring purposes Connector TRS Phones jack 7 PEAK LED 1 to 8 Lights ON if the input signal is approx 2dB lower than the clipping level Tune the TRIM knob whether to light ON or OFF the LED for the gain 8 TRIM Knob 1 to 8 Adjusts the gain according to the input signal Gain is adjustable between 50dBV MIC and 2dBV LINE 9 MON OUT Monitor Output Knob Adjusts th
316. ue for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the VF160 1 Select Fader Fix in the menu selection display and press the ENTER YES key The currently set will flash Off will flash in the initial setting SETUP R24 Select Heny Load P Save Poh Reserved Fader Fix Fader Fecall 2 Select the desired item with the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key The selected item will be set On For all modes manipulation of the Channel fader Master fader will have not affect on the sound volume Any accidental shifting of the fader position by vibration and misoperation can be prevented Off Initial setting Manipulation of the Channel fader Master fader will affect the sound volume 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode Fader Recall Mode Setting Fader Recall In the Setup of the fader recall mode menu whether each channel input fader master fader settings should be recalled or not at scene recall can be setup lt Caution gt When changing the setting from any option other than Off to Off or from CH amp MST to MST or CH Level Adjust Sure appears in the display this is because after a scene is recalled the physical fader positions may not match the levels Press the ENTER YES
317. urce channels by individually tuning the signal level sent to EFFECT1 EFFECT2 upon adjust ing the above effect send level 48 ees VE IGo FOSTEX Chapter 3 Advanced mixer operations This section describes practical operations of the mixer including functions that are not described in Basic opera tions as well as detailed information about settings Initial condition when the power is turned on When you turn the power on the VF160 shows the start up display FOSTEX gt Initial gt Current DR IDE gt Format Type Standard or Quick and then becomes ready In this condition only the CH STATUS CH SEL key STOP key EFF 1 key and EFF 2 key light on the panel while the display looks as shown below In this manual we refer to this display as the Normal display in which you can see the current recorder position is at the beginning ABS OOM OOS of the program 1 P01 Fe OO0000G00606 O00 Light in green Light in green Wiese Light in green Operation while the Normal display is shown Fader The fader for each channel 1 through 16 controls the level of TRACK or INPUT signal fed to the stereo output or the Recbusses If two adjacent channels are fader paired the fader on the odd channel controls both channel lev els The master fader controls the total level of the stere
318. ut from the VF 160 set to MTC the SETUP mode MIDI sync signal output setting Refer to page 130 SETUP mode MIDI sync signal output setting for operating procedure Seta random offset time by the SETUP mode MTC offset time setting Refer to page 131 SETUP mode MTC offset time setting for operating procedure Inthe SETUP mode MTC offset mode setting whetherthe MTC offset time setup in Step 2 should be output ABS at the ABS 00m 00s 00f 00sf position or atthe 001 BAR 1 BEAT OOCLK bar signature must be selected Refer to page 132 SETUP mode MTC offset mode setting for operating procedure Setup to the same frame rate as that setup by the sequence software by MTC Frame rate setting of the SETUP mode Refer to page 131 SETUP mode MTC Frame rate setting for operating procedure and details Setto the same figure as the sequence software MMC device number by the SETUP mode MIDI device ID setting When the sequence software transmits by 7F it means ALL DEVICE and therefore it need not be setup Refer to page 136 SETUP mode MIDI device ID setting for operating procedure and details Press the DISP SEL key while holding down the SHIFT key to show time base in the MTC display lt Notes on MTC related setups gt By MTC offset time setting and MTC offset mode setting at what position AB
319. ven when the power is off Make sure you choose the right program before setting this mode FF HF 1 Select a program for which to set a tempo setting 2 Under the menu selection display select Tempo Set and press the ENTER YES key The display will change confirming the current tempo setting At the initial setting the display will be as shown below indicating that tempo of the first beat for the 001 bar is 120 and subsequent tempo is not setup Insert New Event should be selected at setup of a new tempo When the JOG dial is rotated the currently displayed items can be selected alternately aos Set i Hi BAR 1 New Registering of Tempo 1 Under the above Confirmation display select Insert New Event and press the ENTER YES key The Insert New Event section will change to new tempo setup display and 002 will flash The bar value thus displayed will be the last setup bar value 1 and tempo value will be identical with the last setting Example In the initial setup state OO2BAR 13 4 120 will be displayed PT Set ARI J 128 Flashing Akid J 178 128 2 Input the desired bar with the JOG dial and press the ENTER YES key The bar value that can be input is identical with the above signature setup When the ENTER YES key is pressed beat value will change to flashing Input the desire
320. way to the right The source channel PAN can be op tionally set ONLY when there are two REC tracks set Fostex F GOO Be Recording Play 1 Locate the time to start recording on the VF 160 1 Locate the time in which recording was started REC starttime 2 Press the PLAY key while the RECORD key is depressed 2 Press the PLAY key to check the sound recorded to start recording The ch1 fader can be used to adjust the play level The CH STATUS CHSEL key and RECORD key of ch1 lights up RED indicating that recording is taking place The signals recorded on track 1 can be checked 3 Press the STOP key when recording is completed to stop the VF160 Please Wait will appear on the LCD then return to the Normal Display Tips UNDO REDO By pressing the UNDO REDO key after recording the record ing is undone and the track returns to the pre REC state where there is no recording UNDO By pressing the UNDO These procedures complete the instructions to record REDO key again the recording on track is redone to the post to track 1 with the BUSS recording option REC state REDO Recording 8 INPUTs to Tracks 7 and 8 Here we will record all 8 sound sources connected to inputs A to H to tracks 7 and 8 of the recorder 46 Es RIGO FOSE Preparing to Record Connect to the INPUT jack the sound source to record P
321. wever this can be prevented since during normal use the number of signals input are reduced when recording to tracks 9 to 16 leaving only the solo part etc 13 aa CH STATUS CH SEL key Channels 1 to 8 Channel Fader CH STATUS CH SEL key Channels 9 to 16 Channel Fader CH STATUS CH SEL Key The CH STATUS CH SEL Key is the most important key when operating the VF160 The status and contents of operation varies according to selections made with this key Under normal conditions the key illuminates or flashes toindicate that the signal is input INPUT into the current channel fader the playback sound TRACK is started or the track is ready to record READY Pressing the CH STATUS CH SEL key alone switches between on and off mute of the corresponding fader Pressing this key while holding down the SHIFT key switches between on and off of the solo function NGE RED GREEN a MUTE To set the send level to the built in effect or set the equalizer settings of each channel press the keys to set each parameter shown in the figure below and then press the CH STATUS CH SEL key to select the channel to set It is possible for example to set the PAN of one channel signal when the channel 1 CH STATUS CH SEL key is pressed after pressing the PAN key All channels can be set by pressing the CH STATUS CH SEL key of channels 1to 16 When th
322. when creating a program According to the following figure the recorder is located at a OOM minute OOS second ABS point The H hour appears when the ABS exceeds the one hour mark ABS Ois the universal standard point to manage the recorder location and correlates with other time bases FHI 1 SOG SERRREREE 12345678 4I0I23NIS E H LR BAR BEAT CLK indicate the Bar Beat Clock that are created with the tempo map beat and tempo ofthe VF160 According to the following figure the recorder is located at 002BAR Bar 2 1BEAT Beat 1 of the BAR BEAT CLK BAR BEAT CLK set the ABS O location as Bar 002 as the offset position The location of the bar thereafter is determined according to the beat and tempo setting The default setting of ABS 0 is set at Bar 002 however this setting is variable between Bars 009 and 002 EaR d GEZeoR daf Pal FUE SHA EERE te 12345678 AIOMI4iSib JE LA 14 MTCset the ABS 0 location to MTC H M S In other words MTC sets the time base to start MTC from a certain time which serves as the offset time to synchronize the following 24 hour MTC time base with the ABS to count the time If for example ABS 0 is set to MTC 1H then MTC starts from 1H and ABS 1H one hour elapsed will be MTC 2H The MTC time set as ABS Ois called the MTC Offset According to the figure below the current location of the recorder is at MTC OOH hour 59M minutes 57
323. when the Adat Mixer Mode is active MIDI IN MIDI Sound Source MIDI IN MIDI OUT Computer System win a MID audio integrated software MIT ud our adat ouT Supporting MMC MTC and a sound card equipped with the Adat optical input Control the monitor levels of audio tracks 1 through 8 of the personal computer POl 0001 S lilInit i 12345678 ata dE LR Adjusts the master level Control the monitor levels of MIDI Control the monitor levels of analog sound sources instruments Setup of the VF160 Connection to external equipment 1 Setboth digital input and digital output settings in the Setup 1 Connect the VF160 DATA IN and DATA OUT connectors mode to adat respectively to the adat IN and adat OUT connectors of the See pages 134 and 135 for details about settings personal computer containing a sound card 2 When the Normal display is shown press the INPUT SEL key 2 Connect the MIDI OUT connectors of the personal computer while holding down the SHIFT key to make the Adat Mixer tothe MIDI IN connectors of the MIDI sound source device and Mode active the VF160 and connect MIDI sound sources to the VF160 inputs 1 through 6 3 Connect analog sound sources such as mic
324. y MID G F Q key or LO G key and switch to channel parameter edit EQ edit mode to equalize the source channel to record Then press the CH STATUS CH SEL key of ch16 to adjust the sound with a customized equalization For more details refer to Adjusting the Equalizer 3 The final REC level REC BUSS Master Level is adjusted according to the following instructions After adjusting the master level press the EXIT NO key to return to the Normal Display Tips Adjusting the REC BUSS Master Level Turn the JOG dial with the system showing the follow ing display to make the final adjustments for the REC BUSS Master Level Press the BUSS REC TRK key once more to switch to this display from the Normal Display The default setting of the REC BUSS Master Level is fac tory preset to level 80 Use the JOG dial to turn the REC LVL knob on the LCD as shown below and adjust the number setting in real time The REC BUSS Master Level can also be adjusted adjustable range 00 99 REC BUSS Master Level adjustment icon g RELL REC BUSS Master Level appears Tips Adjusting the PAN Setting of the Source Channel When recording on one track with the BUSS RECORD option the PAN setting of the source channel is either fixed to the left or right If the REC track is an odd number the source channel PAN is fixed all the way to the left If the REC track is an even number the source channel PAN is fixed all the
325. yed back If the metronome function is not to be used be sure to reset it to Off Initial Setting Off 2 Select On or Off with the JOG dial and press the ENTER Available setting Off or On YES key The setting is applicable song by song The selected item will be setup The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data The setting is memorized even when the power is off Make sure you choose the right program before setting this On Metronome sound will be output from mode track 16 1 Select Click in the menu selection display and press the Off defaut Metronome Sours Wi not DE output ENTER YES key The currently set item Off or On will flash Off will f flash if in the initial state 3 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to exit from the SETUP mode Select Henu l Tempo Set Title Edit FOGMel Delete FGH F Clicka Preroll Time HHS 1 29 fostex F GO DT Setting a preroll value Preroll Time The VF160 features a Preroll function that enables you to locate a position a few seconds prior to a specified locate point The Setting a preroll value menu enables you to set the preroll time in seconds The Preroll function is convenient when you wish to monitor the audio data from a point slightly before the locate point 1 Select Preroll Time in the menu select

Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents